Skip to main content

Full text of "The Urban Planning Process"

See other formats


THE    URBAN    PLANNING    PROCESS 


JULY     1972    -    NUMBER    22 


3  ^)   i^nfo 


BY 

THOMAS    A.  DAMES 


JOINT  HIGHWAY  RESEARCH  PROJECT 

PURDUE    UNIVERSITY     AND 

INDIANA    STATE    HIGHWAY     COMMISSION 


'  THE  URBAN  PLANNING  PROCESS 


TO:     J.  F.  McLaughlin,  Director 

Joint  Highway  Research  Project 

FROM:   II.  L.  Michael,  Associate  Director 
Joint  Highway  Research  Project 


July  26,  1972 


File:   3-7 


The  attached  Report  titled  "The  Urban  Planning  Process' 
has  been  authored  by  Thomas  Allan  Dames  under  the  guidance 
of  Professor  W.  L.  Greece   Mr.  Dames  used  this  Report  as 
his  thesis  in  partial  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for 
the  Ph.D.  degree. 

The  report  is  a  presentation  of  the  methodology  common 
to  urban  planning  over  the  entire  ranges  of  such  planning 
from  the  most  comprehensive  to  the  most  limited  and  from 
the  greatest  in  areal  extent  to  the  smallest.   The  process, 
from  a  definable  beginning,  through  many  intermediate  steps 
to  a  definable  end  is  developed  and  conceptually  modeled. 
Planning  procedures  are  outlined  and  discussed  and  examples 
are  presented. 

This  research  was  conducted  by  Mr.  Dames  under  a  U.  S. 
Navy  educational  assignment  and  is  presented  to  the  Board 
as  information. 

Respectfully  submitted, 


IILM:ms 


cc 


S 


S;,-<,  / 


Harold   L.    Michael 
Associate   Director 


w. 

L. 

Dolch 

R. 

H. 

Harrell 

R. 

L. 

Eskew 

M. 

L. 

Hayes 

W. 

11. 

Goetz 

C. 

W. 

Love 11 

W. 

L. 

Grecco 

G. 

W. 

Marks 

M. 

J. 

Gutzwiller 

R. 

D. 

Miles 

G. 

K. 

Hallock 

J. 

W. 

Miller 

C. 

M. 

F. 

B. 

Scholer 
Scott 

J. 
N. 

II. 
E. 

A. 
W. 
R. 
J. 

Spooner 
Steinkamp 
J.  Walsh 
Yoder 

THE  URBAN  PLANNING  PROCESS 

by 
Thomas  Allan  Dames 


Joint  Highway  Research  Project 
File:   3-7 


Purdue  University 

Lafayette,   Indiana 

July  26,  1972 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

LYRASIS  members  and  Sloan  Foundation;  Indiana  Department  of  Transportation 


http://www.archive.org/details/urbanplanningproOOdame 


Ill 


ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

With  a  deep  sense  of  gratitude,  the  author  wishes  to 
personally  thank  Dr.  William  L.  Grecco,  Professor  of  Urhan 
Planning  and  Engineering  at  Purdue  University,  for  his 
enlightened  leadership  and  counsel,  not  only  during  the 
conduct  of  this  research,  but  throughout  our  warm  and 
professional  association.   All  that  is  worthwhile  in  this 
work  was  born  of  this  association.   To  receive  such  counsel 
from  Dr.  Grecco  is  an  unforgettable  intellectual  pleasure. 

For  their  interest,  guidance,  and  reasoned  criticism 
of  this  research,  the  author  wishes  to  sincerely  thank 
Professor  Harold  L.  Michael,  Head  of  Urban  Planning  and 
Engineering  at  Purdue,  Professor  Robert  D.  Miles  of  the 
School  of  Civil  Engineering,  and  Dr.  Colin  L.  Moodie  of 
the  School  of  Industrial  Engineering.   Their  participation 
was  most  welcome  and  they  constituted  a  most  sympathetic 
audience  for  the  early  drafts  of  this  material. 

I  must  also  acknowledge  a  strong  debt  to  my  fellow 
officers  in  the  Civil  Engineer  Corps,  United  States  Navy, 
for  altogether  demonstrating  a  standard  of  professional 
excellence  not  exceeded  elsewhere  in  my  experience.   With 
a  sincere  concern  for  the  inequity  of  singling  out  one  such 
officer,  I  must  nonetheless  note  that  Rear  Admiral  Spencer  R 
Smith  afforded  me  the  opportunity  to  observe  this  excellence 
at  first  hand,  and  never  failed  to  encourage  me  to  emulate 
it. 

To  Dr.  John  F.  McLaughlin,  Head  of  the  School  of  Civil 
Engineering  at  Purdue,  and  his  staff,  I  owe  a  debt  of  thanks 
for  the  ease  of  reentry  to  the  Academe. 


LV 


To  my  fellow  students,  past  and  present,  I  offer  a 
warm  thank  you  for  a  vibrant  and  stimulating  environment  of 
intellectual  endeavor. 

I  acknowledge  the  professional  and  personal  counsel  of 
Dr.  Charles  C.  Schimpeler  of  Schimpeler  -  Corradino 
Associates,  Louisville,  Kentucky.   Dr.  Schimpeler' s  unfailing 
enthusiasm  and  competence  is  a  joy  to  experience. 

We  are  all,  of  course,  the  products  of  our  experience 
and  I  must  finally  acknowledge  the  unrepayable  debt  to  my 
parents  and  my  family  for  providing  environments  conducive 
to  intellectual  persuit,  often  at  considerable  sacrifice. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

Page 

LIST  OF  TABLES ix 

LIST  OF  FIGURES x 

ABSTRACT xii 

INTRODUCTION   1 

CHAPTER  I.   GOALS  AND  OBJECTIVES   6 

Identifying  the  Community  Influentials  12 

The  Development  of  Community  Goals  and 

Objectives 13 

The  Ordering  of  Community  Goals  and  Objectives  .  26 

Notes 36 

CHAPTER  II.   ORGANIZATION  38 

A  Conceptual  Model  of  Planning  Activity   ....  38 

The  Use  of  the  Model  in  Planning  Organization   .  44 

The  Use  of  the  Model  in  Study  Design 50 

The  Study  Design  Methodology  57 

Notes 66 

CHAPTER  III.   INVENTORY  .....  67 

A  Data-Use  Matrix   72 

Land  Data 83 

Land  Use 83 

Ownership 84 

Frontage  and  Area 84 

Easements 84 

Landmark 84 

Number  of  Parking  Spaces  84 

Assessed  Value  of  Land  and  Improve- 
ments     84 

Real  Estate  Tax  Revenue 84 

Sale  Price  and  Sale  Data 85 

Summary 85 

Street  Data 85 

Intersection  85 

Length  of  Segment,  Right-of-way 

Width  and  Pavement  Width 85 

Functional  Class  85 

Structural  Composition  and  Percent 

Grade 86 

Average  Traffic  and  Peak  Hour  Traffic .  86 

Number  of  Accidents 86 

Curb  Parking 86 


VI 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  (cont.) 

Page 

Sidewalks  and  Street  Lights   86 

Number  of  Lanes  and  Loading  Zone  ...  86 

Transit  Route  and  School  Route  ....  86 

Access  Control  87 

Condition 87 

Utilities  Sharing  Right-of-way  ....  87 

Summary 87 

Structural  Data 87 

Year  Built  and  Type  of  Construction   .  87 

Building  Condition  87 

Number  of  Floors,  Total  Floor  Area 

and  First  Floor  Area 88 

Number  and  Type  of  Building  Code 

Violations 88 

Rehabilitation  Cost 88 

Police  Calls  and  Fire  Calls 88 

Utility  Service   88 

Summary 88 

Dwelling  Unit  Data 89 

Percent  Vacant  89 

Residents  by  Sex  and  Age  Groups   ...  89 

Family  Income   89 

Family  Education  and  Occupation   ...  89 
Vehicles  Owned,  Place  of  Work  and 

Means  of  Transportation  to  Work   .  .  90 
Number  and  Types  of  Communicable 

Diseases 90 

Rent 90 

Summary 90 

Non-Dwelling  Unit  Data 91 

Peak  Shift  Employees,  Number  of 
Employees  and  Optimum  Total 

Employment 91 

Major  Product  Groups 91 

Percent  Sales  Outside  the  Area  ....  91 

Summary 91 

Some  Concepts  of  Sampling 92 

Sample  Size 94 

Sample  Selection   95 

Simple  Random  Sample  95 

Stratified  Random  Sample  96 

Systematic  Sample  and  Stratified 

Systematic  Sample   96 

Cluster  Sampling  97 

Error 97 

Accuracy  and  Precision   98 


vii 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  (cont.) 

Page 

Urban  Information  Systems   101 

Information  Hierarchy  102 

Levels  of  System  Sophistication  102 

System  Development   102 

Summary 105 

Notes 105 

CHAPTER  IV.   ANALYSIS 106 

The  Use  of  Models 109 

The  Strategy  and  Tactics  of  Modeling   .  .  .  110 

An  Example 113 

The  Use  of  Systems  Analysis 117 

General  Systems  Theory   117 

Urban  Systems  Analysis   121 

CHAPTER  V.   FORECASTING  12  5 

The  Forecasting  Model   126 

Substance 126 

Area 134 

Procedure 135 

Forecasting  Techniques  136 

Economic  Activity  Forecasts  136 

Population  Estimates  and  Forecasts   ....  145 

Land  Use  Forecasts 147 

Transportation  Forecasts   149 

Summary 158 

CHAPTER  VI.   DESIGN 159 

Considerations  of  Form 161 

Considerations  of  Quality   169 

Operational  Considerations  .  , 176 

An  Example 179 

Summary 183 

Notes 183 

CHAPTER  VII.   EVALUATION   184 

The  Conceptual  Model  of  the  Evaluation  Phase  .  .  186 

Substantive  Scope  186 

Areal  Scope 188 

Procedural  Scope   190 

Evaluation  Steps  190 

Evaluation  Roles  190 

Evaluation  Strategies 191 

Summary 191 


Vlll 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  (cont.) 

Page 

Evaluation  Techniques   192 

Intuitive  Methods  193 

Monetary  Valuation  Methods   194 

The  Equivalent  Uniform  Annual  Cost 

Method 194 

The  Present  Worth  of  Costs  Method   .  .  195 
The  Equivalent  Uniform  Annual  Net 

Return  Method   195 

The  Net  Present  Value  Method 195 

The  Benefit/Cost  Ratio  Method   ....  196 

The  Rate  of  Return  Method 196 

Social  Accounts  Valuation  Methods  198 

Utility  Value  Methods  ....  199 

Goal  Achievement  Methods   201 

Psychological  Valuation  Methods  205 

Summary 206 

A  Note  on  Practice 207 

Conclusions 211 

Notes 211 

CHAPTER  VIII.   IMPLEMENTATION  213 

The  Conceptual  Model  of  the  Implementation 

Phase 215 

Substantive  Scope  215 

Areal  Scope 219 

Procedural  Scope   221 

Operational  Considerations  223 

A  Note  on  Federal  Assistance 233 

Summary 234 

Notes 235 

CONCLUDING  REMARKS   2  36 

BIBLIOGRAPHY   238 

General  References  247 

VITA 258 


IX 


LIST  OF  TABLES 


Table  Page 

1-1     Sample  Community  Goals  and  Objectives   ....  15 

1 1 - 1    Sample  Work  Item  Resource  Assignment 62 

III-l   Descriptive  Data  Showing  a  University  Level 

of  Service 70 

III-2   Sample  Land  Use  Plan  Objectives  and  Data 

Items 73 

V-l    Cents  Worth  of  Input  per  Dollar  Output  ....  138 

V-2    Input  Requirements  in  Dollars   139 

V-3    Allocation  of  Sales  by  Percent 140 

V-4    Allocation  of  Sales  by  Percent  Direct  and 

Indirect 141 

VI-1    Site  Features/Design  Considerations:  Steeply 

Sloped  Site 171 

VII-1   Conceptual  Payoff  Matrix  199 

VII-2   The  Goals-Achievement  Matrix  202 

VII-3   Historical  Evaluation  Technique  Emphases  .  .  .  210 

VIII-1  Methods  of  Implementing  Environmental  Policies, 

by  Land  Form 229 


LIST  OF  FIGURES 

Figure  Page 

1-1     A  Conceptual  Visualization  of  the  Client 

Constituency  10 

II-l   A  Conceptual  Model  of  Planning  Activity   ...     39 

II -2   A  Conceptual  Elemental  Event  in  the  Planning 

Model 41 

I 1-3   The  Community  Land  Use  Forecast  in  the  Model  .     43 

I 1-4   The  Organization  Phase  in  the  Conceptual 

Model  of  Planning  Activity 45 

II-5   Conceptual  Demand  Curves  47 

II -6   The  Use  of  the  Conceptual  Model  in  Planning 

Organization  52 

II-7  Four  Conceptual  Staffing  Schemes  54 

I 1-8  Sample  Parking  Study  Flow  Diagram   58 

LI-9  Sample  School  Study  Flow  Diagram  59 

11-10  Sample  Organization  Phase  Flow  Diagram  ....  61 

III-l   The  Inventory  Phase  in  the  Conceptual  Model 

of  Planning  Activity  68 

III-2  A  Sample  Data-Use  Matrix  78 

III-3  The  Relationship  Between  Sampling  and  Non- 
sampling  Error 99 

III-4  The  Relationship  Between  Accuracy  and 

Precision 100 

1II-5  Logic  Diagram  for  Coding  Information  to 

Land  Parcel 104 

IV-1   The  Conceptual  Model  of  Statewide  Recreational 

Travel  to  State  Parks   114 

V-l    The  Forecasting  Phase  in  the  Conceptual  Model 

of  Planning  Activity  127 

V-2    A  Conceptual  Forecasting  Model  128 


XI 


LIST  OF  FIGURES  (cont.) 

Figure  Page 

V-3    Conceptual  Forecasted  Outcomes  132 

VI -1    Example  Demand  Curves,  Golf  and  Swimming  .  .  .    180 

VII-1  The  Evaluation  Phase  in  the  Conceptual  Model 

of  Planning  Activity  187 

VIII-1  The  Implementation  Phase  in  the  Conceptual 

Model  of  Planning  Activity 216 


Xll 


ABSTRACT 


Dames,  Thomas  Allan.   Ph.D.,  Purdue  University,  August,  1972. 
The  Urban  Planning  Process.   Major  Professor:   William  L. 
Greece 

The  precept  central  to  this  work  is  that  there  is  a 
methodology  common  to  urban  planning  over  the  entire  ranges 
of  such  planning  from  the  most  comprehensive  to  the  most 
limited  and  from  the  greatest  in  areal  extent  to  the 
smallest.   This  common  methodology  is  considered  as  a 
process  with  a  definable  beginning,  a  definable  end  and 
requisite  intermediate  steps. 

The  beginning  occurs  with  a  need  to  plan  perceived  by 
the  client  constituency  of  the  planner  and  refined  through 
the  formulation  of  a  set  of  goals  and  objectives  of  this 
constituency.   This  procedure,  as  well  as  necessary 
administrative  requirements,  occurs  in  the  organization 
phase  of  the  planning  process.   The  planning  process  continues 
sequentially  through  a  series  of  steps  or  phases  to  investi- 
gate and  institute  proposals  deemed  desireable  and  feasible 
based  upon  the  enunciated  goals  and  objectives.   The  phases 
have  been  designated  as  that  of  organization,  inventory, 
analysis,  forecasting,  design,  evaluation,  and  implementa- 
tion.  The  distinctions  among  the  phases  are  both  conceptual 
and  operational,  not  withstanding  due  regard  given  to  feed- 
back and  feedforeward  elements. 

A  conceptual  model  of  the  planning  process  is  intro- 
duced and  examined  throughout  this  research.   It  is  hypothes- 
ized that  this  model  adequately  demonstrates  the  sequential 
nature  of  the  planning  process.   It  further  demonstrates 
that  procedural  considerations  can  be  used  to  conceptually 
examine  the  substantive  scope  of  planning,  from  the  most 


Xlll 


general  to  the  most  specific,  and  the  areal  scope  of  planning 
from  the  greatest  to  the  smallest.   The  interaction  of  sub- 
stance, area,  and  process  defines  planning  in  both  a  con- 
ceptual and  operational  sense. 

Specific  examples  of  planning  procedures  are  intro- 
duced in  the  research  with  a  twofold  purpose:   to  demonstrate 
the  mechanics  of  a  specific  technique;  and,  more  importantly, 
to  bridge  the  gap  between  the  themes  of  concept  and  opera- 
tionally. 

The  research  is  addressed  to  specific  audiences.   These 
include  the  engineer  who  finds  himself  in  a  planning  situa- 
tion, representatives  of  other  professions  similarly  situated, 
executives  in  both  the  public  and  private  sectors  and, 
generally,  that  individual  with  little  planning  education  or 
experience  who  is  faced  with  the  need  to  participate  in 
urban  planning. 

A  second  audience  is  the  Academe.   A  work  of  this  type 
will  constitute  a  sound  basis  for  a  graduate  or  undergraduate 
introduction  to  urban  planning  irrespective  of  the  student's 
main  area  of  interest. 

A  third  audience  is  the  planning  profession  itself. 
The  body  of  literature  on  the  planning  process  is  disjointed 
and  fragmented.   Typically  it  consists  of  four  types  of 
documents:   detailed  technical  treatises  on  a  particular 
technique;  somewhat  more  general  works  albiet  about  a 
specific  type  of  planning;  histories  about  the  planning 
process  in  a  specific  situation  participated  in  or  observed 
by  the  author;  and  philosophical  works  about  the  need  to 
plan.   This  is  an  impressive  and  valuable  body  of  knowledge 
but,  perhaps  owing  to  its  generally  recent  vintage,  it  has 
not  been  brought  together  in  a  format  such  as  this. 


INTRODUCTION 


The  precept  central  to  this  work  is  that  there  is  a 
methodology  common  to  urban  planning  over  the  entire  ranges 
of  such  planning  from  the  most  comprehensive  to  the  most 
limited  and  from  the  greatest  in  areal  extent  to  the 
smallest.   This  common  methodology  is  considered  as  a 
process  with  a  definable  beginning,  a  definable  end  and 
requisite  intermediate  steps. 

The  beginning  occurs  with  a  perceived  need  to  plan. 
This  perception  has  as  its  basis  the  difference  between  the 
style  of  life  currently  held  by  the  perceptor  and  that  style 
defined  as  "better"  based  upon  his  set  of  values.   In  a 
macro  sense,  the  exploration,  definition  and  development  of 
the  various  sets  of  values  held  by  the  public  defines  the 
public  purpose.   The  public  is  made  up  of  those  people 
directly  affected  by  the  plan  and  is  termed  the  client 
constituency  of  the  planner  so  as  not  to  limit  this  discussion 
Lo  the  more  restrictive  sense  of  public;  i.e.,  governmental, 
planning.   The  formulized  and  measured  sets  of  values  are 
called  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency 
and  serve  as  the  conceptual  basis  for  specific  planning 
endeavors . 

The  planning  process  then  runs  sequentially  through  a 
series  of  steps  or  phases  to  investigate  the  institute 
proposals  deemed  desirable  and  feasible  based  upon  the 
enunciated  goals  and  objectives.   The  phases  have  been 
designated  as  that  of  organization,  inventory,  analysis, 
forecasting,  design,  evaluation,  and  implementation.   The 
distinctions  among  the  phases  are  both  conceptual  and 
operational,  not  withstanding  due  regard  given  to  feedback 
and  feedforeward  elements. 


A  conceptual  model  of  the  planning  process  is  intro- 
duced and  examined  throughout  this  work.   It  is  hypothesized 
that  this  model  adequately  demonstrates  the  sequential 
nature  of  the  planning  process.   It  further  demonstrates 
that  procedural  considerations  can  be  used  to  conceptually 
examine  the  substantive  scope  of  planning,  from  the  most 
general  to  the  most  specific,  and  the  areal  scope  of 
planning,  from  the  greatest  to  the  smallest.   The  inter- 
action of  substance,  area,  and  process  defines  planning 
in  both  a  conceptual  and  operational  sense. 

These  themes  of  concept  and  operationality  run  through- 
out the  work.   In  maintaining  the  two,  some  information  at 
the  extremes  is  necessarily  omitted.   As  a  result,  this 
work  is  neither  a  theoretical  development  of  the  planning 
process  nor  a  procedural  manual.   It  rather  is  conducted  on 
a  level  of  discussion  intermediate  between  the  two.   A 
further  theme  is  one  of  commonality.   Only  where  absolutely 
necessary  were  distinctions  made  between  planning  in  the 
public  sector  and  planning  in  the  private  sector.   Institu- 
tional considerations  were  also  minimized,  so  little 
reference  is  made  to  planning  in  a  large,  complex  and  highly 
structured  environment  or  one  less  so  in  any  of  these 
qualities.   It  is  thought  that  such  considerations  have 
impacts  which  will  not  detract  significantly  from  the 
information  presented.   Balancing  this  commonality,  specific 
examples  have  been  included  with  a  twofold  purpose:   to 
demonstrate  the  mechanics  of  a  specific  technique;  and, 
more  importantly  to  bridge  the  gap  between  the  themes  of 
concept  and  operationality. 

The  examples  were  purposely  chosen  so  as  not  to  fall 
within  one  type  of  planning  from  chapter  to  chapter.  It  was 
felt  that  this  would  lend  too  much  credence  to  the  mechanics 
of  the  examples,  to  the  detriment  of  the  concepts  underlying 
those  mechanics.  There  is  a  commonality  of  concept  from  one 
type  of  planning  to  another,  quite  apart  from  whatever 


the  substance  of  the  chosen  examples  happens  to  be.   It  is 
up  to  the  reader  to  make  the  necessary  transfer  as 
appropriate . 

In  this  same  vein,  the  applications  of  the  conceptual 
model  of  planning  activity  are  suggested,  but  not  exhausted. 
The  themes  of  concept,  operationality  and  commonality 
were  nonetheless  addressed  to  specific  audiences.   These 
include  Lhe  engineer  who  finds  himself  in  a  planning 
situation,  representatives  of  other  professions  similarly 
situated,  executives  in  both  the  public  and  private  sectors 
and,  generally,  that  individual  with  little  planning  education 
or  experience  who  is  faced  with  the  need  to  participate  in 
urban  planning. 

A  second  audience  is  the  Academe.   It  is  thought  that 
a  work  of  this  type  will  constitute  a  sound  basis  for  a 
graduate  or  undergraduate  introduction  to  urban  planning 
irrespective  of  the  student's  main  area  of  interest. 

A  third  audience  is  the  planning  profession  itself. 
The  body  of  literature  on  the  planning  process  is  disjointed 
and  fragmented.   Typically  it  consists  of  four  types  of 
documents:   detailed  technical  treatises  on  a  particular 
technique;  somewhat  more  general  works  albiet  about  a 
specific  type  of  planning;  histories  about  the  planning 
process  in  a  specific  situation  participated  in  or  observed 
by  the  author;  and  philosophical  works  about  the  need  to 
plan.   This  is  an  impressive  and  valuable  body  of  knowledge 
but,  perhaps  owing  to  its  generally  recent  vintage,  it  has 
never  been  brought  together  in  a  format  such  as  this. 

Chapter  I  opens  with  a  discussion  of  the  concept  of 
the  client  constituency  and  methods  of  its  identification. 
The  discussion  then  turns  to  methods  of  identifying  the 
goals  and  objectives  of  this  constituency  and  measuring 
their  relative  importance. 

Chapter  II,  Organization,  introduces  the  conceptual 
model  of  planning  activity.   This  model,  together  with  the 


goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency  developed 
in  Chapter  I,  is  then  used  to  delimit  the  planning  area  and 
nest  the  substance  of  the  plan  into  a  hierarchy  of  planning, 
from  the  most  general  to  the  most  specific.   The  administra- 
L ion  of  the  planning  effort  is  discussed  and  the  refinement 
of  the  goals  and  objectives  into  an  operational  scheme  is 
traced  through  the  preparation  of  a  prospectus,  a  study 
design,  and  procedural  manuals. 

Chapter  III  discusses  the  inventory  of  information 
deemed  necessary  to  plan,  based  upon  the  operational  and 
administrative  refinements  executed  in  Chapter  II.   A 
data-use  matrix  is  presented  showing  the  conceptual  end 
use  of  various  data  for  typical  plans.   Discussions  of 
sampling  and  the  use  and  development  of  urban  information 
systems  close  the  chapter. 

Chapter  IV  investigates  the  analysis  of  inventoried 
data.   Typically  this  analysis  follows  the  classical 
scientific  method  of  induction,  generalization,  deduction  and 
testing.   The  use  of  models  is  defined  and  explored  and 
some  suggestions  are  offered  regarding  the  strategy  and 
tactics  of  modeling.   Two  examples  illustrate  these  concepts. 
Ceneral  systems  theory  is  outlined  and  a  discussion  on 
urban  systems  analysis  demonstrates  that  the  use  of  the 
conceptual  model  of  planning  activity  developed  in  this 
work  is  itself  a  systematic  analysis. 

Chapter  V  contains  an  investigation  of  the  problem 
that  urban  planners  face  in  dealing  with  future  events  and 
the  attendant  risk  of  forecasting.   A  conceptual  forecasting 
model  is  examined  and  a  relatively  detailed  discussion 
follows  on  the  techniques  of  forecasting  key  measures  of 
economic  activity,  population  characteristics,  land  use 
characteristics,  and  transportation  characteristics. 

Chapter  VI  on  urban  design  discusses  the  preparation 
of  a  plan,  or  a  set  of  alternative  plans,  designed  to  meet 
these  forecasted  characteristics  in  a  manner  arising  from 


and  consistant  with  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client 
constituency.   It  is  necessarily  the  most  philosophical 
phase  of  the  planning  process.   An  exploration  of  general 
and  specific  considerations  of  form  and  considerations  of 
quality  is  followed  by  a  discussion  of  the  modi  operendi 
of  urban  design.   One  such  mode  is  developed  as  an  example 
at  the  end  of  the  chapter. 

Chapter  VII  investigates  the  evaluation  phase  of  the 
conceptual  model  of  planning  activity.   As  with  other  phases, 
the  benchmarks  continue  to  be  the  goals  and  objectives  of 
the  client  constituency.   A  relatively  detailed  treatment  is 
offered   of  the  range  of  evaluative  methods  including  those 
that  are  intuitive,  monetary,  social,  utile,  goal-achieving, 
and  psychological.   Examples  of  current  practice  are 
included . 

Chapter  VIII  investigates  the  natural  and  operational 
conclusion  of  urban  planning,  implementation.  The  role  of 
the  planner  is  explored  within  the  context  of  the  con- 
ceptual model  of  planning  activity.   A  discussion  of 
implementation  strategies,  tactics,  techniques  and  aids 
closes  the  chapter. 


CHAPTER  I 
GOALS  AND  OBJECTIVES 


It  seems  logical  to  begin  the  study  of  planning  method- 
ology with  a  short  note  about  the  planner  himself  and  the 
milieus  in  which  he  must  act.   A  planner  is  one  who  plans. 
An  urban  planner  plans  aspects  of  urban  life  and  a  pro- 
fessional urban  planner  does  so  or  teaches  so  for  a  living 
with  a  further  connotation  of  working  under  an  ethic. 

It  is  not  purpose  of  this  research  to  elaborate  on  this 
theme  except  to  note  that  it  is  not  surprising  that  numerous 
Longer  established  professions  lay  some  claim  to  professional 
urban  planning  (Pollard,  1969).   Under  the  above  definitions, 
such  claims  are  justified. 

A  client  is  someone  for  whom  another  person  acts, 
again  with  an  ethical  connotation.   It  is  difficult,  but 
necessary,  for  an  urban  planner  to  correctly  identify  his 
client,  because  the  professional  relationship  established 
subsequent  to  this  is  as  delicate  as  any  repeatedly  referred 
to  in  law  or  medicine. 

The  client  of  the  professional  urban  planner  is  a 
constituency  made  up  of  the  people  affected  by  the  plan 
anu  the  employer  of  the  urban  planner.   Carried  to  its 
extreme,  we  are  each  a  constituent  client  of  any  urban  plan 
ever  conceived.   The  dilemma  presented  by  this  situation  is, 
of  course,  avoided  by  limiting  consideration  of  this  con- 
stituency to  those  persons  most  likely  to  be  materially 
affected  by  the  plan. 

Two  examples  will  suffice  to  illustrate  this.  In  the 
case  of  a  single  private  entrepreneur  who  wishes  to  develop 
Tils  vacant  property  for  residential  use  and  annexation  by 


an  existing  community,  the  client  constituency  is: 
the  entrepreneur, 

the  future  residents  of  the  property, 
the  current  and  future  residents  of  the  community , 
and,  in  some  respects,  the  current  and  future 
residents  of  the  region  encompassing  the 
community . 
In  the  case  of  the  city  manager  who  wishes  a  land  use 
plan  for  his  community,  the  client  constituency  is: 
the  city  manager, 

the  current  and  future  residents  of  the  city, 
and  probably  the  current  and  future  residents 
of  the  region  encompassing  the  city. 
Some  investigation  of  this  client  constituency  has 
been  cnrried  out  by  Kaplan  (1969)  and  he  notes  that  the 
client/planner  relationship  becomes  complexed  by  individual 
constituents  who  want  to  participate  in  the  planning  process, 
by  individual  constituents  who  view  the  employer/planner 
relationship  as  working  counter  to  their  best  interests, 
and  by  the  self  doubt  of  the  planner  himself  as  to  who 
exactly  is  his  client. 

Add  to  this  the  fact  that  decision  making  in  urban 
affairs  has  been  often  justifiably  characterized  as  incre- 
mental, remedial,  serial,  exploratory,  fragmented  and 
disjointed  (Braybrooke,  1963)  and  one  is  left  with  the 
question  "Why  plan  at  all?" 

The  reason  is  that  the  study  of  urbanization  leaves 
little  doubt  that  past  plans  have  had  an  impact  on  urban 
development.   This  impact  has  sometimes  been  generally  good, 
sometimes  generally  bad.   The  later  instances  are  often 
thought  of  as  a  failure  to  plan  but  it  is  the  contention  of 
this  work  that  they  were  the  failure  to  plan  adequately. 
Indeed,  many  of  the  serious  problems  of  American  cities 
today  have  been  traced  by  .sociologists,  politicians,  and 
urbanologists  to  the  failure-;  of  past  planning.   The  natural 


forward  extension  of  this  contention  is  that  today's  plans 
must  be  adequate  to  deal  with  problems  that  not  only  face 
cities  today  but  also  those  that  will  face  our  cities  some 
years  from  now.   A  logical  correlary  to  this  is  that  every- 
thing should  be  planned. 

Three  constraints  serve  to  keep  the  urban  planning 
profession  away  from  this  normative  state  of  perfection. 
We  cannot  be  sure  of  those  aspects  of  past  planning  that 
contribute  to  urban  malaise  today;  we  cannot  be  sure  of  the 
consequences  tomorrow  of  today's  planning;  and  we  do  not 
have  the  resources  to  plan  everything  even  if  the  causative 
relntionships  were  known.   Since  none  of  these  constraint:, 
seems  likely  to  be  overcome,  urban  planning  will  probably 
never  reach  a  normative  state  of  perfection.   But  it  is 
contended  here  that  the  profession  can  advance  toward  this 
state  of  perfection  by  an  easing  of  the  three  constraints. 
This  easing  can  be  accomplished  by  an  investigation  of  the 
goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency  to  establish 
the  direction  of  remedial  planning  (the  first  constraint), 
the  direction  of  prescriptive  planning  (the  second  constraint), 
and  the  allocation  of  scarce  resources  to  this  effort  (the 
third  constraint). 

An  investigation  of  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the 
client  requires  citizen  participation  in  the  planning  process, 
actual  or  vicarious.   It  is  important  to  consider  citizen 
participation  as  a  process  rather  than  as  a  product  of  this 
process  (Chisholm,  1970)  or  an  administrative  necessity  to 
gain  funding.   This  process  infuses  and  permeates  the 
planning  process  to  such  a  degree  that  both  the  planning 
and  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency 
change  over  time  as  a  result  of  their  interaction. 

In  discussing  planning  in  a  Swedish  suburb  Anton 

(  1969)  notes: 

The  goals  of  the  various  actors  were  developed  in  the 
process  of  bargaining  itself,  rather  than  existing  as 


predetermined,  ideas  in  the  minds  of  the  actors.   Since 
goal  modification  in  exchange  for  political  support 
was  the  essence  of  the  bargaining  process  and  since 
political  support  of  a  sufficient  number  of  actors  to 
produce  agreement  was  essential  for  resolution  of  the 
issue,  the  outcome  represented  the  final  stage  in  a 
series  of  successive  approximations  to  what  was 
least  objectionable  rather  than  to  what  was  most 
desirable. 1* 

Two  themes  are  emphasized  in  this  comment.   First,  the 
goals  anfl  objectives  of  the  client  constituency  change  over 
Lime  :ind  the  course  of  the  planning  process,  and  second, 
ihese  same  goals  and  objectives  are  used  to  evaluate  pro- 
posals and  decide  from  among  alternatives.   A  sample  method- 
ology for  establishing  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client 
constituency  at  the  outset  of  the  planning  process  follows 
in  this  chapter.   Later  in  the  work,  and  particularly  in 
Chapter  VII,  several  methods  of  evaluation  are  explored  to 
decide  from  among  alternatives. 

The  set  of  individuals  comprising  the  client  con- 
stituency can  be  analyzed  in  a  manner  similar  to  that 
depicted  in  Figure  1-1.   This  set  is  actually  a  system  of 
overlapping  interests,  some  organizational  and  some  issue 
oriented.   At  the  apex  rests  the  decision  maker  who  will 
most  probably  play  many  roles.   A  single  private  developer 
may  be  the  dispenser  of  monies,  the  arbiter  of  conflict,  the 
representative  of  future  occupants,  etc.   Similarly,  at  the 
apex  might  be  a  city  planning  commission,  a  private  foundation, 
a  federal  agency,  a  city  manager  or  any  such  conceivable 
employer  of  a  professional  urban  planner.   This  is  the  usual 
point  of  entry  for  the  planner  into  the  system. 

At  the  base  rests  the  public  at  large  characterized 
by  a  very  limited  knowledge  of  their  city  or  cities  in 
general,  a  very  limited  knowledge  of  the  time  and  expense 


Superscript  numbers  refer  to  Notes  at  the  end  of  the 
Chapter. 


10 


FIGURE       I-l 
A    CONCEPTUAL    VISUALIZATION     OF     THE     CLIENT     CONSTITUENCY 


11 


of  the  planning  process,  and  a  very  limited  awareness  of 
the  interdependence  of  the  elements  that  make  up  their 
city  (Branch,  1968). 

In  between  these  extremes  and  at  the  apexes  of  various 
smaller  figures  are  individuals  with  personal  or  altruistic 
interests  in  the  plan.   These  individuals  are  the  community 
leaders  or  responsibles  of  subsets  of  individuals  within  the 
community,  and  as  such,  they  are  influential  in  community 
affairs.   These  subsets  are  often  called  publics  and  almost 
everyone  in  the  community  can  be  said  to  participate  in  many 
publics;  one  say  arising  from  his  job,  another  from  his 
ethnic  origin,  another  from  his  religion,  another  from  his 
marital  status,  etc. 

The  methodology  exampled  here  suggests  the  use  of  these 

community  influentials  to  establish  the  goals  and  objectives 

of  the  client  constituency.   The  arguments  for  this  are 

threefold.   First,  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  employer 

or  even  the  employer/planner  team  are  most  probably  not 

congruent  with  those  of  the  client  constituency.   Second, 

the  cost  of  establishing  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the 

client  constituency  as  a  whole,  even  by  sampling  methods, 

is  prohibitive.   There  are  many  reasons  for  this,  among  them 

might  be  the  need  for  a  massive  public  education  program  to 

enlighten  the  public  at  large.   It  cannot  be  denied  that  this 

would  be  a  worthwhile  endeavor  of  itself  but  it  is  probably 

outside  the  budgetary  and  professional  scope  of  urban  planning 

Further,  such  an  education  and  subsequent  investigation  of 

community  values  would  take  so  long  a  period  of  time  that  the 

data  might  perish.   Bolan  (1967)  writes  that, 

.  .  .  values  are  continually  changing,  goals  are 
shifting,  priorities  are  varying  -  the  public 
agenda  never  really  stands  still  for  one  to  mount  a 
concentrated  attack  on  it.   Moreover  the  decision 
environment  itself  changes  over  time.   Elections 
are  won  and  lost,  faces  and  personalities  change, 
new  laws  are  passed,  and  marginal  adjustment  of 
institutional  structure  continually  occurs. 2 


12 


The  third  argument  for  using  community  influentials  to 
establish  goals  and  objectives  is  that  the  community  influen- 
tials  themselves  are  in  a  position  to  aid  in  iinplementat  ion 
<>f  the  plan,  and  thus  tender  their  judgments  not  only  upon 
hypothet ical  considerations,  but  also  upon  specific  future 
conditions  that  they  will  work  to  see  effected.   Their 
prophecies  tend  toward  self  fulfillment.   Further,  to  plan 
without  taking  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  community 
inf J uentials  into  account  leaves  the  plan  vulnerable  to 
challenge  by  them. 

The  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency  are 
established  and  measured  by  the  following  three  step  process: 

1.  Identify  the  community  inf luen tials ; 

2.  Have  the  community  influentials  develop  the  goals 
and  objectives  of  the  community; 

3.  Have  the  community  influentials  develop  an  order 
of  precedence  of  these  goals  and  objectives. 

Much  of  what  follows  here  regarding  these  steps  was 

first  elucidated  in  a  work  by  Schimpeler  (1967)  in  Louisville. 

Identifying  the  Community  Influentials 
There  are  several  methods  for  identifying  community 
influentials.   The  first  consists  of  identifying  those  indi- 
viduals who  have  the  potential  of  being  influential  by  virtue 
of  their  position  in  the  client  constituency.   The  employer 
of  the  planner  would  be  identified  here,  if  not  elsewhere. 
Other  examples  are  elected  or  appointed  officials,  bank 
presidents,  industrial  magnates,  leaders  of  civic  organiza- 
tions, major  businessmen,  prominent  professionals,  media 
directors,  educators,  and  leaders  of  political  parties. 

Another  method  involves  issue  examination.   For  each 
issue  area  in  the  recent  client  constituency  history,  an 
attempt  is  made  to  establish  who  supported  proposals  that 
were  adopted,  or  who  successfully  countered  the  proposals  of 
others  (Dahl,  1961). 


13 


A  third  method  begins  with  a  panel  of  knowledgable 
c  Ltizens  who  are  asked  to  select  from  the  set  of  individuals 
in  the  client  constituency  (perhaps  provided  by  methods  one 
and  two)  those  who  are  community  influentials  (Hunter,  1953). 
This  process  can  be  iterative  and  converging  by  then  going 
to  the  selected  influentials  and  asking  them  in  turn  to 
select  from  the  list  of  selectees. 

A  fourth  method  recognizes  the  correlation  between 
influence  and  participation  in  social  and  civic  organizations 
such  as  the  Chamber  of  Commerce,  the  Rotary  Club,  etc. 
Persons  who  participate  in  many  of  these  are  probable 
influentials  (Olmstead,  1954). 

A  fifth  method  is  to  identify  the  relatively  small 
number  of  individuals  who  hold,  or  have  held  policy  making 
positions  in  a  number  of  organizations.   These  inter- 
organizational  influentials  then  comprise  a  highly  distilled 
and  possibly  closed  network  of  influence  that  can  be  brought 
to  bear  on  a  given  issue  (Perrucci,  1970). 

There  appears  to  be  no  unanimous  agreement  among 
sociologists  and  political  scientists  as  to  the  best  method. 
Further,  there  is  dissent  on  the  degree  that  the  methods 
effect  the  results  (Perrucci,  1970)  and  whether  the  methods 
converge  on  the  same  set  of  influentials  (Preston,  1969  and 
Pox,  1969). 

Schimpeler  noted  that  the  Hunter  Reputational  Technique 
and  the  Position  Potential  Techniques  can  result  in  the 
broadest  identification  of  community  influentials. 

The  Development  of  Community  Goals  and  Objectives 
The  community  influentials  are  gathered  together  at 
what  will  most  probably  be  a  series  of  meetings  extending 
over  several  weeks.   They  are  given  the  charter  by  the  planner 
or  the  planner/employer  team  to  develop  a  set  of  goals  and 
objectives  for  the  community.   Here  the  planner  provides  an 
extremely  important  function  by  providing  seed  ideas  to 


14 


insure  that,  over  the  course  of  these  meetings,  each  facet 
<>f  community  development  that  he  knows  as  a  professional 
Ln  he  important  is  considered  hy  the  committee.   The  planner 
must  be  manifestly  objective  in  this  process  and  most  careful 
not  to  inject  his  own  values  into  the  process.   Further, 
his  tudience  will  be  affected  not  only  by  what  he  says  but 
l>y  how  he  says  it,  in  the  same  manner  that  the  public  may 
be  affected  not  only  by  the  physical  characteristics  of  a 
presented  plan,  but  also  by  its  manner  of  presentation 
(Creighton,  1969).   These  seed  ideas  may  take  the  form  of 
lectures  or  discussions  about  prior  studies  or  may  even  be 
an  examination  of  the  goals  and  objectives  developed  in 
con  junction  with  other  plans.   It  is  recommended  that  the 
planner  provide  this  committee  with  an  initial  set  of  goals 
and  objectives  as  a  starting  point  from  which  the  final  set 
will  evolve.   Convergence  on  a  single  set  will  be  much 
faster  with  some  initial  input,  yet  this  will  not  preclude 
the  formulation  of  goals  and  objectives  in  words  meaningful 
to  the  committee.   A  sample  set  of  goals  and  two  levels  of 
objectives  is  here  provided  in  Table  1-1  for  the  planner's 
consideration.   It  would  be  highly  improbable  that  any 
committee  would  completely  accept  the  given  set  without 
substantial  change. 

Free  discussion  of  the  meaning  of  goals  and  objectives 
should  ensue  so  that  each  participant  and  the  planner  are 
aware  of  the  connotations  of  sometimes  abstract  terms.   The 
go;)  Is  and  objectives  should  be  well  ordered  in  so  far  as 
their  generality  is  concerned  and  there  must  be  some 
aggregation  of  concept  from  the  specific  to  the  general. 
One  suggested  order  is  that  goals  be  defined  by  several 
levels  of  objectives  which  are  further  defined  by  work  items. 
If  one  participant  feels  very  strongly  about  "providing 
pedestrian  foot  paths  between  residential  areas",  for 
instance,  that  can  be  a  second  order  objective  under 
"develop  a  balanced,  effective,  integrated  transportation 


15 


Table  1-1 

3 


Sample  Community  Goals  and  Objectives" 


Public  Safety  Program  Development 

1.   Insure  Safe  Publicly  Owned  Facilities  (excludes 
legislative  action) 

a.  Insure  the  maintenance  of  public  buildings 
(transit  terminals,  libraries,  public  offices, 
theaters,  etc.) 

b.  Provide  for  safety  through  design,  construction, 
maintenance,  and  operation  of  the  transportation 
system  (streets,  highways,  transit  and  sidewalks.) 

c.  Provide  maintenance  for  the  grounds  and  equip- 
ment of  open  space  areas. 

d.  Insure  well  lighted  public  areas. 

e.  Provide  efficient  emergency  forces  and  facilities 
(civil  defense,  fire  fighting,  police,  etc.) 

2.   Provide  for  adequate  public  and  semi  public  facilities 
through  safety  regulations  and  their  enforcement. 

a.  Insure  the  safe  operation  of  transportation 
system. 

b.  Insure  the  control  of  dangerous  goods  and 
installations  (explosives,  chemicals,  etc.) 

c.  Insure  the  safe  installation  and  operation  of 
public  utilities. 

d.  Promotion  of  industrial  safety. 

Public  Utility  and  Transportation  Development. 

1.   Insure  maximum  effectiveness  of  public  utilities,  by 
design  and  locational  considerations  (electricity, 
telephone,  water,  sewers,  and  gas). 

a.  Location  of  various  utilities  should  be  coordin- 
ated. 

b.  Insure  that  all  public  utilities  are  provided  in 
an  area  as  necessary  to  assist  the  desired  stage 
of  development. 


16 


Tab  I e  I  -  I ,  cont . 


c.   Extension  oi~  utilities  must  be  done  in  an 
efficient  and  economical  manner. 

2.   Take  measures  and  develop  programs  to  minimize 
maintenance  costs  of  public  facilities. 

a.  Develop  program  of  preventive  maintenance  and 
reduced  maintenance  costs. 

b.  Evaluate  maintenance  costs  as  a  basis  for 
selecting  design. 

'5.   Develop  a  balanced,  effective  and  integrated  trans- 
portation system  which  provides  for  the  accessib- 
ility requirements  of  each  land  use. 

.i.   Provide  pedestrian  footpaths  between  residential 
areas,  schools,  shopping  centers  and  recreational 
areas. 

b.  Provide  adequate  arterial  roads  to  insure  rapid 
and  safe  movement  to  and  from  the  area  and  also 
within  the  area. 

c.  Reduce  the  pedestrian-vehicular  conflict  in  the 
CBD. 

d.  Provide  alternative  modes  of  travel  to  serve 
the  various  needs  of  people  and  activities  as 
and  where  necessary. 

e.  Provide  for  the  safe  and  convenient  interchange 
between  mode. 

C.   Kconomic  Development  Programs 

1.   Develop  public  Improvement  programs  within  available 
financial  resources. 

a.  Provide  capital  works  improvements  which  will 
provide  for  economic  growth. 

b.  Provide  improvements  to  maintain  value  inherent 
in  existing  facilities. 

c.  Establish  priorities  of  capital  works  improvements 
on  the  basis  of  community's  value  system. 


L7 


Table  1-1,  cont. 


2.       Insure  effective  utilization  of  mineral,  vegetation, 
air  and  water  resources. 

a.  Provide  priorities  for  immediate  and  future 
water  use. 

b.  Provide  for  flood  control  improvements. 

c.  Utilize  available  water  resources  for  generating 
electric  power. 

d.  Utilize  fertile  lands  for  the  production  of 
foodstuffs . 

ii.      Establish  a  strong  economic  base  through  commerce 
that  will  bring  money  into  the  community. 

a.  Achieve  an  external-internal  favorable  balance 
of  trade. 

b.  Diversify  the  community's  economic  base. 

c.  Promote  the  advantages  of  the  community's 
recreational  or  tourist  facilities. 

d.  Require  or  reserve  sites  for  possible  new  manu- 
facturing or  industrial  facilities. 

e.  Provide  utilities,  streets,  zoning  changes,  etc. 
for  industrial  or  commercial  use. 

4.   Insure  the  optimal  utilization  of  all  land. 

a.  Provide  a  comprehensive  land  use  plan. 

b.  Provide  proper  and  adequate  zoning  for  the  various 
land  use  forms. 

c.  Provide  guidelines  as  to  the  proper  location  of 
buildings  and  utilities  within  the  zones. 

d.  Establish  a  proper  planning  and  control  unit  to 
advise  on  the  proper  use  of  available  land. 

e.  Establish  desirable  standards  to  be  used  for  the 
setting  up  of  the  various  land  units. 


18 


Table  1-1,  cont 


5.   Achieve  increased  disposable  income  for  all  people. 

a.  Training  to  provide  skills  for  unskilled  people 
and  increase  skill  level  of  skilled  people. 

b.  Increase  number  of  available  jobs,  workers  per 
family  and/or  number  of  hours  worked  per  week. 

c.  Tie  all  salaries,  wages  and  pensions  to  the 
Consumer  Price  Index. 

d.  Provide  guaranteed  minimum  annual  wage. 
Cultural  Development 

1.   Preserve  historic  sites  and  areas  of  natural  beauty. 

a.  Promote  formation  of  local  citizens  groups  to 
identify  sites  and  work  for  preservation. 

b.  Encourage  private  enterprise  to  purchase  and 
preserve  sites  through  tax  incentives. 

c.  Establish  a  trust  fund  from  federal  taxes  to  be 
used  for  purchasing  and  preserving  sites. 

d.  Encourage  individuals  to  convert  suitable  private 
sites  to  public  land  through  tax  incentives. 

e.  Make  awards  for  good  design  of  housing  develop- 
ments, highways,  etc.,  which  preserves  natural 
sites . 

2.   Promote  adequate  public  libraries,  museums  and  cul- 
tural activities. 

a.  Provide  neighborhood  libraries  as  well  as  central 
libraries . 

b.  Provide  mobile  libraries. 

c.  Provide  or  promote  facilities  for  meeting  places 
for  neighborhood  cultural  and  service  groups. 

d.  Provide  portable  displays  from  museums  and 
cultural  centers  for  use  in  neighborhood  school 
and  social  centers. 


19 


Table  1-1,  cont 


3.   Protect  meaningful  focal  tradition  and  encourage 
civic  pride. 

a.  Promote  civic  committees  and  groups  to  observe 
important  local  traditions  and  historical  dates 
and  anniversaries. 

b.  Promote  funds  for  operation  of  civic  leagues. 
Health  Program  Development 

1.  Regulate  the  provision  and  design  of  health  facil- 
ities for  the  prevention  and  cure  of  disease. 

a.  Establish  minimum  standards  for  health  facilities 
(hospitals,  nursing  homes,  clinics). 

b.  Enforcement  of  the  abofe  standards. 

2.  Regulate  the  numbers  and  training  required  of 
personnel  in  health. 

a.  Establish  minimum  standards  for  personnel  in 
health  areas. 

b.  Enforcement  of  the  above  standards. 

3.  Provide  for  the  removal  of  contaminants  through 
community  programs  and  regulations. 

a.  Provide  sanitary  sewers  and  treatment  plant. 

b.  Provide  storm  sewers. 

c.  Provide  for  refuse  collection  and  disposal. 

d.  Provide  for  street  cleaning,  snow  and  ice 
removal  from  publicly  owned  facilities. 

e.  Establishment  and  enforcement  of  air  pollution 
control  measures. 

4.  Provide  for  adequate  public  health  facilities, 
personnel  and  programs  for  the  prevention  and  cure 
of  disease. 

a.   Provide  training  and  education  programs  to 
enlighten  the  population  to  common  nuisances 
or  health  hazards. 


20 


Table  1-1,  cont 


b.  Provide  preventive  medicine  services. 

c.  Promote  community  programs  and  planning  to 
eliminate  mental  and  physical  health  sources. 

d.  Educate  the  population  to  health  welfare  services 
available  and  coordinate  the  programs. 

F.   Education  program  Development 

Provide  adequate  personnel  and  facilities  to  insure 
1  basic  (12  Year)  education  for  all. 

a.  Improve  coordination  between  schools  in  both 
the  public  and  private  sectors  for  economic 
utilization  of  resources  and  a  unified 
effort. 

b.  Provide  adequate  primary  education  personnel 
and  facilities. 

c.  Provide  adequate  high  school  education  personnel 
and  facilities. 

d.  Improve  and  update  the  curriculum  on  all  above 
levels . 

2.   Provide  adequate  facilities  and  personnel  for 
other  educational  programs. 

a.  Provide  adequate  pre-school  facilities  and 
personnel.   (Headstart,  nurseries,  kindergarten, 
etc.  ) 

b.  Provide  adequate  colleges  and  personnel. 

c.  Provide  adequate  technical  schools  and  staff, 
(vocational  studies,  job  retraining,  etc.) 

d.  Promote  non-formal  adult  education. 
G.   Welfare  Program  Development 

1.   Eliminate  injustice  based  on  discrimination 

a.  Provide  information  to  all  communication  media. 

b.  Provide  a  police  force  supervised  by  the  people. 


21 


Table  1-1,  cont. 

c.  Provide  for  correction  of  injustice  through 
proper  legal  channels. 

d .  Promote  media  which  encourage  understanding 
be  .ween  all  groups. 

/. .   Develop  needed  public  welfare  program:.. 

a.  Provide  aid  to  the  elderly. 

b.  Provide  aid  to  unmarried  mothers. 

c.  Provide  special  education  and  aid  to  handicapped 
people . 

d.  Provide  a  Day  Care  Center  for  families  where 
both  parents  must  work. 

e.  Provide  medical  assistance  to  needy  people. 

f.  Provide  informational  centers  for  instructing 
eligible  people  of  the  services  available. 

3 .  Encourage  development  of  religious  opportunities. 

a.  Provide  suitable  building  sites. 

b.  Provide  for  adequate  parking  facilities. 

4.  Develop  an  aesthetically  pleasing  environment. 

a.  Provide  attractive  structures. 

b.  Provide  attractive  landscaping. 

c.  Screen  or  remove  objectionable  land  uses. 

d.  Eliminate  objectionable  advertising  displays. 
Recreation  Program  Development 

1.   Establish  open  space  programs. 

a.  Provide  sufficient  space  to  meet  the  existing 
and  future  needs  of  the  community. 

b.  Establish  and  design  the  open  space  in  a 
pattern  so  that  it  provides  a  maximum  of  emenity 
and  convenience. 


22 


Table  1-1,  cont. 


2.   Provide  adequate  recreational  facilities  utilizing 
places  of  natural  resources  and  beauty  and  at 
places  of  greatest  need. 

a.  Make  all  facilities  flexible  so  that  they 
insure  economy  and  efficiency. 

b.  Provide  standards  and  recreation  programs  that 
are  compatible  with  cultural,  social,  and  economic 
characteristics  of  the  community. 

c.  Use  recreational  facilities  as  a  developmental 
tool  to  reinforce  patterns  of  land  use  consistent 
with  community  goals. 

d.  Make  proper  use  of  buffer  zones. 
Political  Framework 

1 .  Improve  the  framework  for  citizen  participation 
in  governmental  functions. 

a.  Keep  the  public  fully  informed  of  governmental 
affairs  to  ensure  an  awareness  of  issues, 
objectives  and  decisions  (using  the  various 
mass  news  media,  public  meetings,  exhibitions, 
etc.) 

b.  Develop  in  people  a  sense  of  personal  participa- 
tion and  responsibility  (using  citizen  meetings 
and/or  committees). 

c.  Encourage  people  to  voice  opinions  and  to  discuss 
issues  so  that  those  making  decisions  will  be 
better  able  to  judge  what  is  in  the  best  interests 
of  the  community  as  a  whole. 

2.  Establish  equitable  taxation  policies  (bases,  mix, 
rates) . 

a.  Policies  to  provide  the  needed  revenue,  compatible 
with  the  community's  ability  to  pay  the  taxes. 

b.  Make  policies  completely  rational  and  equitable, 
free  from  any  form  of  discrimination  or  favorit- 
ism. 


23 


Table  t-1 ,  cont. 


c.  Ensure  that  tax  assessors  are  adequately  trained 
and  skilled  to  prevent  taxation  injustices. 

d.  Select  tax  bases  that  are  easily  understood  and 
accurately  and  easily  collected. 

3.   Develop  an  effective  governmental  administration. 

a.  Ensure  an  efficient  management  structure  within 
the  administration. 

b.  All  staff  appointments  to  be  made  on  the  basis 
of  capability  and  special  skills  (not  on 
seniority  or  political  affiliations). 

c.  Fix  salary  levels  and  conditions  for  staff  so 
that  the  best  available  people  are  attracted. 

d.  Ensure  that  decision  making  at  all  levels  is 
free  from  any  political  considerations. 

e.  Ensure  full  co-ordination  and  liason  between 
governmental  agencies  and  also  with  private 
enterprise  (to  enable  a  ready  exchange  of  aid, 
ideas  and  information). 

4.  Establish  sound  governmental  fiscal  programs. 

a.  Examine  all  existing  and  possible  new  sources 
of  revenue  to  ensure  that  all  possible  revenue 
is  channeled  into  the  fiscal  programs. 

b.  Ensure  that  programs  achieve  the  optimum  balance 
between  the  community's  goals  and  the  finance 
available . 

c.  Ensure  that  programs  are  realistic  (i.e.  within 
the  economic  capability  of  the  community). 

d.  Coordinate  expenditures  necessary  for  the  initial 
plan  implementation. 

5.  Develop  an  effective  area-wide  planning  process. 

a.   Establish  a  permanent  planning  organization  for 
the  area. 


24 


Table  1-1,  cont 


b.  Ensure  that  planning  is  a  continuing  process  by 
up-dating  and  review. 

c.  Set  up  regional  committees  to  provide  for 
representation  of  each  local  government  unit 
in  the  area  in  the  planning  process. 

d.  Promote  funds  for  research  and  development  in 
fields  concerning  urban  development. 

e.  Promote  funds  for  research  and  development  (in 
the  planning  sphere)  necessary  to  continually 
improve  the  plan  as  conditions  and  technology 
change. 

6.   Establish  effective  regulations  and  control  mechanisms 

a.  Thoroughly  review  all  existing  legislation  within 
the  city  (establishing  any  that  are  missing, 
removing  any  anomalies,  etc.) 

b.  Legislate  for  effective  land  use  zoning  controls. 

c.  Legislate  for  effective  land  access  controls 
(to  enable  more  efficient  arterial  usage). 

d.  Legislate  for  effective  controls  on  all  nuisances 
impairing  the  urDan  environment. 

Housing  Development 

1.  Encourage  rehabilitation  and  conservation  of 
neighborhood  programs. 

a.  Provide  incentives  for  owner's  improving  by 
conservation  or  rehabilitation. 

b.  Provide  public  work  improvements  to  encourage 
conservation  and  rehabilitation. 

2.  Provide  adequate  low  cost  housing. 

a.  Provide  for  low  cost  rental  housing. 

b.  Provide  for  increased  ownership  of  low  cost 
housing  uni  t . 


25 


Table  1-1,  cont. 

3.  Develop  neighborhood  Programs. 

a.  Provide  delimiting  boundaries. 

b.  Provide  a  central  social  and  cultural  institution 

c.  Provide  for  recreational  and  open  space  facil- 
ities . 

d.  Provide  for  convenient  shopping. 

e.  Provide  for  a  safe  circulation  program. 

f.  Provide  for  the  esthetics  of  the  neighborhood. 

g.  Provide  for  adequate  land  use  in  the  neighborhood 
h.   Provide  for  auxiliary  activity  facilities. 

4.  Promote  a  wide  variety  of  housing  types  as  required 
within  the  community. 

a.  Provide  for  various  choice  of  housing  types. 

b.  Provide  for  adequate  design  and  esthetics  of 
uni  ts . 

c.  Provide  for  densities  of  structures. 

d.  Provide  for  various  area  densities. 


26 


system  which  provides  for  the  accessibility  requirements 
of  each  land  use"  which  is  itself  a  first  order  objective 
under  the  goal  "public  utility  and  transportation  develop- 
ment".  Some  such  ordering  of  generality  is  necessary  for 
the  purposes  of  comparison  and  evaluation.   The  assignment 
of  work  items  to  define  specific  objectives  in  specific 
community  situations  is  a  matter  for  the  goal  formulation 
co'uni  i  t  Lee  . 

It  is  important  for  the  planner  to  be  prepared  for  an 
iterative  and  painstaking  analysis.   The  planner  injects 
iueas,  the  participants  respond,  the  planner  injects,  the 
participants  respond,  etc. 

After  the  fourth  or  fifth  trip  around  the  cycle  the 
elements  which  pass  through  the  screen  of  democratic 
approval  accord  more  and  more  closely  with  the  value 
system  of  the  people  in  the  community.   In  the 
process,  the  idea  formulator  himself  has  been  tempered 
with  the  heat  of  his  confrontation  with  his  peers, 
and  he  himself,  perhaps  unwittingly,  has  become  a 
more  sensitive  instrument  more  closely  atuned  to 
community  values. ^ 

The  Ordering  of  Community  Goals  and  Objectives 
The  placing  of  the  formulated  goals  and  objectives 
into  an  order  is  relatively  easy  using  any  of  the  three 
methods  described  below.   These  methods  can  be  used  to 
order  the  goals  and  then  to  order  the  objectives  within 
each  goal.   The  term  "criterion"  is  used  to  mean  either  a 
goal  or  an  objective  as  applicable. 

In  a  ranking  method,  each  of  the  participant  community 
influentials  gives  to  the  most  important  criterion  the 
value  1,  the  second  most  important  criterion,  the  value 
2,  etc. 

If  there  are  n  criteria  and  m  participants,  the 
planner  converts  each  rank  by  subtracting  it  from  n.   Thus 
i  converted  rank  of  n-1  is  assigned  the  criterion  receiving 
the  raw  rank  of  1,  n-2  for  the  criterion  receiving  the 
raw  rank  of  2,  etc.   The  composite  rank  (K.)  for  a  given 


27 


criterion  (j)  is  the  sum  of  the  converted  ranks  of  all  the 
m  judges. 


R.  = 

J 


Rjj,  j  =  1,  2,  .  .  .  n-1,  n 


i  =  1 


A  normalized  utility  value  (u . )  associated  with  each 


criterion  j  over  all  the  participants  is  then : 

,  j  =  1,  2,  .  .  .  n. 


R. 

J 


u  . 

J 


R 


j  =  1 


An    example    follows 


Participants 
abed 


1 

2 

2 

3 

2 

4 

1 

2 

3 

3 

4 

1 

4 

1 

3 

4 

Partic  i  pant s 

abed 


3 

2 

2 

1 

2 

0 

3 

2 

1 

1 

0 

3 

0 

3 

1 

0 

Raw   Ranks 


Converted    RiinKs 


28 


c 

A 

8 

r 

i 

B 

7 

t 

e 

r 

C 

5 

1 

a 

D 

4 

Composite  Ranks 


8/24  =  .3*3  "J 
7/24  =  .292 

5/24  =  .208 


D   4/24  =  .167 
1.000 


Utility  Values 


A  rating  technique  may  also  be  employed  with  essentially 
the  same  mathematics.   In  this  case,  a  list  of  criteria 
is  placed  adjacent  to  a  scale  marked  in  units  continuously 
from,  say,  10  to  0.   A  rating  of  0  indicates  no  value  and 
a  rating  of  10,  the  highest  possible  value.   Any  value 
(including  duplicates)  along  the  continuum  may  be  assigned 
to  any  criterion.   This  avoids  the  conversion  step  in  the 
previous  method  and,  as  before, 


R.  = 

.1 


and , 


i  -  1 


R.j5  j  =  1,  2, 


,  J  -  1,  2, 


n-1 


J  =  1 


29 


Yet  another  way  of  ordering  the  criteria  was  developed 
•v  Schimpeler,  (1967)  modifying  a  method  developed  by 
Churchman  and  Ackoff  (1954).   Let  the  symbol  (     be  read 
"is  preferred  to".   If  criterion  j  is  preferred  to 
criterion  k,  G.   v   G,  ,  then  u.   \   u,  .   Let  this  symbol 
/V/  be  read  "is  indifferent  to".   If  G.  /\J      G,  ,  then 

J  K 

»j  =  V 

Step  1.   Rank  the  criteria  according  to  preference 

(perhaps  according  to  methods  one  and  two); 


Gi 


}   G2  3   G3  }    ■  '  ' 
r>J  r<J  /j 

G   ,  1   G  ,  where  G,  \        G  . 
n-1  j    n'        1  J  n 

Step  2.   Tentatively  assign  the  value  u-J  =  1  to  G,  . 
Assign  tentative  utility  values  to  the 
remaining  criteria  according  to  their 
approximate  preference, 
n 

Step  3.   If  G,  I     /\  G.   (the  remaining  criteria 

j  =  2 

n 

taken  together),  adjust  uj  so  that  u{/^*   u-j 

j  =  2 
n 

and  proceed  to  step  4.   If  G-./V/  \    G.  , 

j  =  2 


adjust  u-j  so  that  u|  =   "^      u! 


and 


30 


proceed    to   step  A 
n 


If  Cl  1      /\  G"'    adJust    UJ    so    Li,aL 


j    =   2 


u,'  <^  <C  u!.   Then  drop  the  least 

J  -  2 
preferred  criterion,  G  ,  from  consideration 
and  repeat  step  3.   Continue  this  process 
P 


until  G,  L      /\  G.  where  G   is  the  least 

A/  j •-  2 

perferred  criterion  of  ail  the  remainder 
taken  together  when  G,  first  becomes  preferred 
or  indifferent  to  this  combination. 


Step  4.   Drop  the  most  preferred  criterion  G,  from 

consideration  and  repeat  the  entire  proceedure 
for  G~  ,  and  G,,  ,  etc.,  until  the  last  com- 


A 


parison;  i.e.,  G   0  versus  G   ,   /  \   G 
r       '      '   n-2  n- L  n 

is  completed. 

Step  5.   The  tentative  utility  values  are  then  normal 

i zed  before 

u! 
J 

u  .  =  

J 


n 

i 


u 


31 


To  carry  foreward  the  previous  example,  assume  that 
a  participant  judge  maintains  the  following  relationships 
among  criteria: 


Ga  {  Gb  A  Gc  A  Gd' 

r'a  j  Gb  A  Gc> 

Gb  [  Gc  A  Gd, 

] 


Gb  {   Gc '     and 


G„  -A/  G. . 

c      d 

Then  for  u',  u'  =  1,  u'  =  .8,  u1  =  .6,  u'  =  .5  and 
a '   a     '   b      '   c      '   d 

d 

9  is  in  consonance  with  the 


-I  -  i  <  <C_    UJ  "  l' 


j  -  b 

judge's  preferences. 

Dropping  G,  from  consideration,  we  find  that 


<  H  -j- 


1.4,  which  is  counter  to  the 


j  -  b 


judge's  preferences.   Therefore  u'  must  be  adjusted  upward 
to,  say,  1.5,  and  G   is  dropped  from  consideration. 


<  £_  »r- 


Then  for  u£ ,  u£  =  . 8  <^   \>     u!  =  .9  is  in 

J  =  c 
consonance  with  the  judge's  preferences. 

Dropping  G,  from  consideration,  we  find  that 

u,'  =  .8  y    u'  =  .6  which  is  in  consonance  with  the  judge's 
preferences.   G,  is  dropped  from  consideration. 


32 


Then  for  u1  ,  u'  -  .6  >   u'  ■ 
c '   c       /    d 

to  the  judge's  preferences  which  reflect  that  this  pair 

is  indifferent.   u'  is  then  ad -justed  to  .5  to  reflect  this 
c  J 

indifference  and  the  iterations  end. 
The  new  relationships  are  thus : 

u'  =  1.5, 


u'  =  u\  =  .5,  and  the  associated  normalized  utility 
c    d      ' 

values  are, 

u^  =  1.5/3.3  =  .454 

u£  =  .8/3.3  =   .242 

u^  =  .5/3.3  =   .152 

u'  =  .5/3.3  =   .152 
a  1.000. 

In  this  manner,  each  goal  is  compared  to  all  the 
"ther  goals,  each  first  order  objective  defining  a  goal 
in  compared  to  the  other  first  order  objectives  defining 
that  same  goal,  and  each  second  order  objective  defining  a 
first  order  objective  is  compared  to  the  other  second 
order  objectives  defining  that  same  first  order  objective. 

What  results  then,  are  utility  values  for  each  subset 
<>f  criteria  which  then  must  be  normalized  over  the  entire 
set  of  criteria.   The  normalizing  is  easily  done  by  multiply- 
ing the  appropriate  utility  values. 

Suppose  that  the  previous  example  was  a  comparison  of 
goals,  there  being  only  four  in  this  case. 

uA  =  .454 

uR  =  .242 

u   =  .152 

UI)  =  .152 
TTOuTJ 


33 


Suppose  that  goal  A  was  defined  by  five  first  order 
objectives  with  the  following  utility  values; 

UA1  =  -2Z2 

UA2  =  -306 
u'3  =  .150 

UM  =  -176 

A5   rjm, 

and  that  first  order  objective  Al  was  defined  by  seven 
second  order  objectives  with  the  following  utility  values; 


UAla 

= 

.102 

uAlb 

= 

.130 

uAlc 

= 

.176 

UAld 

= 

.170 

UAle 

= 

.200 

uAlf 

= 

.050 

Alg 

1 

.172 
.000 

Let  U.  equal  the  utility  of  goal  1,  U!.,  equal  the 
non-normalized  utility  of  first  order  objective  j  defining 
goal  i,  and  (J.,  equal  the  normalized  utility  of  first 
order  objective  j  defining  goal  i. 

Then  U.  .  equals  U.  x  U*.  . 
n 


and    <^f.  U .  ..  =  U.j  for  n  first  order  objectives 

LJ     1   defining  goal  i. 
j  =  1 

Similarly,  let  U ! . ,  equal  the  non-normalized  utility 
of  second  order  objective  k  defining  first  order  objective 
j,  and   U...  the  normalized  utility  of  second  order 
objective  k  defining  first  order  objective  j. 


34 


Then  U .  . ,  =  U .  .  x  U !  . , 
ijk    ij     ljk 


and    *^>       U.  .,  =  U.  •  ,  for  m  second  order  objectives 

*- -*      -1   defining  first  order  objectiv* 

k  =  1  j  which,  in  turn,  defines 

goal  i. 


ft  follows  then  that,  for  p  goals, 
P  p       n 


S 


U.  - 

1 


■u-  ill 


U. 


=  1 

-  1 


1-1    j  -  1 


i  =  1   j  -  1  k 


In  the  example, 


and 


UA1  =  UA  x  UM 
UA2  =  UA  *  UA2 


.454  x  .222  -  .101 
.454  x  .306  =  .139 


UA3  =  UA  x  UA3  =  -454  x  -150  =  -068 


UA/  -  U.  x  U'   =  .454  x  .176 
A4    A    A4 


080 


UAc  -  UA  x  U'   =  .454  x  .146  =  .066 
A5     A    Ai>  T&&, 


UAla  =  UA1  *  UAla 
UAlb  "  UA1  *  UAlb 
UAlc  =  UA1  *  UAlc 

UAld  =  UA1  *  UAld 

UAle  =  UA1  *  UAle 

UAlf  =  UA1  *  UAlf 

UAlg  =  UA1  X  UAlg 


.101 

X 

.102 

— 

.0103 

.101 

X 

.130 

= 

.0131 

.101 

X 

.176 

= 

.0178 

.101 

X 

.170 

= 

.0172 

.101 

X 

.200 

= 

.02  02 

.101 

X 

.050 

= 

.0050 

.101 

X 

.172 

= 

.0174 

.1010 


35 


This  chapter  closes  with  a  discussion  of  some  of  the 
pitfalls  that  await  the  unwary  planner.   The  concept  of 
using  community  influentials  as  advocates  of  the  client 
constituency  is  obviously  a  middle  road.   On  one  hand,  it 
is  proposed  that  the  value  system  so  established  more 
accurately  reflects  that  of  the  client  constituency  than 
if  this  value  system  were  established  or  assumed  by  the 
planner  working  alone.   On  the  other  hand,  the  value  system 
established  by  investigating  the  full  set  of  individuals 
(or  a  sampled  subset)  is  considered  to  be  an  unnecessary 
expense.   Many  social  scientists  and  planners  will  find 
fault  with  this,  and  with  good  reason.   But  it  must  be 
remembered  that  real  life  situations  are  constrained  by 
time  and  money  and  the  process  described  here  bends  rigor 
to  gain  feasibility.   An  obvious  matter  of  further 
research  would  be  to  measure  just  how  closely  such  a 
process  approximates  the  values  of  the  community  as  a 
whole,  taking  into  account  the  aforementioned  problem  of 
public  education  in  planning,  the  great  area  of  indifference 
to  specific  proposals,  the  transient  nature  of  some  resi- 
dents and  the  apathy  of  others.   All  these  and  other 
factors  mitigate  against  consensus. 

The  time  dependency  of  community  influence  has  been 
discussed.   The  planner  should  be  sure  that  the  process 
described  herein  is  brought  to  an  expeditious  conclusion 
and  that  the  values  can  survive  the  time  span  required  to 
use  them  in  planning  and  execution.   The  process  described 
here  bends  rigor  to  gain  speed. 

Community  leaders  themselves  are  biased.   Participants 
should  be  instructed  to  seek  some  measure  of  selflessness 
in  considering  goals  and  objectives.   Some  residual  bias 
is  not  necessarily  a  fatal  defect  however,  as  this  bias 
is  presumably  apparent  to  and  supported  by  the  power  base 
of  each  position  of  community  influence. 


36 


Some  leaders  may  not  want  to  disclose  their  position 
of  influence  and  some  may  not  have  the  time  to  participate 
In  the  moderately  lengthy  negotiations.   These  factors 
should  be  considered  in  the  selection  of  the  goal  formulation 
participants.   There  is  the  further  danger  that  some  genuine 
leaders  may  not  be  identified  in  the  process  and  thereby 
made  opponents  of. 

Some  of  the  publics  identified  in  Figure  1-1  may  have 

no  leaders,  or  may  constitute  such  minorities  that  they 

might  be  ignored  by  the  mechanics  of  the  identification 

process.   The  planner  may  have  to  devise  safeguards  to 

protect  their  best  interests. 

Finally,  the  goals  and  objectives  developed  by  the 

client  constituency  influentials  may  run  counter  to  the 

professional  opinion  of  the  planner. 

As  in  the  legal  profession,  client's  defined  objectives, 
priorities,  and  ultimate  strategies  take  precedence 
over  those  of  the  professional  as  long  as  the  pro- 
fessional-client relationship  exists,  but  the  pro- 
fessional can  always  opt  out  if  selected  value  systems 
and  defined  courses  of  action  cause  moral  or  profession- 
al anguish. 5 

The  goals  and  objectives  developed,  weighed  and 

measured  by  the  community  influentials  become,  in  the  last 

analysis,  a  kind  of  counsel  to  the  planner  and  to  the 

decision  maker.   The  latter  takes  this  counsel,  adds  his 

own  political,  economic,  and  managerial  intelligence,  and 

decides  how  to  allocate  resources  to  the  planning  effort. 

He  decides  what,  if  anything,  needs  planning  most.   If 

this  decision  specifies  some  planning,  then  the  planner 

takes  that  direction,  adds  the  counsel  of  the  community 

influentials,  and  plans. 


Notes 

Thomas  J.  Anton,  "Politics  and  Planning  in  a  Swedish 
Suburb,"  p.  262. 


37 


2.  Richard  S.  Bolan,  "Emerging  Views  of  Planning,"  p.  243. 

3.  William  L.  Grecco,  "Planning  Methodology  and  Techniques," 
Course  C.K.  613,  Purdue  University,  West  Lafayette, 
Indiana.   These  goals  and  objectives  were  developed 

by  Dr.  Grecco  and  his  students  over  several  years 
during  the  conduct  of  this  course.   The  set  given  is 
as  of  1971 . 

4.  Edmund  N.  Bacon,  "Urban  Process,"   The  Conscience  of 
the  City,  p.  1169. 

5.  Marshall  Kaplan,  "Advocacy  and  the  Urban  Poor,"  p.  97. 


38 


CHAPTER  II 
ORGANIZATION 


In  1968,  the  American  Institute  of  Planners  committed 
itself  to  consider  social  and  economic  development  planning 
in  addition  to  physical  planning  in  future  professional 
endeavors.   Wetmore  (1970)  relates  how  the  Committee  on 
Restatement  of  Institute  Purposes  found  a  cube  diagram  to 
be  particularly  helpful  in  visualizing  the  extent  of 
comprehensive  planning. 

This  Chapter  introduces  a  modified  and  refined  version 
of  that  cube,  the  investigation  of  which  forms  the  basis 
for  the  organization  of  any  planning  effort.   Subsequent 
chapters  will  again  refer  to  this  cube  from  time  to  time. 
This  cube  is  hypothesized  to  be  an  adequate  conceptual 
model  of  planning  activity. 

A  Conceptual  Model  of  Planning  Activity 
Consider  the  cube  illustrated  in  Figure  II-l.   One 
axis  defines  the  areal  scope  of  planning  activity.   This 
axis  Ls  bounded  at  one  extreme  by  the  largest  physical  area 
that  can  be  considered  in  planning,  the  universe.   At  the 
other  extreme  is  the  smallest  area,  perhaps  a  single  room 
in  a  dwelling.   In  reality,  of  course,  these  limits  are 
only  approached  and  in  between  them  lie  the  more  commonly 
investigated  areas  of  nation,  state,  region,  urban  area, 
city,  community,  neighborhood,  parcel,  etc. 

Another  axis  defines  the  substantive  scope  of 
planning,  from  the  most  comprehensive  to  the  most  limited. 
At  the  comprehensive  limit  of  this  axis,  planning  escalates 
into  policy  making  and  at  the  limited  extreme,  planning 


39 


u 


4-1 


< 

C 
•.-I 

C 

c 


U-l 
O 


3 

■u 

a 

c 
o 

o 


PROCEDURAL         SCOPE 


o 

z 

b 

Z 

o 

2 

O 

1- 

> 

h 

z 

h- 

CO 

CO 

(T 

< 

Ul 

< 

< 

CO 

P 

M 

ui 

3 

z 
<s> 

o 

UJ 

r- 

Z 

I 

_l 

< 

to 

LxJ 
Q 

a: 

< 

Ul 

o 

Q. 

1 

> 

Ul 

O 
u. 

z 
< 

> 
z 

s 

40 


becomes,  in  fact,  design.   The  limits  of  this  axis  are  also 
only  approached  in  applied  planning  and  in  between  lie 
the  familiar  "comprehensive"  planning,  economic  planning, 
land  use  planning,  school  planning,  recreation  planning, 
Lot  lot  planning,  etc. 

The  third  axis  defines  the  procedural  scope  of 
planning  from  beginning  to  end.   The  basic  framework  of 
this  investigation  reflects  the  contention  that,  of  the 
three  axes,  this  is  the  most  clearly  bounded,  the  most 
.in.i  1  yt  i  cal  ly  discrete  and  the  most  easily  understood.   This 
ix is  maps  the  planning  process  through  its  seven  rational 
phases;  organization,  Inventory,  analysis,  forecasting, 
design,  evaluation,  and  implementation.   This  axis  is 
generic  to  any  planning  irrespective  of  its  substantive  or 
a real  scope. 

Consider  a  single  element  in  this  model  as  illustrated 
in  Figure  11-2.   Let  this  single  element  represent  an 
event  in  the  planning  process.   Disregarding  model  boundary 
conditions,  this  event  is  procedurally  preceeded  by 
another  event  and  followed  by  a  third  event.   Even  if  this 
one  event  runs  concurrent  with  many  others,  it  and  the 
others  each  have  a  precedent  and  an  ensuing  event  in  real 
time.   The  inescapable  passage  of  time  forces  this  relation- 
ship and  thereby  provides  the  methodological  basis  for  an 
investigation  of  the  planning  process.   An  ordering  of 
this  event  with  respect  to  its  precedents  and  its  ensuing 
events  identifies  it  along  one  axis  of  the  cube.   This 
identification  enables  the  planner  to  systematically 
investigate  the  relationships  of  this  event  with  its 
neighbors  along  the  substantive  scope  and  areal  scope  axes. 

Any  identification  along  the  areal  scope  axis  is  a 
function  of  the  objectives  of  the  client  cons ti tuancy , 
the  prior  related  planning,  the  resources  available,  and 
the  boundaries  of  the  governmental  units  involved.   Any 
identification  along  the  substantive  scope  axis  is  a 


41 


o  Z- 

7     ' 


n 

%\ 

\  o  o 


^  -^  °„ 

tf>  -5    a) 


>>  o 


-  -  a> 
«  if 


Q-   «  § 
O 

CO         o 


<  £  o 


0 

c 

g 


PROCEDURAL    SCOPE 


CJ 

Zi 

M 

> 

3 

U4 

M 

•H 

i—i 

iu 

u 

C 

e 

r-t 

>- 

UJ 

00 

r-( 

Q 
UJ 

n 

tfl 
J 
U 

iij 

t-L 

UJ 

(U 

o 

c 
o 

42 


function  of  the  first  three  factors  above,  as  well  as 
being  a  function  of  the  necessary  precursors  in  planning, 
is  u  population  study  and  an  economic  base  study  are 
necessary  precursors  to  land  use  planning. 

Consider,  by  way  of  example,  that  event  defined  by 
the  intersection  of  "community",  "land  use",  and  "forecast" 
along  the  areal ,  substantive  and  procedural  scope  axes 
respectively.   This  is  illustrated  in  Figure  IT-3. 

Occurring  at  a  point  in  time  before  the  community 
land  use  forecast  must  be  a  community  land  use  analysis; 
that  is,  the  structuring  of  the  base  data  to  accurately 
portray  the  state  of  community  land  use  at  a  point  in  time 
and  from  which  forecasting  will  be  made.   Occurring  at  a 
point  in  time  after  the  community  land  use  forecast  will 
be  one  or  more  community  land  use  designs  based  upon  the 
forecasted  data.   These  relationships  are  procedural  and 
occur  a  Long  the  procedural  scope  axis. 

Along  the  areal  scope  axis  there  are  two  problems. 
First,  the  area  of  the  element  itself  must  be  defined 
in  space.   Second,  the  relationships  of  that  elemental 
area  to  that  that  includes  it,  possibly  here  called  the 
region,  and  to  those  that  make  up  it,  possibly  here  called 
neighborhoods,  must  be  explored.   The  use  of  this  conceptual 
model  forces  the  planner  to  make  these  explicit  considera- 
tions, generally  called  delimiting  the  study  area. 

Along  the  substantive  scope  axis  of  the  model,  the 
planner  is  forced  to  fit  the  plan  in  question  into  a 
hierarchy  of  planning,  recognizing  that  some  plans  are  so 
general  as  to  be  policy  statements  which  generally  recommend 
further  planning.   Further,  as  plans  become  more  limited 
in  substantive  scope,  they  tend  toward  specific  design 
measures  and  action  programs  which  have  more  apparent  impact, 
on  the  community.   As  plans  tend  toward  specific  designs 
they  draw  upon  explicit  or  assumed  or  intuitive  prior 


43 


Id 
C/5 

a 

z 

—J      <_5 

t  ?! 

b    uj 

z    Q 

3 

2 
o 
o 


Ul 

I/) 

a 

z     w 
<     to 

-1  h 

E  I 


o 
o 


3 
W3 


H 

o 

3 

O 
UJ 

Ul 

cc 
o 

Ll. 

o 

Lu 

>-5 

_IW 

k2 

Is. 

<  to 

Z=> 

°^ 

5d 

—  Q 
Ld< 

a:  _i 

25. 

oo 

X> 


CO 
3 
■u 
a 
a> 

CJ 

c 
o 
o 


n3 
O 

1) 

u 

0 

(LI 

en 


C 

■U 

•i-l 

c 

3 


O 
c_> 

H 


44 


planning  as  necessary  precursors.   Thus  the  community  land 
use  forecast  must  be  based  on  some  higher  order  informa- 
tion contained  in  the  community  population  forecast,  and 
the  land  use  forecast  itself  has  a  relationship  to  its 
parts  such  as  the  community  industrial  land  use  forecast, 
residential  land  use  forecast, etc . 

The  Use  of  the  Model  in  Planning  Organization 
As  a  result  of  the  process  described  in  the  last 
chapter,  the  planner  has  been  given  a  charter  to  develop 
a  plan.  This  development  logically  begins  with  an  investiga- 
tion of  the  plane  of  the  model  cube  defined  by  the  sub- 
stantive scope  axis  and  the  areal  scope  axis.   This  is 
illustrated  in  Figure  II-4  and  the  planner  must  now  set 
the  boundary  conditions  of  his  effort  and  design  a  study 
that  will  fulfill  the  goals  of  his  client  constituency  as 
near  optimally  as  possible. 

Considering  first  an  investigation  of  the  areal  scope 
axis,  it  is  apparent  that  any  chosen  boundary  must  be  a 
function  of  the  type  of  study  to  be  done.   Given  this, 
the  factors  to  be  considered  can  be  thought  of  as  comprising 
three  catagories,  socio-economic,  physical  and  political. 

It  is  difficult  to  cite  some  examples  of  socio- 
economic influences  on  areal  scope  outside  of  the  context 
of  a  specific  kind  of  study.  Nonetheless  it  seems  apparent 
that  if  the  study  deals  with  a  service  such  as  those 
available  in  a  Central  Business  District,  or  those  provided 
by  transportation,  that  the  area  studied  will  be  markedly 
affected  by  the  geographical  distribution  of  those  people 
likely  to  use  the  service.   Sometimes  this  can  be 
interpreted  from  symptomatic  data  such  as  the  agricultural 
milkshed,  the  commuter  shed,  or  the  retail  trade  shed. 
Any  such  planning  study  dealing  with  the  provision  of  a 
service  and  thereby  satisfying  a  demand  can  probably  best 
be  delimited  by  setting  thresholds  of  maximum  and  minimum 


45 


PROCEDURAL 


SCOPE 


CD 

u 

3 


•u 

•H 

> 

•H 
4J 
O 

< 

.5 
g 

H 

D-, 

o 


ffl 
a 
u 

D- 
0) 

u 

c 
o 
u 

cu 


cu 

<?> 

c 

0 


cd 

N 

c 

bO 

o 

0) 
Xi 
H 


46 


areal  size.   The  minimum  areal  size  may  be  also  a  functional 
consideration  of  the  facility  such  as  the  minimum  number 
and  types  of  stores  in  a  shopping  area,  or  the  minimum 
number  of  students  to  economically  support  a  secondary 
school . 

Physical  characteristics  of  the  area  set  some  geo- 
graphical boundaries.   The  building  of  a  highway  or  the 
bridging  of  a  river  may  extend  the  study  area  more  in  one 
direction  than  another. 

Much  of  the  analysis  of  both  socio-economic  and 
physical  factors  lends  itself  to  graphical  interpretation. 
Figure  II-5  displays  the  often  encountered  shapes  of  demand 
curves  of  the  plots  of  distance  (or  time  as  a  measure  of 
distance)  versus  the  cumulative  percentage  of  people  whose 
needs  are  satisfied  at  this  distance.   The  factors  plotted 
could  be  "secondary  school  students  walking  to  school"  or 
"metropolitan  newspaper  deliveries"  or  "patrons  of  a 
amusement  park"  or  any  such  factor  bearing  on  the  study  at 
hand.   The  abscissa  measures  the  "friction  of  space".   The 
slope  changes  indicated  could  be  interpreted  as  occuring  at 
that  point  of  distance,  the  threshold,  where  a  marginal 
increase  of  the  factor  loses  significance. 

Those  factors  deemed  to  he  important  and  representa- 
tive by  the  planner  could  then  be  plotted  on  a  map  of 
suitable  scale  and  some  approximation  made  of  a  limit  lo 
the  study  area  suitable  for  them  all. 

One  of  the  most  important  influences  in  delimiting 
the  study  area  is  political.   If  a  governmental  agency 
provides  some  or  all  of  the  funds,  the  study  boundary  could 
be  directed  to  be  the  political  boundary  of  that  agency. 
The  same  holds  true  for  a  private  employer.   If  outside 
factors  are  still  important,  they  can  sometimes  be  simulated 
as  "influence  sources"  or  "influence  sinks"  at  the 
appropriate  edges  of  the  study  area. 


47 


/ 

/ 

/ 

r 

DISTANCE 


Figure   II-5 
Conceptual   Demand  Curves 


48 


There  are  two  remaining  decisions  to  be  made  regarding 
delimiting  the  study  area.   One  must  always  consider  the 
extent  of  the  resources  available  for  planning.   Nearly 
every  resource  can  be  reduced  to  dollars  and  for  any  effort 
the  dollars  available  must,  at  least  equal  the  dollars 
needed . 

Finally  there  remains  the  concept  of  prior  work  and 
necessary  precursors.  IE,    for  instance,  the  planner  is 
directed  to  study  housing  in  an  area,  and  there  exists 
accurate  recent  population  data  for  a  somewhat  larger  or 
smaller  or  overlapping  area,  he  must  consider  the  cost  of 
adapting  these  data  to  his  proposed  area  versus  changing 
his  area  to  fit  the  existing  data  base.   This  leads  directly 
to  the  investigation  of  the  other  axis  defining  the  organiza- 
tional plane  in  Figure  II -4,  and  the  concept  of  a  hierarchy 
of  planning. 

This  other  axis  is  used  to  measure  the  substantive 
scope  of  planning  and  reflects  the  existence  of  a  hierarchy 
of  planning.   By  hierarchy  of  planning,  it  is  recognized 
that  different  plans  may  address  the  same  subject  in 
different  detail.   One  would  not  logically  find  a  timing 
order  for  sequential  traffic  signals  on  Main  Street  in  a 
comprehensive  plan,  although  that  plan  will  offer  the 
general  scheme  for  a  desired  transportation  system.   A 
next  lower  order  plan,  the  transportation  plan,  will 
probably  continue  to  refine  this  subject  but  the  timing 
order  would  probably  be  designed  in  a  still  lower  order 
plan,  the  major  thoroughfare  plan.   In  the  same  manner,  a 
comprehensive  plan  may  speak  of  school  locations  by 
community,  a  land  use  plan  may  designate  a  large  parcel  for 
school  development,  a  school  plan  may  site  the  school,  and 
finally  an  architect/engineer  designs  the  building.   One 
would  not  logically  find  the  siting  considerations  or  the 
building  design  in  the  comprehensive  plan. 


49 


Those  examples  demon straLe  that  there  is  an  order 
of  generality  and  comprehensiveness  in  planning,  from  the 
management  of  gross  data  over  comprehensive  consideration 
to  the  management  of  specific  data  over  limited  consideration 
This  same  axis  measures  the  orderly  development  of  planning 
from  policy  making  to  design,  from  the  general  to  the 
specific . 

Unfortunately  for  the  reputation  of  planning  as  a 
profession,  this  means  that  the  results  of  some  plans  are 
mandates  for  further  planning.   So  to  counteract  l his,  one 
sometimes  finds  the  most  amazingly  discrete  recommenda- 
tions in  otherwise  broadly  comprehensive  plans.   This  is  a 
forced  consideration,  however,  and  one  that  does  not 
immediately  follow  from  the  scope  of  data  considered.   In 
general  though,  the  order  of  planning  measured  along  the 
substantive  scope  axis  is  relative,  with  higher  order  plans 
dealing  with  gross  data,  many  disparate  factors  for  con- 
sideration, and  being  policy  oriented.   Lower  order  plans 
are  concerned  with  specific  data,  allied  factors  for 
consideration,  and  action  programs  and  specific  designs. 

Ideally,  a  planner  should  be  directed  to  plan  in 
this  natural  progression  from  the  general  to  the  specific. 
Various  factors,  some  political  and  some  arising  from 
competition  for  scarce  resources,  sometimes  force  the 
planner  to  "start  in  the  middle".   If,  for  instance,  a 
client  constituency  wants  a  land  use  plan  and  has  no 
comprehensive  plan,  population  or  economic  base  studies, 
the  planner  must  compensate  for  this  by  designing  that  land 
use  planning  process  if  not  to  overcome,  at  least  to  ease 
the  impact  of  the  absence  of  this  higher  order  policy  and 
data.   He  may  design  the  study  to  incorporate  some  of  the 
major  elements  of  population  and  economic  base  studies  and 
term  the  resultant  land  use  plan  as  "interim"  pending  the 
results  of  recommended  further  study.   In  this  case,  the 
population  and  economic  base  studies  are  necessary 


50 


precursors  to  land  use  planning  and,  if  they  do  not  exist, 
the  planner  must  compensate  Cor  this  in  the  study  design. 

The  Use  of  the  Model  in  Study  Design 
The  design  of  an  urban  planning  process  is  called  a 
study  design.   A  study  design  often  is  comprised  of  three 
types  of  documents,  a  prospectus,  the  study  design  itself, 
and  one  or  more  procedural  or  operational  manuals. 

A  prospectus  is  a  highly  distilled  general  statement 
of  the  objectives  of  a  particular  study,  the  role  of  various 
agencies  and  participants  in  the  study,  the  general  process 
to  be  followed,  some  gross  estimate  of  the  time  involved 
and  a  gross  estimate  of  the  cost.   The  objectives  stated 
are  those  of  a  particular  study  which  follow  from,  and 
should  not  be  confused  with,  the  goals  and  objectives  of 
the  client  constituency  in  the  meaning  of  Chapter  I.   This 
is  a  most  sensitive  document  to  author  as  it  is  used  to 
justify  funding  of  the  study  design.   Many  times  the  pro- 
spectus is  prepared  with  very  limited  funds  in  the  hope 
that  the  ensuing  justification  will  provide  funds  to  cover 
its  costs.   Great  care  should  be  taken  in  the  wording  of 
the  study  objectives  so  that  if  subsequent  investigation 
reveals  that  these  objectives  are  for  some  reason  not 
suitable,  they  may  be  amended  without  threatening  the 
funding.   Even  more  care  should  be  taken  to  insure  that  any 
cost  figures  given  are  sufficient  to  complete  the  study 
design.   The  prospectus  is  the  document  prepared  to  make 
an  initial  estimate  of  the  study  feasibility  and  to  fund 
the  study  design,  and  these  funds  should  not  be  confused 
with  those  generated  by  and  justified  by  the  study  design 
to  do  the  actual  planning.   The  finished  prospectus  presents 
decision  makers  with  a  basis  to  judge  whether  or  not  to 
proceed  with  the  study  design.   As  such  it  is  a  decision 
point  Cor  the  sometimes  many  sponsoring  agencies  involved. 
In  the  case  where  the  single  private  developer  is  the 


5L 


decision-maker,  this  process  of  evolving  a  prospectus  could 
well  be  carried  out  orally.   Given  the  decision  and  Lhe  funds 
to  proceed,  the  next  stop  is  to  design  the  .study. 

The  study  design  itself  is  a  work  program  formula- 
tion of  the  steps  necessary  to  do  the  planning.   it  is  some- 
what similar  to  this  discussion  in  that  it  is  not  the 
planning  but  instead  the  planning  methodology.   it.  should 
define  what  is  to  be  done,  who  is  to  do  it,  when  it  will 
be  done  and  how  much  it  will  cost. 

Here  the  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity  is  most 
valuable.   Figure  II-6(a)  shows  the  ideal  structuring  of 
the  planning  process.   Here  all  necessary  higher  order 
planning  has  been  accomplished,  there  is  no  major  inter- 
action with  greater  or  smaller  geographic  areas,  all 
necessary  precursors  are  present,  policy  is  set  and  the 
planner  can  proceed  up  the  procedural  axis  from  organization 
to  implementation  in  designing  the  study. 

it  is  much  more  likely  however  that  the  elemental 
interface  considerations  forced  by  the  conceptual  use  of 
the  model  will  disclose  vacancies  in  higher  order  planning, 
elemental  interaction  with  greater  or  lesser  geographic 
areas  that  cannot  be  ignored,  the  absence  of  necessary 
precursors  or  policy  or  a  combination  of  all  these. 

Figure  II-6(b)  represents  the  case  where  an  element 
of  a  necessary  higher  order  plan  is  missing  and  must  be 
addressed  in  the  lower  order  plan,  and  therefore  in  the 
lower  order  plan  study  design. 

An  example  might  be  a  land  use  plan  study  design  where 
it  was  found  necessary  to  complete  or  amend  a  prior  economic 
base  study  forecasting. 

Figure  Il-6(c)  represents  the  case  where  elemental 
interaction  with  both  lesser  and  greater  geographic  areas 
forces  that  interaction  to  be  explicitly  addressed  in  the 
plan,  and  therefore  in  the  plan  study  design.   An  example 
might  be  a  community  major  thoroughfare  plan  where  the 


52 


K 

I 


r^ 


\  Mi 

\! 


\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 


c 
o 
■--I 
u 
CO 
N 
■rl 

c 

CO 
bO 

s- 
O 

c£ 
C 

•H 

g 

03 
—I 
PU 


\ 


Y~ 


^  k  !\  \  \  \  \  \ 


r 


s    \\| 


S 


J: 


i  \ 


\ 
4     \ 


TTT\r 


cu 
J-l 
a 

GO 


CU 
O 

2 


a 

<D 

o 

c 
o 
u 

0) 

■u 

H-l 

O 


X. 
H 


L. 


J 


y_. 


53 


regional  major  thoroughfare  already  implemented  forces 
some  aspects  of  the  community  plan,  and  the  community  plan 
itself  affects  the  design,  evaluation  and  implementation 
of  neighborhood  feeders. 

Figure  II -6(d)  represents  the  case  where  a  higher 
order  plan,  such  as  a  comprehensive  plan,  even  though  not 
quite  complete,  can  influence  a  plan  several  levels  below 
it,  such  as  an  urban  renewal  plan. 

These,  of  course,  are  merely  examples  of  the  great 
number  of  elemental  interactions  that  could  exist  for  a 
particular  proposed  plan  under  particular  conditions  in 
a  specific  situation.   The  important  concept  is  that  the 
use  of  the  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity  in  the 
study  design  forces  the  planner  to  consider  these  inter- 
actions and  allow  for  them  where  necessary  in  the  study 
design  and  thereby  avoid  mistakes  of  omission.   Further 
discussion  of  the  relationships  of  each  successive  element 
along  the  procedural  scope  axis  follows  in  Chapters  111 
through  VIII. 

A  study  design  must  address  the  questions  of  pro- 
cedure, staffing  and  cost  nearly  simultaneously.   Normally, 
the  framework  used  for  analysis  beginning  with  the  inventory 
phase  and  ending  with  implementation  is  that  of  procedure, 
with  the  study  then  broken  down  and  reassembled  to  check 
for  staffing  and  cost  feasibility.   In  the  organization 
phase,  first  consideration  is  more  often  given  to  staffing 
and  funding. 

This  work  will  not  examine  the  staffing  of  consultant 
operations  or  the  moot  question  of  single  source  funding  as 
in  the  case  of  the  single  private  developer.   Rather  it 
will  examine  staffing  and  funding  in  the  multiple  sponsor 
public  sector  of  planning.   Four  generalized  staffing 
schemes  are  illustrated  in  Figure  I 1-7  (Hensen,  1968). 

The  poJ icy  committee  is  typically  composed  of 
elected  or  appointed  officials  of  the  participating  public 


54 


POLICY 
COMMITTEE 


/    TE 


TECHNICAL 
V    COMMITTEE  (S) 


CITIZEN  S 
ADVISORY 
,COMMITTEE(Sl 


/RETAINED 
(    PROFESSION/ 
V  STAFF 

(a) 


CITIZENS 
ADVISORY 
COMMITTEE  (S) 


(b) 


POLICY 
COMMITTEE 


'CITIZEN  S 
ADVISORY 
.COMMITTEE  (S) 


d 


/technical 
i  committee  (s) 


CONSULTANT 


(0 


(d) 


Figure    II-7 


Four  Conceptual  Staffing  Schemes 


55 


agencies.   It  establishes  the  framework  of  the  study,  sets 
policy  and  finance,  makes  appointments  to  other  committees, 
employs  key  personnel,  reviews  plans  and  makes  the  ultimate 
decisions  as  to  selection  of  alternatives.   They  are  the 
decision  makers.   In  the  Rhode  Island  Statewide  Compre- 
hensive Transportation  and  Land  Use  Planning  Program  (1965) 
for  example,  this  policy  committee  was  composed  of: 

the  State  Director  of  Public  Works, 

the  Executive  Director  of  the  Rhode  Island 

Development  Council, 
the  Program  Director, 
the  Director  of  the  State  Department  of 

Business  Regulation, 
the  Chairman  of  the  Rhode  Island  Public 

Transit  Authority, 
the  Mayor,  City  of  Cranston, 
the  Mayor,  City  of  Pawtucket, 
the  Mayor,  City  of  Providence, 
the  Director,  Eastern  Region,  Federal 

Aviation  Agency, 
the  Division  Engineer,  Rhode  Island  Division, 

United  States  Bureau  of  Public  Roads, 
and  the  Regional  Administrator,  New  York 

Regional  Office,  United  States  Housing 

and  Home  Finance  Agency. 

The  Citizens'  Advisory  Committee(s)  is  composed  of 
key  business,  labor,  civic  leaders  and  public  officials 
who  advise  the  policy  committee  on  matters  of  public 
concern.   They  in  turn  aid  in  the  general  public's  under- 
standing of  the  key  concepts  of  the  resultant  plans.   Sued 
a  committee  could  be  identically  the  same  as,  or  a  sub- 
committee of,  that  described  in  Chapter  I. 

The  Technical  Committee  is  typically  composed  of 
planners,  engineers  and  other  professionals  who  are  called 
upon  to  both  advise  the  policy  committee  and  advise  and 
possibly  direct  the  staff  or  consultant.   Since  there 
is  this  dual  purpose,  there  are  often  two  such  committees, 
one  composed  of  those  professionals  who  are  direct  partici- 
pants in  the  study  and  the  other  made  up  to  tap  professional 
resources  not  so  directly  involved.   fn  the  Joint  Program 
for  the  Twin  Cities  Metropolitan  Area  (1963),  the  directly 


56 


participating  technical  committee  was  made  up  of: 

representatives  of  the  Minnesota  Highway  Department, 
representatives  of  the  Twin  Cities  Metropolitan 

Planning  Commission, 
representatives  of  the  Minneapolis  City  Planning 

Commission , 
representatives  of  the  St.  Paul  Planning  Board, 
the  Minneapolis  Engineer, 
the  St.  Paul  Engineer, 
the  Washington  County  Engineer, 
the  Scott  County  Engineer, 
the  Ramsey  County  Engineer 
the  Itennepin  County  Engineer, 
the  Dakota  County  Engineer, 
the  Carver  County  Engineer, 
and  the  Anoka  County  Engineer. 

The  use  of  permanent  staffs,  staffs  contributed  from 
participating  agencies,  and  the  degree  of  use  of  consul- 
tants is  a  matter  for  the  judgment  of  the  policy  committee 
based  upon  the  need  and  availability  of  resources.   In 
analyzing  the  generalized  staffing  forms  shown  in  Figure 
1 1 - 7 ,  Hensen  notes  that  IT-7(a)  is  characteristic  of  large 
urban  areas  in  a  position  to  pay  the  continuing  salaries 
and  expenses  of  such  a  staff.   Form  II-7(b)  may  be  more 
economical  but  with  a  degradation  of  service  by  contributing 
agencies  commensurate  with  their  contribution  to  the  study 
staff.   Often  this  degradation  is  not  acceptable  if  the 
contributing  agency  is  a  small  one  and  such  a  structure  has 
the  tendency  to  he  dominated  by  the  larger  contributors 
who  can  more  easily  minimize  this  degradation.   Form  II -7(c) 
is  characterized  by  the  use  of  a  local,  small,  but  permanent 
staff  to  direct  the  work  of  the  consultant.   This  is  quite 
expeditious  in  that  it  can  get  the  study  moving  without  taking 
the  time  to  fill  many  staff  positions  or  negotiate  with 
contributing  agencies  for  staff  support.   Form  II-7(d)  is 
the  most  expeditious  of  all  in  that  it  eliminates  entirely 
the  difficult  problems  associated  with  staffing. 

Generally,  as  consideration  of  staffing  alternatives 
moves  from  ll-7(a)  to  fl-7(d)  there  is  an  increase  in  cost. 


57 


an  increase  in  speed  of  accomplishment,  a  decrease  in 
personnel  associated  problems  and  a  decrease  in  the  level  of 
effort  assigned  to  a  continual  planning  process  as  opposed 
to  a  single  plan.   These  are  important  questions  for  the 
decision  maker,  answered  only  by  an  examination  of  the 
resources  available  in  a  specific  situation. 

The  Study  Design  Methodology 

Given  that  participating  agencies  feel  a  need  to  plan, 
and  that  a  prospectus  has  been  authored  defining  the  sub- 
stantive scope  and  the  areal  scope  of  the  effort  (what  to 
plan),  and  that  based  upon  this  prospectus  the  participating 
agencies  have  funded  a  study  design  and  formed  a  policy 
committee,  and  this  policy  committee  has  appointed 
coordinating  committees  and  established  an  organizational 
structure  (who  will  plan,  ,  there  remain  two  unanswered 
questions  before  a  decision  can  be  made  to  proceed;  namely 
how  to  plan  and  what  will  it  cost.   Both  of  these  questions 
are  answered  in  the  study  design. 

What  follows  here  is  an  examination  of  study  design 
methodology.   This  is  inextricably  tied  with  planning 
methodology,  addressed  phase  by  phase  in  this  work, 
beginning,  of  course,  with  this  chapter  on  organization. 
Much  of  the  detail  of  planning  methodology  must  then  neces- 
sarily be  deferred  to  later  chapters  and  one  cannot  design 
a  study  without  reference  to  the  information  contained 
therein.   But  because  study  design  is  necessarily  accompl- 
ished in  the  organization  phase,  the  methodology  therefore 
must  be  examined  at  this  juncture. 

This  first  step  in  study  design  is  to  construct  a 
precedence  diagram  or  flow  chart  of  the  major  activities 
to  be  performed.   The  ordering  of  activities  in  this 
precedence  is  one  of  work,  which  is  similar  to  but  not 
necessarily  the  same  as  one  of  time.   Two  examples  are 
given  in  Figures  II-8  and  11-9. 


58 


_l 

Q. 

< 


59 


LftJ 


X 


X 


X 


X 


1 


± 


I 


X 


X 


I 


I 


I 


I 


B 


L- 1  $ 


i 


I 


X 


I 


111 


1  XXX  XX 


I 


X 


*  s 

a:      k 

o 
o 

3 

9 


60 


As  can  be  seen  for  these  examples ,  this  flow  chart 
is  a  schematic  "thinking  through"  of  the  study  by  examining 
it  with  reference  to  the  procedural  scope  axis  of  the 
planning  model. 

The  next  step  further  refines  the  flow  chart  by 
breaking  each  flow  chart  element  into  its  appropriate  work 
items  and  continuing  the  assignment  of  precedence.   An 
example  is  given  in  Figure  11-10,  from  the  Cleveland  Seven 
County  Transportation/Land  Use  Study,  (1966).   Note  that 
this  example  deals  substantively  with  the  subject  matter  of 
this  chapter  and  its  illustrative  purpose  here  is  thus 
twofold . 

Because  of  the  great  number  of  work  Items  that  are 
likely  to  be  considered,  it  becomes  helpful  to  code  the 
work  items.   This  coding  should  be  so  devised  that  a 
single  unique  number  will  identify  a  work  item  for  budgeting, 
work  scheduling,  progress  reporting,  cost  accounting  and 
filing.   Rhode  Island  (1965),  for  example,  used  a  six 
digit  number  with  the  first  digit  defining  the  substantive 
scope,  the  second  digit  the  procedural  scope,  and  the 
remaining  digits  in  sequential  order.   Thus  if  "5"  were 
land  use  and  "3"  were  analysis,  the  530000  series  of  work 
items  all  deal  with  land  use  analysis. 

This  process  of  breakdown  is  repeated  as  many  times 
as  necessary  until  the  planner  feels  he  has  a  sufficient 
uniqueness  of  each  work  item  to  enable  him  to  tentatively 
assign  resources  for  its  accomplishment.   The  planner  then 
assigns  resources  based  upon  their  expected  availability 
as  established  by  the  policy  committee  of  decision  makers. 
In  some  cases,  there  may  be  only  a  single  cost  figure 
necessary  to  describe  the  case  where  a  consultant  will  be 
asked  to  perform  the  work  item.   At  the  opposite  extreme 
of  a  full  time  permanent  study  staff,  the  assignment  of 
resources  is  exampled  in  Table  11-1. 


61 


62 


Table  II-l 


Sample  Work  Item  Resource  Assignment" 


Work  Item  Number 

Title: 

Objective : 

Method : 

Procedure  : 


Input: 
Output: 

Personnel  : 


570002 
570003 
570004 
570005 
570006 

Compute  and  distribute  socio-economic 
data:   1990,  1970,  1975,  1980,  1985. 

To  obtain  input  data  for  generation 
of  trip  productions  and  attractions. 


The  selected  land  use  plan  will  be 
based  on  forecasts  to  1990.   Accomplish- 
ment of  the  recommended  pattern  of 
development  must  be  "staged"  at  five 
year  intervals  from  1970  to  1990  in 
order  to  determine  transportation  and 
other  facility  requirements  for  each 
period. 

Forecasts  prepared  in  five  year 
increments  provide  the  basis  for  staging 
the  land  use  plan.   The  analysis  of 
development  potential  will  help  guide 
the  staging  process.   Policy  decisions, 
such  as  those  involved  in  extension 
of  utility  services  or  construction  of 
community  facilities,  will  also  be 
considered. 

570000 

A  staff  memorandum  describing  the 
staging  process  and  quantifying  socio- 
economic data  for  each  forecast  year. 


Chief  Planner 
Principal  Planner 
Senior  Planner 
Data  Processing  Chief 
Programmer  (1401) 
Senior  Engineering  Aide 
Junior  Planner 
Typist 


5  days 
10  days 
2  5  days 

5  days 
?  5  days 
2  5  days 
25  days 
15  days 


63 


Table  II-l  ,  cont. 

Equipment:  Desk  Calculator 

Planimeter 
IBM  1401  Computer  10  hours 

Cost:  Personnel  $  3,552 

Computer  500 

Other  0 

Total  $  4,050 

Allocation  :         R  I  D  C 


64 


When  the  tentative  assignment  of  resources  is  complete 
for  every  work  item,  the  planner  aggregates  these  resources 
by  catagory  over  all  the  work  items.   He  may  discover,  for 
instance,  that  he  has  assigned  393  senior  planner  man-days 
and  at  218  man-days  per  man-year,  the  policy  committee  must 
hire  a  senior  planner  for  1.8  years.   All  resources  are  so 
aggregated  and  then  a  final  distribution  of  resources  i s 
made  taking  into  consideration  feasibility,  (hire  a  senior 
planner  for  two  years  and  assign  .2  man-years  of  non-senior 
planner  work);  resource  availability,  (is  a  senior  planner 
available);  and  procedural  constraints  illuminated  in  the 
flow  chart,  (perhaps  two  senior  planners  can  be  hired  for 
a  year  each  and  work  concurrently) . 

This  is  the  point  in  study  design  where  the  planner 
must  actually  schedule  the  work  within  the  resource  con- 
straints'.  These  are  management  decisions  and  the  PER'J'/CPM 
methodologies  are  highly  recommended  as  tools  to  aid  this 
managerial  effort.   O'Brien  (1969)  is  an  excellent  reference 
for  these  methodologies.   Upon  completion,  the  planner 
reports  to  the  policy  committee/decision   maker  the  answers 
to  the  questions  posed  by  them;  namely,  how  will  we  pJan 
and  what  will  it  cost. 

Of  course  it  is  recognized  that  this  detailed  managerial 
effort  is  costly.   It  is  clearly  wasteful  if  the  scope  of 
the  planning  or  the  experience  of  the  planning  staff  is 
such  that  good  management  would  deem  it  unnecessary.   Should 
these  or  other  circumstances  allow  it,  the  complexity  of 
the  planning  study  design  as  outlined  here  can  be  reduced. 

The  conclusion  of  the  study  design  is  the  next  decision 
point  for  the  policy  committee/decision  maker.   Should  they 
feel  that  the  study  methodology  is  within  their  resources 
and  that  all  prior  decisions  are  still  germane,  they  can 
decide  to  proceed  with  the  plan  itself.   For  small  or 
relatively  straightforeward  plans,  the  planner  can  proceed 
directly  to  his  designed  inventory  phase. 


65 


More  often,  however,  there  exists  a  need  for  one 
further  elaboration  and  refinement  of  the  study  design  to 
educate  the  staff  in  procedure.   This  refinement  is  usually 
satisfied  by  the  preparation  of  procedural  manuals  for 
selected  elements  in  the  study  design.   A  procedural  manual 
gives  step  by  step  direction  to  a  practitioner.   Very 
commonly,  procedural  manuals  are  written  for  home  interviewers 
to  set  standards  of  appearance,  insure  that  the  information 
is  entered  correctly  on  the  form,  to  provide  the  interviewer 
with  the  answers  to  probable  interviewee  questions,  to  set 
work  standards  and  generally  to  try  to  set  a  uniformity  of 
procedure  from  interview  to  interview.   Procedural  manuals 
are  also  often  prepared  for  key  punch  coders  to  ease  the 
strain  of  interpretation.   If  the  answer  in  box  33  is  "yes", 
enter  "1"  in  line  64  on  the  card,  etc. 

Occasionally  the  policy  committee  decision  makers  will 
fund  the  preparation  of  procedural  manuals  separately  from 
and  before  the  study  itself.   If  so,  the  completion  of  the 
procedural  manuals  then  represents  yet  another  decision  point 
for  the  policy  committee.   As  before,  if  all  still  augurs 
well,  the  decision  may  be  made  to  proceed  and  the  planner 
enters  the  inventory  phase  of  the  plan. 

In  summary,  there  are  four  decisions  in  this  organiza- 
tion phase.   The  first  is  the  decision  to  plan  and  this 
results  in  a  formal  structuring  of  the  decision  makers 
(policy  committee,  advisory  committees)  and  the  preparation 
of  a  prospectus.   The  second  is  the  decision  to  design  a 
study  and  this  results  in  resource  allocations.   The  third 
decision  results  in  procedural  or  operational  manuals  as 
deemed  necessary.   The  fourth  decision  examines  the  feasib- 
ility of  the  study  as  a  whole  and  results  in  a  decision 
whether  or  not  to  proceed  to  the  inventory  phase  of  planning. 
In  practice,  some  of  these  decisions  may  run  together  but 
they  are  always  nonetheless  implicitly  or  explicitly  made. 


66 


In  closing,  it  should  be  pointed  out  that  if  there  is 
one  phase  of  the  planning  process  that  is  subject  to 
criticism,  it  is  this  of  organization.   There  is  probably 
no  phase  more  consistantly  underfunded  in  practice,  owing 
the  failure  of  the  policy  committee  to  realize  that  to  plan 
once  they  must  actually  plan  twice.   The  planning  process 
must  be  examined  from  beginning  to  end  via  the  study  design 
and  then  the  planning  itself  executed.   The  reluctance  of 
the  policy  committee  to  expend  considerable  resources  before 
even  "starting"  is  understandable  and  therein  lies  a 
dilemma  which  can  only  be  mitigated  through  a  wider  under- 
standing of  the  planning  process.   It  is  obvious  that  if 
the  study  design  will  not  yield  the  results  sought  after, 
the  study  itself  can  hardly  be  expected  to  make  up  this 
deficiency . 


Notes 

1.  R.  J.  Hensen,  "Development  of  an  Informational  Manual 
on  the  Urban  Transportation  Planning  Process  for 
Technical  Committees  in  Smaller  Urban  Areas,"  p.  68. 

2.  After  Cleveland  Seven  County  Transportation/Land  Use 
Study,  "Operations  Plan,"  CPM/PERT  Network. 

3.  Rhode  Island  Statewide  Comprehensive  Transportation  and 
Land  Use  Planning  Program,  "Program  Design  Report," 

p.  239. 


67 


CHAPTER  III 
INVENTORY 


Figure  I I I - 1  presents  the  inventory  plane  of  the  con- 
ceptual model  of  planning  activity.   On  this  plane  lie  all 
the  pieces  of  information  or  data  necessary  to  plan  over 
the  entire  substantive  and  areal  scopes  of  urban  planning. 

The  information  all  exists.   It  may  be  not  collected, 
or  collected  in  an  unusable  form,  or  collected  by  an 
agency  which  is  unknown  or  unavailable  to  the  planner.   It 
may  be  collected  and  at  hand  but  too  old  or  too  biased. 
But  it  all  exists  and  the  seeking  out,  sorting  and  using  of 
this  information  usually  constitutes  by  far  the  most  expen- 
sive phase  of  the  planning  process.   This  seeking  out  and 
sorting  of  information  for  eventual  use  is  termed  the 
inventory  phase  of  planning  and  procedurally  follows  organ- 
ization and  preceeds  analysis. 

One  way  to  approach  the  problem  of  taking  inventory  is 
to  recognize  that  there  are,  in  general,  two  major  end  uses 
of  data.   Data  may  be  used  to  describe  a  situation  or  to 
analyze  a  situation.   Although  in  practice  this  distinction 
sometimes  is  blurred,  its  importance  is  such  as  to  warrent 
continued  consideration  here. 

Consider  descriptive  data.   Information  such  as  this 
is  used  to  describe  a  situation  and  compare  that  situation 
to  others  by  comparing  the  equivalent  descriptive  data  sets. 
From  a  methodological  standpoint,  there  exists  a  marked 
tendency  to  use  those  descriptive  data  items  already  avail- 
able rather  than  to  initiate  a  new  collection.   This  follows 
from  the  intuitive  or  explicit  knowledge  that  mosl  situations 
can  be-  described  in  many  ways,  even  by  symptomatic  data  in 


68 


0) 

u 


■PROCEDURAL 


SCOPE- 


4-1 
•H 

4-1 
O 

< 

C 

■H 

g 
« 

H 

PL, 


cfl 

a 

4J 

ex 

0) 
CJ 

c 
o 
u 

0) 


X 

u 
o 

4J 

g 

> 


< 

N 

< 
O 

o 


0J 


69 


place  of  causal  data.   Thus,  the  data  needs  are  not 
rigorously  constrained  and  available  data  are  easily  sub- 
stituted for  what  were  originally  considered  desired  data. 

Descriptive  data  must  sometimes  be  differently  aggre- 
gated to  make  them  meaningful  to  the  decision  maker  and 
client  constituency.   The  planner  may  find  it  helpful  to 
deal  with  parts-per-million  of  an  air  contaminant,  for 
instance.   But  it  may  be  more  meaningful  to  describe  that 
concentration  as  pounds  swallowed  per  year  —  that  being  enough 
to  kill  a  horse  etc. 

So  descriptive  data  can  be  characterized  as  substitut- 
able,  possibly  symptomatic,  comparative,  readily  available 
and  meaningful  to  the  general  recipient.   Taken  together, 
sets  of  descriptive  data  are  said  to  describe  a  level  of 
service.   This  level  of  service  then  represents  the  balance 
struck  between  the  demand  for  that  service  and  the  resources 
allocated  to  fulfilling  that  demand. 

"Level  of  service"  is  something  of  an  elusive  term  and 
is  only  defined  within  the  context  of  a  problem.   The  level 
of  service  of  a  transportation  facility,  for  instance,  may 
be  expressed  in  terms  of  travel  time,  safety,  comfort, 
convenience,  cost  or  any  combination  of  these  and  other 
factors.   The  choice  of  expression  is  strongly  influenced 
by  its  meaningfulness  to  the  client  constituency. 

The  level  of  service  of  a  university,  for  instance,  may 
be  described  by  the  data  sets  shown  in  Table  III-l.   Some 
data  are  both  available  and  meaningful  in  the  academic 
community,  some  are  equally  available  but  have  acquired  a 
lesser  meaning,  and  some,  of  course,  are  unknown.   In  cross 
classification,  some  data  may  be  termed  descriptive  because 
of  their  inherently  strong  theoretical  basis.   Some  data 
rest  on  somewhat  weaker  theory,  some  are  symptomatic  and 
some  may  be  false  and  misleading.   The  example  given  here 
can  be  argued  against  but,  taken  as  a  whole,  it  does  describe 
a  level  of  service  and  becomes  particularly  meaningful  when 


70 


Table  lll-l 
Descriptive  Data  Showing  a  University  Level  of  Service 


Known  and 
Meaningful 


Known  and  Less 
Meaningful       Unknown 

Undergraduate      

hours  taught 
by  instructors 

Staff  counseling   

time/student 

Alumni  Dollar      

Support 


Strong  Theoretical 
Basis  for 
Description 

Weaker  Theoretical 
Basis  for 
Description 

Symptomatic 
Descriptors 


False 
Descriptors 


Admission 
Standards 


Dollar 
value  Staff 
Research 

Number  and 
Kind  of 
Academic 
Awards 

Football 
Record 


the  status  of  one  university  are  compared  to  some  "standard" 
or  yet  another  university. 

The  second  and  other  general  type  of  data  are  analytic 
in  nature.   This  type  of  data  probably  has  associated  with  it 
very  strong  elements  of  causality.   Failing  that,  it  at 
least  has  been  proven  to  be,  or  is  strongly  suspected  of 
being,  highly  correlated  with  as  yet  undiscovered  elements 
of  causality.   Data  of  this  type  is  measured  with  a  stated 
degree  of  precision  and  is  used  in  calibrating  analytic 
models  of  growth  and  behavior.   Because  these  data  are  used 
in  model  building  they  are,  or  should  be,  forecastable  on  a 
sound  theoretical  basis.   They  are  generally  not  substitut- 
able  as  were  the  descriptive  data  and  therefore  must  be 
collected  regardless  of  expense.   It  is  the  need  for  these 
data  that  precipitates  field  work  of  sometimes  vast  propor- 
tions and  this  is  largely  what  determines  their  expense. 


71 


As  opposed  to  descriptive  data,  aim  lytic  data  are 
causative  or  highly  correilated  to  cause,  precise,  fore- 
castable,  expensive  and  sine  qua  non  to  ensuing  analysis. 

Obviously  then,  the  need  for  analytic  data  must  be 
closely  examined.   The  need  for  such  data  must  be  fully 
documented  and  justified  in  the  most  rigorous  way  to  ensure 
that  the  cost  of  collection  is  not  borne  unnecessarily. 
Each  analytic  data  item  collected  must  have  its  use  in  later 
analysis  and  forecasting  phases  of  the  planning  process. 

Of  course,  when  the  undeniable  need  for  some  analytic 
data  item  precipitates  an  expensive  collection  procedure, 
that  procedure  often  makes  some  descriptive  data  marginally 
beneficial  when  collected  under  the  the  same  procedure. 
The  archetypical  case  is  the  United  States  decennial  census 
which  was  first  organized  to  count  people  and  now  has  been 
broadened  considerably. 

Still  caution  must  be  applied  here,  too.   Any  data 
must  be  coded,  stored,  retrieved,  displayed  and  manipulated 
in  many  ways  and  there  are  very  real  costs  associated  with 
all  these  activities.   The  collection  of  data,  no  matter  how 
easy  or  difficult,  must  be  based  on  the  need  for  that  data 
in  the  ensuing  phases  of  the  planning  process.   It  is  to 
minimize  the  cost  of  data  collection  and  its  subsequent 
manipulation,  if  for  no  other  reason,  that  the  organization 
phase  described  in  the  previous  chapter  is  so  important. 
Before  any  data  are  collected  there  must  be  some  iterative 
feedback  from  the  analysis  and  forecasting  phases  to  that 
of  inventory  to  ensure  that  there  is  a  necessary  end  use 
for  each  data  item  and  that  no  end  uses  go  wanting  for  data. 

So  in  selecting  those  data  to  be  collected,  the 
planner's  charter  is  to  be  highly  selective  and  discrimina- 
tory in  the  ad  hoc  situation.   Nothing  is  gained  and  much  is 
lost  in  collecting  data  for  their  own  sake. 

In  Chapter  II,  one  of  the  purposes  of  the  organization 
phase  of  the  planning  process  was  to  establish  a  highly 


72 


distilled  statement  of  the  objectives  of  a  particular  plan. 
This  was  generally  done  in  the  study  design  and,  more 
specifically,  in  the  prospectus.   In  the  inventory  phase  of 
the  planning  process,  each  data  item  collected  must  sub- 
stantially contribute  to  the  achievement  of  those  objectives. 
The  only  justification  for  incurring  the  cost  of  collection 
and  subsequent  manipulation  of  data  is  that  those  data  make 
this  contribution.   All  data  not  making  this  contribution 
are  superfluous  to  the  plan  considered,  and  a  mismanagement 
of  resources. 

As  an  example  of  the  type  of  analysis  needed  to  preclude 
such  an  occurrance,  Table  III-2  has  been  prepared  showing  a 
hypothetical  set  of  land  use  plan  objectives  and  the  data 
items  necessary  to  achieve  them.   This  table  has  been 
abstracted  from  the  areal  scope  axis  of  the  conceptual  model 
of  planning  activity  and,  accordingly,  no  attempt  should  be 
made  to  employ  it  quid  pro  quo  in  an  actual  planning  process. 

A  Data  -  Use  Matrix 

As  an  example  of  the  types  of  data  generally  collected 
in  urban  planning,  Figure  III-2  matches  these  data  against 
end  use  by  plan.   Data  items  considered  here  are  compiled 
from  three  general  sources  (Hearle  and  Mason,  1963;  Maxman, 
1968;  and  Tiebout,  1962).   The  fourteen  planning  processes 
listed  are  representative  of  the  range  of  urban  planning 
activity  measured  along  the  substantive  axis  of  the  model. 
For  each  cell  defined  by  a  data  item  and  a  planning  process, 
an  "A"  is  entered  if  that  data  item  is  generally  used  in  an 
analytical  way  in  the  process  and  a  "DM  is  entered  if  the 
data  item  is  generally  used  in  a  descriptive  way  in  the 
process.   No  entry  signifies  that  the  data  item  is  indifferent 
to  that  planning  process. 

The  matrix  is  generalized  and  bears  no  relationship 
to  a  particular  geographic  area  measured  along  the  areal 
scope  axis  of  the  model.   Accordingly,  the  matrix  can  be 


73 


Table  III-2 
Sample  Land  Use  Plan  Objectives  and  Data  Items 


Broad  Plan  Objective: 


Specific  Plan  Objectives: 


Data  to  be  Collected 


1.   Base  Maps  and  Charts 


A.   Regional  Map 


To  provide  a  plan  for  orderly 
and  optimum  use  of  major 
community  resources  of  land, 
both  spatially  and  quantita- 
tively. 

a.  To  determine  the  kinds  of 
land  use  required  for  the 
community. 

b.  To  determine  (based  upon 
standards  acceptable  to 
the  community)  intensity 
of  development  for  each 
land  use. 

c.  To  establish  the  amount 
of  land  required  in  each 
land  use. 

d.  To  properly  locate  each 
land  use,  relative  to 
each  other. 

e.  To  coordinate  with  other 
planning . 

f.  To  establish  procedures 
for  implementation. 

g.  To  secure  citizen  coopera- 
tion. 

h.   To  research. 

Purpose  of  Collection 

For  displaying  or  plotting 
data  collected  and  to  serve 
as  a  basis  for  studies. 

To  determine  the  community's 
geographic  location  and 
relation  to  surrounding  cities 
and  communities,  indicating 
any  specialized  land  uses. 


74 


Table  1 II-? ,  cont 


Street,  Road  and 
Highway  Map  indicat- 
ing right-of-way, 
width,  and  struc- 
tural capacity 


C.  Topographic  Map 


D.    Geological  Map 


To  determine  location  of 
circulation  system  and  can  be 
used  in  tabulating  area 
used  for  streets,  roads  and 
highways  to  assist  in  class- 
ification of  street  system. 

To  determine  drainage  patterns 
and  general  suitability  of 
areas  for  specific  types  of 
development . 

To  determine  existance  of 
deposits  of  materials  of 
possible  commercial  value  and 
thereby  determine  suitable 
land  use. 


E.  Soils  Map 


F.  Zone  Map 


G.  Existing  Land  Use 
Maps 


Public  and  semi- 
public  facilities, 
such  as  public 
buildings,  parks, 
playgrounds , 
schools,  hospitals, 
churches,  museums, 
treatment  plants, 
libraries,  etc. 

Private  facilities 
such  as  single 
family,  two  family 
and  multi-family 
residences,  com- 
mercial buildings, 
light  and  heavy 
industry . 


To  determine  suitability  for 
various  types  of  buildings, 
airports,  and  other  structures 
requiring  special  foundations. 

To  determine  existing  zones  in 
use  by  the  city. 

To  determine  categories  of 
present  land  use  and  for 
tabulating  land  use  by  per- 
centage of  total  land. 

To  determine  location  and 
number  of  community  and 
private  facilities. 

To  determine  location  and 
availability  of  lakes,  forests, 
and  other  areas  suitable  for 
recreational  development. 


To  determine  adequacy  of 
facilities  by  coordination 
with  other  development  plans 
to  establish  areas  required 
for  future  use; 


75 


Table  III-2,  cont 


3.  Undeveloped  and 
vacant  areas. 

Location  of  navigable 
rivers,  railroads,  RR 
sidings  and  stations, 
piers  and  wharfs,  bus 
terminals,  airports, 
etc . 

Location  of  pollution 
discharges  and  the 
Sag  curve  for  various 
points  along  rivers 
and  streams.   Also 
location  of  signifi- 
cant air  pollution 
sources . 


To  determine  available  vacant 
area  for  future  development. 

To  determine  the  measure  of 
accessibility  for  various 
land  parcels. 


To  determine  the  possible 
uses  of  adjacent  land. 


J.  Easements  for  public 
utilities  noting 
ownership,  existing 
utility  lines  and 
their  capacities. 

K.  Population  Density 
Map 


Population  Changes 
Map 


M.  Land  Value  Map 


Percentages  employed  in 
each  occupational 
category. 


To  determine  planning  of 
future  land  uses  on  the  basis 
of  their  utility  needs. 


To  determine  present  popula- 
tion density  by  area  and 
evaluate  existing  densities 

To  determine  future  density 
and  community  facility 
requirements . 

To  determine  population 
movement,  increases  and 
decreases . 

To  determine  economic  suit- 
ability of  land  use  pro- 
posals . 

Determine  primary  and 
secondary  functions  of 
community  and  to  relate 
land  use  requirements  to 
these  functions. 


76 


Table  III-2,  cont 


3.  Populations  and  their 
composition  by  age, 
groups,  income  and  sex 


To  determine  building  types 
and  population  density. 

To  determine  types  of  land 
use  required. 

To  determine  standards  for 
intensity  of  use  of  land. 

To  determine  amounts  of 
each  land  use. 


4.  Aerial  Photographs 


To  determine  percentage  of 
each  type  of  residential 
development . 

To  determine  community 
facilities  required  on  a 
neighborhood,  community  and 
regional  basis. 

To  determine,  in  conjunction 
with  other  data  collected, 
land  use  and  geographic 
features . 


5.  Prevailing  Winds 


To  determine  spatial 
relation  of  industrial  and 
other  land  use. 


6.  Area  Industrial  Trends 


a.  Standard  Industrial 
Classification 


To  determine  tha  area 
attractions  to  certain  SIC 
classes . 


b.  Average  land  used  and 
number  of  employees 
for  each  class  number 

c.  Historical  trends  on 
economic  activity 

1.  Number  of  labor 
force 

2 .  Percent  unemployed 

3.  Basic/non-basic 
ratio 


To  determine  existing  land 
use  requirements  in  terms  of 
employees . 

To  determine  future  economic 
potential . 


77 


Table  III-2 ,  cont. 


d .  List  of  community  To  determine  the  range  of 
attributes  important  industries  which  might  be 
to  industry.  attracted. 

7.  Area  Population  Forecasts  To  determine  future  population 

so  it  can  be  related  to  use 
requirements . 

8.  All  other  plans  prepared   To  coordinate  with  Land  Use 
for  development,  such  as   Plan. 

schools,  recreation,  etc. 

9.  List  of  civic  organiza-    To  secure  citizen  cooperation 
tions  and  their  officers    and  participation. 


78 


cr 


<      Q 


GO  Q   <  Q  SALE      DATE 

O    O  Q   <  Q  SALE     PRICE  * 

or 

a  a  <  o       a  real   estate   tax  revenue  h 

< 

O    O  O  <    <  O  ASSESSED  VALUE  LAND  a  IMPROVEMENTS  2 

rf  <  O  <   <         q   NUMBER  Of  PARKM6   SPACES  <M    m 

g  <t<OQQQ<Q  LANDMARK  g     => 

_j  Q  <   Q  q  EASEMENTS  £* 

uj  rr    < 

O  <  <  <    <  <  AREA  =;     Q 


3 


2                                Q                        O   Q                        <          <    FRONTAGE                                                                  —  uj 

•J-  _J 

q                                                          <    <                  Q                       OWNERSHtP  P- 

^                                <                              <                  Q                       VARIANCE  ^ 

<           <                              <     <           <                       ZONING  _ 

<Q<  <Q<<<0<<<<    LAND      USE 


79 


<  Q           O  O    <  l/TUTtO    WW    RIGHT    OF    WAY 

<  Q   <    Q  O   <    <  CONDITION 

Q           <          <  <    <   <  ACCESS     CONTROL 

<  <  <<<<  0<<  SCHOOL     ROUTE 

<  <  <<<<<0<<  TRANSIT      ROUTE 

<  <  <    <    <  LOAOMO      ZONE 

<  <  O    <   <  NUMBER     Of     LANES 
Q           O          O    O  O    O   <  STREET      LIGHTS 

Q           Q          Q    Q  O    O   <  SIDEWALKS 

<  <  <    <    <   CURB      PARKING 

<  <  O    <    <   SPEED     LIMIT 

<  <  O    <    <    TRAFFIC      CONTROL      DEVICES 

<  O  <    O  Q<<<  NUMBER      OF    ACCIDENTS 

<                                              <          <  Q    <    <  PEAK      HOUR       TRAFFIC                                       Z 

°  o 

.                      <Q<<  Q<<   AVERAGE       DAILY      TRAFFIC                                O 


<  <  <    <  PER      CENT     GRADE 

<  <  <   <   STRUCTURAL       COMPOSITION 

<  <OQ<<<<<  FUNCTIONAL       CLASS 


CM 


W  <  <  <    <    <   PAVEMENT     WIDTH  OT 

uj  — * 

I-  <  <  <    <    <    RIGHT      OF      WAY      WIDTH  S2 


Ll 


<  <  Q  <  <  LENGTH   OF   SEGMENT 

<  <  O  <  <  INTERSECTION 


80 


<         <    <    <    <  UTILITY        SCHV1CE 


a       a  <       o  o  o  o  fme     calls 


Q  O  <  O    O    O    O  POUCE      CALLS 


Q  <    <    <    <  REHABILITATION        COST 


<  <   <    <    < 


NUMBER      S       TYPE      OF 
BUILDING      CODE      VIOLATIONS 


Q  <   <    <    <  FWST      FLOOR      AREA 


Q  <    <    <    <  TOTAL     FLOOR     AREA 


2  ° 


Q  <   <    <    <  NUMBER      OF      FLOORS 


<  <  <  <   <    <    <  BUILDMG       CONOITION 


O 

i 

m 

UJ 

or 

01  Q  <   <    <    <  TYPE       CONSTRUCTION  ^ 


O  <    <    <    <  YEAR     BUILT 


•  a     o 


a1 


II 


MifcSa*  *,     i     3P 

j   E   i   S   V   VS  8    o    I    °    *    x 

t\  i  I i  h  s 

,i  1  *  * 1  °-  i  t 

Bl!! 


a    ^ 


m 


Q   O    Q  O  <    < 


O  <  <    Q 


number    a    types    o' 

COMMUNICABLE        DISEASl 


O    Q  <  <    O 


WELFARE       PAYMENT 


Q    <  <  Q 


Q  O    <    O    <  Q 


<    < 


■ANS      OF       TRANSPC*!. 


TO        WORK 
<    <  PLACE      OF       WORK 


Q    <    O    <    O   O    O  <<  VCHICLES        OWNED 


Q         Q  Q  Q    O  Q  OCCUPATION 


Q    O  Q  O    Q    O 


QQQQ  <  <<Q 


FAMILY      EDUCATION 


FAMILY       INCOME 


<a<<0<tO<<<<<<  RESIDENTS      BY     SEX      B      AOE 


O 

o 


E3 


UJ 

3 
o 


Q  <    < 


PERCENT       VACANT 


M    Is" 

w  SJ  5  fe  g  j 
2  *  §  * 

2    o    g     8    K    8 

u   -i   i    4   a  1 


1- 

£ 

J 

p 

z 

V5 

a 

(/> 

u 

< 

o 

s 

< 

82 


OF    SALES     TO    AREA    NON-CAPITAL 

<  MANUFACTURING        FIRMS  , 

PCRCCNT     TO    FIRMS     BY    TYPES 

Of    SALES      TO     AREA     FIRMS 

<  or    NON-CAPITAL     aooos, 

PERCENT     TO     MANUFACTURING 

OF     SALES     TO    AREA     FIRMS     OF 

<  NON-CAPITAL    GOODS,    PERCENT     TO 

INSURANCE,   FINANCE    a    REAL   ESTATE 

OF    SALES     TO    AREA     FIRMS 

<  OF     NON-CAPITAL     GOODS, 

PERCENT     TO     RETAIL 

OF     SALES     TO     AREA     FIRMS 

<  OF     NON-CAPITAL      GOODS, 

PERCENT      TO      CONSTRUCTION 
OF     SALES     TO    AREA       FIRMS 

<  OF    NON-CAPITAL     GOODS, 
<  PERCENT     TO      AGRICULTURE 
(- 

Q  ^.  OF    SALES    INSIDE    AREA,  PERCENT     TO 


^  TO      ADCA       riPUC      DC      TAPITAI       rtfTDnr.  L^ 


AREA     FIRMS     OF    NON-CAPITAL    GOODS  JT 

OF    SALES    INSIDE    AREA,   PERCENT 
TO    AREA     FIRMS    OF    CAPITAL    GOODS 


«,  OF  SALES    INSIDE   AREA,  PERCENT 

TO  LOCAL    S    STATE     GOVERNMENTS 

<,  OF  SALES     INSIDE    AREA,  PERCENT 

TO  CONSUMERS     DIRECTLY 


H 


LU 

^                          „  OF     SALES     OUTSIDE     AREA,    PERCENT             OT 

Q                        **  TO     FEDERAL     GOVERNMENT                              Z) 

i  ^ 

g                          <  PERCENT      SALES      OUTSIDE      AREA 

z                  <    <  <                                                                         MAJOR      PRODUCT     GROUPS 

<  <           <           <  <    <           OPTIMUM       TOTAL      EMPLOYMENT 
<    <  <           <                               <    <          NUMtfh       OF      EMPLOYEES 

<  <           <  <    <           RCAK       SHIFT       EMPLOYEES 


83 


faulted  in  the  context  of  a  specific  real  life  plan. 
Nonetheless  most  of  the  analytic  and  descriptive  relation- 
ships were  hypothesized  to  hold  true  from  location  to 
1 ocation . 

Neither  is  the  matrix  exhaustive,  but  rather  illustra- 
tive of  the  analytic/descriptive  split  of  data  end  uses. 
It  further  shows  how  one  data  item  may  change  end  use  from 
one  type  of  plan  to  another.   The  non-dwelling  unit  data 
illustrated  will  provide  the  means  for  carrying  out  but  one 
type  of  the  several  possible  economic  base  studies,  any  one 
of  which  may  be  preferable  to  that  shown.   Further,  some 
whole  classes  of  data  have  been  omitted,  such  as  that  data 
set  dealing  with  the  engineering  features  of  the  soil, 
water  table,  topography,  extractive  potential,  etc. 

The  strategy  in  designating  analytic  or  descriptive 
relationships  was  one  of  minimizing  the  number  of  analytic 
relationships  to  a  level  commensurate  with  the  detail 
required  for  a  particular  plan.   In  a  real  life  situation, 
this  same  strategy  should  be  employed  as  a  measure  of 
economy.   Secondly,  the  question  of  degree  of  aggregation  of 
data  has  been  deferred  to  later  in  the  chapter. 

The  data  have  been  organized  into  two  main  classes, 
land  data  and  structural  data.   Street  data  are  a  special 
type  of  land  data  and  structural  data  are  further  refined 
depending  on  whether  the  structure  is  a  dwelling  unit  or 
not.   All  data  items  associated  with  people  are  linked 
to  the  dwelling  unit  in  which  they  abide. 

Land  Data 
Land  Use.   As  can  be  seen  from  the  matrix,  these  data 
are  one  of  the  singular  primary  inputs  to  analysis  over  much 
of  the  range  of  urban  planning.   They  describe  the  actual 
land  use  as  opposed  to  zoning  and  variance  which  describe 
the  legal  use  and  any  relaxation  of  the  law.   The  source  of 
land  use  data  is  a  field  survey  and  the  source  of  /oniric 
and  variance  data  is  appropriate  governmental  records. 


84 


Ownership.   The  need  for  owner  identification  occurs 
when  particular  land  parcels  may  be  considered  for  acquisi- 
tion, as  in  transportation  route  selection  or  urban  renewal. 
The  source  of  this  information  is  the  appropriate  assessor's 
office. 

Frontage  and  Area.   These  are  dimensional  character- 
istics of  the  land  parcel  and  are  important  in  land  use 
planning  and  lower  order  plans  such  as  parking,  accident 
prevention,  recreation,  urban  renewal  and  housing  planning. 
This  information  is  available  in  the  assessor's  office. 

Easements.   Easement  information  illuminates  any 
encumbrances  on  the  land  parcel  which  may  restrict  develop- 
ment.  In  assumes  analytic  importance  in  the  case  of  land 
acquisition.   This  information  is  kept  by  the  utility  compan- 
ies holding  the  easements  and  is  recorded  in  deed  books. 

Landmark.   This  information  describes  architecturally, 
historically  and  culturally  significant  items  about  the 
parcel  and  its  use  is  mostly  descriptive.   It  assumes  analytic 
importance  when  its  preservation  is  threatened.   The  source 
of  this  information  is  a  field  survey. 

Number  of  parking  spaces.   It  is  a  matter  of  indifference 
whether  this  information  is  coded  to  land  data  or  structural 
data  but  it  is  an  important  consideration  in  most  types 
of  automotive  transportation  studies.   The  source  of  this 
information  is  a  field  survey. 

Assessed  value  of  land  and  improvements.   Although 
assessed  valuation  is  notorious  for  its  failure  to  be 
equitable  from  place  to  place,  it  may  be  the  only  readily 
available  mechanism  for  a  first  approximation  of  possible 
purchase  price.   Its  source  is  the  appropriate  assessor's 
office. 

Real  Estate  Tax  Revenue.   This  is  a  worthwhile  bit  of 
information  particularly  when  compared  to  some  dollar 
measure  of  municipal  services  consumed  by  the  parcel,  so  as 
to  determine  whether  a  particular  land  parcel  is  a  revenue 


85 


producer  or  revenue  consumer  in  a  community.   Its  source  is 
the  local  assessor's  office. 

Sale  price  and  sale  data.   This  information  is 
probably  more  reliable  as  an  indicator  of  worth  than  assessed 
value  is,  but  it  may  be  difficult  to  obtain.   One  way  of 
estimating  sale  price  is  to  count  the  tax  stamps  filed  with 
the  deed  and  multiply  by  the  appropriate  converted  tax  rate. 
As  with  all  the  valuations  mentioned,  its  use  is  primarily 
descriptive  except  perhaps  when  purchase  is  contemplated. 

Summary.   The  land  data  portion  of  the  matrix  shows 
some  very  significant  trends.   Land  use  and  landmark  data 
are  important  over  nearly  the  whole  range  of  studies  listed. 
Zoning,  dimensional  and  valuation  characteristics  are 
important  to  a  somewhat  lesser  extent.   The  remainder  of 
the  data  assume  specialized  importance  depending  upon  the 
planning  undertaken. 

By  plan,  as  might  be  expected,  land  use  planning 
requires  use  of  nearly  all  the  land  data.   Recreation 
planning,  major  thoroughfare  planning  and  urban  renewal 
planning  require  like  amounts  of  land  data,  but  only  over 
the  parcels  directly  affected. 

Street  Data 

Intersection .   Whether  or  not  a  parcel  is  an  inter- 
section classifies  the  subsequently  listed  data  bits.   The 
source  of  this  information  is  base  maps  and  a  field  check. 

Length  of  segment,  right-of-way  width,  and  pavement 
width.   These  dimensional  characteristics  are  analogous  to 
those  of  a  non-street  land  parcel  and  are  used  in  all  the 
listed  types  of  transportation  plans.   The  source  of  this 
information  is  base  maps  and  a  field  check. 

Functional  class.   This  is  a  convenient  division  of 
the  level  of  service  provided  by  the  street  system  —  express- 
way, major  arterial,  collector,  local  -  and  is  used  for  its 
descriptive  characteristics  over  a  wide  range  of  plans.   In 


86 


that  such  classifications  imply  a  wide  range  of  controls  on 
adjacent  development  regarding  access,  its  use  in  analytic. 
The  source  of  this  information  is  base  maps  and  field  check. 

Structural  composition  and  percent  grade.   These  are 
analytical  information  items  used  in  most  types  of  trans- 
portation planning.   The  source  of  these  data  is  the 
appropriate  engineering  agency. 

Average  daily  traffic  and  peak  hour  traffic.   These 
are  analytic  data  used  in  most  types  of  transportation 
planning.   The  source  of  this  data  is  a  field  survey. 

Number  of  accidents.   This  statistic  is  gathered  over 
some  appropriate  time  interval  and  is  used  in  all  the  listed 
types  of  transportation  planning  to  analyze  the  efficiency 
of  traffic  movement.   It  also  can  be  used  as  a  descriptor 
in  other  plans  such  as  urban  renewal  and  environmental  health 
planning.   The  source  of  this  information  is  police  records. 

Curb  parking.   These  are  analytic  data  used  in  all  types 
of  transportation  studies.   Their  source  is  a  field  survey. 

Sidewalks  and  street  lights.   These  are  mainly  descrip- 
tive data  except  in  accident  prevention  planning."  Their 
descriptive  characteristics  extend  beyond  the  types  of 
transportation  planning  to  such  plans  as  urban  renewal  and 
land  use.   The  source  of  these  data  is  the  appropriate 
engineering  agency  and  a  field  check. 

Number  of  lanes  and  loading  zone.   These  are  further 
analytic  data  items  used  in  automotive  transportation  studies. 
Their  source  is  base  maps,  the  appropriate  engineering  agency 
or  a  field  survey. 

Transit  route  and  school  route.   These  are  descriptive 
data  that  become  analytic  because  of  the  number  of  things 
that  each  implies.   Their  sources  are  field  surveys  and 
transit  companies  or  school  boards  as  appropriate.   This 
information  is  rather  widely  used  over  the  types  of  studies 
listed. 


Access  cont.ro  I  .   This  information  is  used  analytically 
in  all  the  transportation  plans  listed.   Its  source  is  a 
tie  Id  survey. 

Condition .   This  information  is  used  analytically  in 
the  transportation  plans  and  descriptively  in  some  others 
such  as  environmental  health  and  urhan  renewal.   Its  source 
is  a  field  survey. 

Utilities  sharing  right  of  way.   This  information  is 
used  analytically  in  land  use  planning  and  accident  prevention 
planning.   It  can  be  used  descriptively  for  other  plans  if 
the  situation  warrents  it.   Its  source  is  the  appropriate 
engineering  agency  and  utility  companies. 

Summary .   The  street  data  portion  of  the  matrix  shows 
the  following  trends.   The  functional  classification  of  a 
street  segment  is  useful  information  over  a  wide  range  of 
planning  studies.   Transit  route,  school  route  and  accident 
data  similarly  have  an  impact  outside  of  pure  transportation 
studies . 

Just  as  the  land  data  items  were  most  exhaustively 
used  in  land  use  planning,  so  too  the  street  data  items 
are  used  in  the  various  types  of  automotive  transportation 
planning.   Almost  all  of  this  use  is  analytic  in  nature. 

Structural  Data 

Year  built  and  type  of  construction.   These  are  descrip- 
tive data  in  environmental  health  planning,  and  analytic 
data  for  those  particular  structures  considered  in  plans 
such  as  urban  renewal,  housing,  school  and  recreational 
planning.   They  are  generally  available  from  the  appropriate 
assessor's  office  and  checked  in  the  field. 

Building  condition.   This  information  is  analytic  in 
use  for  all  the  plans  enumerated  above  as  well  as  higher 
order  plans  such  as  comprehensive  and  land  use  plans.   The 
source  of  this  information  is  the  field  survey. 


88 


Number  of  floors,  total  floor  area  and  first,  floor 
area .   These  information  items  measure  intensity  of  land 
use  and  they  are  analytic  in  lower  order  plans  such  as 
urban  renewal  .and  tend  to  he  descriptive  in  higher  order 
plan.'j  such  as  environmental  health.   This  information  is  all 
gathered  by  field  survey. 

Number  and  type  of  building  code  violations  .   Th  i  s 
information  is  all  analytic  and  would  be  used  in  the  low 
order  small  area  plans,  such  as  housing  plans  and  environ- 
mental health  plans.   Its  source  is  the  appropriate 
engineering  office. 

Rehabilitation  cost.   This  is  an  estimated  cost  of 
repairs  necessary  to  bring  the  subject  building  up  to  a 
condition  requiring  only  normal  maintenance.   Lt  is  used 
analytically  in  lower  order  plans  and  descriptively  in  higher 
order  plans.   It  is  grossly  estimated  during  a  field  survey. 

Police  calls  and  fire  calls.   These  data  are  used 
almost  always  descriptively  except  in  environmental  health 
planning  or  when  paired  with  the  cost  of  other  municipal 
services  and  compared  to  real  estate  tax  revenue.   In  the 
latter  instance  some  estimate  can  be  made  of  the  cost/income 
ratio  generated  by  a  particular  area.   Their  sources  are 
the  appropriate  departments. 

Utility  service.   These  data  are  gathered  for  all 
utilities  to  be  used  analytically  in  lower  order  plans  and 
descriptively  in  higher  order  plans.   Their  sources  are  the 
appropriate  utility  companies  and  a  field  check. 

Summary .   The  structure  data  portion  of  the  matrix 
shows  the  following  trends.   Building  condition  data  are 
used  analytically  over  a  wide  range  of  planning  processes. 
Intensity  of  use  measurements,  rehabilitation  costs  and 
utility  service  tend  to  be  used  analytically  in  lower  order 
plans  and  descriptively  in  higher  order  plans.   Police  and 
fire  call  data  tend  to  be  used  almost  entirely  in  a 


89 


descriptive  sense  as  symptomatic  of  a  wide  range  of  urban 
ills. 

Considering  the  matrix  by  plan,  low  order  plans  deal 
intensively  with  these  data  in  an  analytic  sense.   The  school 
buildings  might  be  so  investigated  in  a  school  plan,  for 
example.   Environmental  health  planning  shows  about  an  equal 
mix  of  descriptive  and  analytic  use  of  the  data.   High  order 
plans  tend  to  deal  with  the  data  almost  entirely  in  a 
descriptive  sense. 

Dwelling  Unit  Data 

Per  cent  vacant.   For  each  dwelling  unit,  data  of  this 
type  is  commonly  used  descriptively  in  land  use  planning 
and  environmental  health  planning.   It  is  used  analytically 
Ln  urban  renewal  planning  and  housing  planning.   Tts  source 
is  a    field  survey  or  the  United  States  decennial  census  in 
aggregated  form. 

Residents  by  sex  and  age  groups.   This  is  another 
primary  set  of  information  quite  analogous  to  land  use  data 
in  its  universality  of  use.   Probably  the  best  source  of 
these  data  is  the  U.S.  decennial  census,  updated  as  necessary 
for  intercensal  years.   This  is  particularly  true  after 
1970  when  some  of  these  data  can  be  disclosed  by  the  Census 
bureau  at  the  level  of  the  block  without  violating  the 
Bureau's  rules  of  confidentiality.   For  smaller  areas  or 
Less  aggregated  information,  a  field  survey  is  necessary. 

Family  income.   This  is  a  widely  used  descriptive 
statistic  that  is  available  from  the  Census  Bureau  in 
large  aggregation.   As  a  measure  of  socio-economic  class  it 
is  used  analytically  in  environmental  health  planning, 
urban  renewal  and  housing  planning.   For  small  areas,  the 
source  of  this  information  is  a  field  survey. 

Family  education  and  occupation.   These  are  two 
descriptive  statistics  widely  used  as  indicators  of  socio- 
economic status.   They  are  available  from  the  Census  Brueau 
in  large  aggregation  or  from  a  field  survey  as  necessary. 


90 


Vehicles  owned,  place  of  work  and  means  of  transporta- 
tion to  work.   These  statistics  are  used  descriptively  when 
available  and  analytically  in  automotive  transportation 
planning,  major  thoroughfare  planning,  parking  planning  and 
mass  transit  planning.   They  are  available  in  large  aggrega- 
tion from  the  Census  Bureau  or  from  a  field  survey  in  more 
detail.   The  field  survey  would  probably  include  a  search 
of  vehicle  registration  records  and  employer  records. 

Welfare  payment.   This  information  is  used  descrip- 
tively in  land  use  and  population  studies  and  analytically  in 
environmental  health  planning  and  urban  renewal  planning. 
The  source  of  this  information  is  the  appropriate  welfare 
agency . 

Number  and  types  of  communicable  diseases.   This 
information  is  used  descriptively  in  population  planning  and 
housing  planning  and  analytically  in  environmental  health 
planning  and  urban  renewal.   Its  source  is  the  appropriate 
board  of  health. 

Rent.   This  information  is  used  descriptively  in  high 
order  pLans  and  analytically  in  lower  order  plans  such  as 
urban  renewal  and  housing  planning.   It  is  available  from 
the  Census  Bureau  in  aggregated  form  or  must  be  gathered  in 
a  field  survey. 

Summary.   The  dwelling  unit  portion  of  the  matrix 
discloses  the  following  trends.   The  data  are  very  strongly 
descriptive  overall.   This  is  to  be  expected  as  changes  in 
the  population  are  not  plannable  in  the  aggregate.   The 
data  tend  to  analysis  in  the  lower  order  plans  when  they 
are  used  to  establish  housing  classes,  socio-economic  status, 
and  when  the  population  consumes  public  services  such  as 
health,  welfare,  public  housing  and  schools.   The  class  of 
data  regarding  vehicle  ownership  and  the  work  trip  is 
strongly  analytic  in  transportation  plans. 

Considering  the  matrix  by  plan,  nearly  every  plan 
makes  analytic  use  of  the  matrix  entries.   Population 


91 


studies,  environmental  health  planning  and  housing  planning 
use  the  data  most  intensively. 

Possible  users  of  these  types  of  data  are  strongly 
encouraged  to  investigate  the  information  services  available 
from  the  Census  Brueau  (Siegelman,  1971;  United  States 
Bureau  of  the  Census,  Census  Use  Study,  1970-71,  and  1970 
Census  Users'  Guide,  1970). 

Non- Dwelling  Unit  Data 

Peak  shift  employees,  number  of  employees,  and 
optimum  total  unemployment.   These  measures  of  employment 
are  all  analytic  when  used.   The  first  is  an  important 
consideration  in  all  types  of  transportation  planning  and  is 
a  subset  of  the  second.   The  third  gives  some  measure  of 
possible  economic  expansion  under  favorable  conditions. 
The  sources  of  this  information  include  the  appropriate 
agency  administering  the  unemployment  insurance  act  and  a 
field  survey  of  employers. 

Major  product  groups.   This  information  is  used 
analytically  in  comprehensive,  land  use  and  economic  base 
planning.   Its  source  is  the  field  survey. 

Per  cent  sales  outside  the  area  and  the  remainder  of 
the  information  in  the  table.   This  information  is  included 
for  completeness  and  it  is  all  used  analytically  in  one  type 
of  economic  base  planning  (Tiebout,  1962).   Its  source  is  a 
field  survey  of  employers. 

Summary.   The  non-dwelling  unit  portion  of  the  matrix 
is  entirely  analytical  in  nature.   Such  descriptors  of 
building  condition,  etc.  that  might  be  desirable  have 
already  been  considered  in  the  structural  data  portion  of 
the  matrix.   There  remain  then  just  two  classes  of  data, 
employment  statistics  and  sales  statistics.   The  former  are 
used  in  transportation  plans  and,  with  the  latter,  in 
economic  base  plans. 


92 


Some  Concepts  of  Sampling 
In  the  previous  section,  the  source  of  much  of  the 
data  used  in  urban  planning  was  a  field  survey.   This 
procedure  is  very  expensive  and  time  consuming  when  data 
must  be  gathered  for  each  individual,  or  each  structure,  or 
each  dwelling  unit  over  a  widespread  area. 

An  alternative  to  gathering  data  for  each  individual, 
structure,  dwelling  unit,  etc.  is  to  sample.   Some  defini- 
tions are  in  order  here. 

A  "population"  is  defined  as  the  totality  of  all 
possible  values  (measurements  or  counts)  or  a  particular 
characteristic.   This  characteristic  could  be  a  person,  a 
structure  or  a  dwelling  unit  or  it  could  be  a  person's 
age,  a  structure's  condition  or  the  number  of  bedrooms  in  a 
dwelling  unit.   Thus,  populations  exist  within  populations. 

Populations  which  may  be  considered  for  analysis 
should  be  selected  with  great  care  and  defined  explicitly 
so  that  no  ambiguity  will  arise  as  to  the  inclusion  or  exclu- 
sion of  a  given  element.   A  "sample"  is  a  portion  of  the 
population  selected  according  to  some  rules.   The  sample 
characteristics  are  then  used  to  infer  the  population 
characteristics . 

In  some  cases,  the  population  may  be  constrained  in  a 
manner  such  as  to  make  sampling  necessary  for  any  measurement 
at  all.   The  population  could  have  an  infinite  number  of 
elements,  as  in  the  classic  coin  toss,  and  total  enumeration 
of  these  elements  is  impossible.   The  population  member 
could  be  destroyed  in  measurement  and  thus  make  sampling 
necessary.   Or  the  population  could  be  inaccessible,  no 
longer  in  existance  or  unobservable . 

In  urban  planning,  however,  one  is  more  likely  to 
encounter  populations  which  can  be  totally  enumerated. 
Why,  then,  should  the  use  of  sampling  be  considered? 

A  sample  in  which  only  a  portion  of  the  entire  popula- 
tion is  examined  is  usually  substantially  less  expensive 


93 


than  a  total  enumeration.   This  is  true  despite  the  added 
cost  of  sample  design  and  analysis.   Secondly,  a  sample 
will  usually  provide  information  faster  than  a  total 
enumeration.   This  results  from  two  considerations,  the 
actual  time  required  to  survey  the  sample  vis  a   vis  the 
total  population,  as  well  as  the  lesser  time  of  editing, 
coding,  tabulating  and  analyzing  sample  data  rather  than 
population  data.   Another  reason  to  consider  sampling  instead 
of  total  enumeration  is  that  greater  accuracy  may  be  achieved, 
This  may  be  surprising  in  view  of  the  fact  that  sampling 
will  introduce  another  source  of  error,  sampling  errors, 
about  which  more  will  be  said  later.   But  this  error  intro- 
duction can  be  more  than  countertended  by  stricter  controls 
on  interviewing,  editing,  coding  and  tabulating  the  data. 
The  imposition  of  these  stricter  controls  is  feasible 
because  the  sampling  is  simply  a  smaller  scale  undertaking 
than  a  total  enumeration.   These  stricter  controls  are  almost 
all  tied  to  personnel  actions  and  typically  arise  from  being 
able  to  hire  a  smaller  but  better  qualified  staff  within 
available  resources.   The  fact  that  qualified  staffers  may 
be  in  short  supply  and  incur  a  premium  cost  simply  reinforces 
this  tendency. 

Lastly,  if  all  else  remains  constant,  such  as  time, 
money  and  staff,  sampling  can  provide  more  detailed  and 
intensive  information  about  a  population  than  a  total 
enumeration. 

In  summary,  accuracy,  speed  and  economy  are  the  chief 
characteristics  of  data  obtained  by  sampling  if  and  only 
if  the  sampling  procedure  is  carried  out  according  to  the 
theories  of  probability  and  statistics.   These  theories  are 
applicable  only  with  difficulty  when  the  population  size 
is  very  small.   Also  the  small  sized  population  obviates 
many  of  the  problems  associated  with  total  enumeration. 
Accordingly,  a  total  enumeration  is  more  advantageous  than 
sampling  when  the  population  is  small.   in  urban  planning, 


94 


for  instance,  sampled  characteristics  inferred  to  the 
population  of  city  dwelling  units  may  illuminate  general 
areas  of  substandard  housing.   But  to  decide  the  fate  of 
each  dwelling  unit  in  a  smaller  urban  renewal  area  would 
require  a  total  enumeration  of  those  characteristics  of 
substandardness ,  particularly  if  each  dwelling  unit  were  a 
single  detached  house  making  it  a  population  of  one. 

Total  enumeration  in  urban  planning  also  has  some 
secondary  cooptive  effects  which  may  be  desirable.   Public 
acceptance,  compliance,  response  and  support  may  be  more 
readily  forthcoming  in  the  circumstance  of  total  enumeration. 

Sampling  is  not  the  unguided  substitution  of  a  portion 
of  the  population  for  the  whole.   Rather,  the  size  of  the 
sample  required,  the  manner  of  drawing  it,  the  measurement 
of  sample  characteristics  and  the  inferences  which  can  be 
made  about  equivalent  population  characteristics,  and  the 
errors  and  confidence  limits  on  this  information  are  all 
based  on  the  rigorous  application  of  the  laws  of  probability 
and  statistics. 

From  a  conceptual  standpoint,  sample  design  is  based 
on  two  considerations,  size  and  selection. 

Sample  Size 

Sample  size  is  based  upon  the  variance  of  the  sample 
(and,  by  inference,  the  variance  of  the  population)  and  not 
upon  the  size  of  the  population.   If  the  population  were 
completely  homogeneous,  then  the  characteristics  of  that 
population  could  be  measured  with  a  sample  of  one.   If  the 
population  were  completely  heterogeneous,  then  the  character- 
istics of  that  population  could  only  be  determined  by  a 
total  enumeration. 

In  reality,  of  course,  most  populations  are  a  mix 
of  homogeneity  and  heterogeneity  over  different  character- 
istics.  In  practice,  the  sample  size  is  usually  determined 
by  entering  the  appropriate  equations  with  a  desired  variance. 


95 


If,  for  a  desired  variance,  the  sample  size  derived  is 
feasible  in  terms  of  time,  economy,  and  personnel  and 
equipment  necessary  to  execute  it,  it  is  utilized.   The 
sensitivity  of  variance  to  size  changes  is  examined  and 
some  judgement  applied  to  the  results. 

The  variance  necessary  to  achieve  the  measurement 
objectives  of  the  sample  is  estimated.   It  is  estimated 
based  upon  the  results  of  prior  similar  studies,  or  in  some 
cases,  the  results  of  a  pilot  survey.   Another  common  pro- 
cedure is  to  collect  a  sample  of  some  stated  size,  analyze 
the  data,  and  if  the  objectives  of  the  survey  are  not  met, 
to  increase  the  size  of  the  sample  by  adding  to  it.   This 
assumes  that  the  sampling  procedure  is  replicable  and  that 
the  characteristics  measured  are  not  time  dependent  over 
the  course  of  the  procedure. 

Sample  Selection 

Sample  selection  is  a  term  describing  the  method  of 
choosing  the  sampled  elements  from  the  total  population. 
It  takes  various  forms. 

Simple  Random  Sample.   This  is  the  most  basic  and 
least  complicated  selection  procedure.   It  requires  three 
conditions;  that  the  population  to  be  sampled  be  clearly 
defined,  that  each  element  in  this  population  be  uniquely 
identified,  and  that  the  population  elements  are  statistic- 
ally independent.   Given  these  three  conditions,  a  necessary 
variance  can  be  estimated,  a  sample  size  determined,  that 
sample  be  randomly  drawn  from  the  total  of  the  uniquely 
identified  population  elements,  the  characteristics  of  the 
sample  measured,  and  these  measurements  inferred  to  the 
population  as  a  whole. 

The  procedure  of  random  drawing  is  accomplished  by 
numbering  each  of  the  uniquely  identified  population 
elements  and  then  drawing  the  sample,  by  number,  using  a 
table  of  random  numbers. 


96 


Stratified  Simple  Random  Sample.   Sometimes  the  popula- 
tion considered  is  already  classified  according  to  some 
principle  significant  to  the  projected  analysis.   Examples 
may  be  sex  and  age  of  human  beings,  buildings  by  age, 
neighborhoods  by  size,  families  by  automobile  ownership,  etc, 
If  the  uniquely  identified  population  elements  can  be 
assembled  into  strata  homogeneous  with  respect  to  some  known 
characteristic,  simple  random  samples  can  be  drawn  from 
within  the  stratum  and  the  resulting  variance  can  be  then 
considered  in  two  parts  -  that  resulting  from  sampling 
within  the  stratum  and  that  between  strata.   If  the 
stratification  is  indeed  significant  to  the  analysis, 
moderate  variance  reductions  can  be  expected. 

There  are  several  types  of  stratified  simple  random 
sampling.   It  may  be  desirable  to  vary  the  simple  random 
samp] e  size  from  stratum  to  stratum,  or,  conversely,  to  hold 
the  simple  random  sample  size  constant.   It  may  also  be 
desirable  to  allocate  parts  of  the  sample  size  to  various 
strata  in  proportion  to  the  anticipated  variance  in  each 
stratum.   This  is  called  optimum  allocation. 

Systematic  Sample  and  Stratified  Systematic  Sample. 
A  more  practical  selection  method  may  be  substituted  for  the 
random  selection  described  in  the  two  methods  above.   This 
is  calLed  systematic  sampling  or  stratified  systematic 
sampling  as  appropriate  and  is  obtained  by  determining  the 
overall  sampling  fraction  or  the  various  strata  sampling 
fractions.   If  this  fraction  is  1/100  then  100  is  the 
selection  interval.   A  random  start  is  established,  say  37 
and  the  sample  selected  is  then  elements  37,  137,  237,  337, 
etc.   This  method  obviates  the  administrative  complications 
that  arise  from  using  a  table  of  random  numbers  to  select 
every  element,  except,  of  course,  the  first  element. 

Systematic  selection  is  a  replacement  for  random 
selection,  and,  assuming  no  periodicity  or  linear  trends  in 
the  population  characteristics,  may  be  freely  used  in 
either  simple  sampling  or  stratified  sampling. 


97 


Cluster  Sampling.   Homogeneity  within  strata  has  been 
described  as  a  tool  to  reduce  variance.   Heterogeneity  can 
be  used  also  in  the  design  of  a  sample.   If  it  is  suspected 
that,  for  the  purposes  of  a  particular  survey,  groups  of 
population  elements  can  be  formed  having  the  population 
characteristics  essentially  the  same  as  those  identified 
in  random  or  systematic  sampling,  then  the  physical  or 
analytical  availability  of  these  groups  may  make  them 
economically  preferrable  to  a  random  or  systematic  sample. 
This  is  called  cluster  sampling.   The  cluster  basis  can  be 
analytic  but  is  most  often  physical  such  as  school  rooms  or 
city  blocks.   Clusters  can  be  nested  within  clusters  which 
are,  in  turn,  within  clusters.   This  is  called  multistage 
cluster  sampling.   Area  sampling  is  a  special  form  of 
multistage  cluster  sampling  where  the  clusters  are  successive 
geographic  units.   Cluster  sampling  can  be  used  with  simple 
random  or  systematic  sampling  and  stratefied  sampling  to 
create  complex  sample  designs. 

Error 

The  many  types  of  error  that  enter  a  survey  can  be 
broadly  classified  into  sampling  errors  and  non-sampling 
errors.   Non-sampling  errors  are  those  which  would  occur 
whether  a  sample  is  collected  or  a  total  enumeration  made. 
An  example  would  be  trying  to  evaluate  some  characteristic 
of  the  population  as  a  whole  via  a  telephone  interview. 
Obviously  people  who  do  not  subscribe  to  telephone  service 
would  be  ommitted.   Further,  this  ommission  would  occur 
regardless  of  the  method  of  survey;  i.e.,  sample  or  total 
enumeration . 

Sampling  errors  arise  out  of  the  general  failure  of 
the  sample  design  or  a  lack  of  randomness  where  necessary. 

Deming  (1950)  provides  a  classic  list  of  sampling 
and  non-sampling  errors.   He  terms  the  latter  procedural 
biases.   Some  of  these  include  the  failure  of  the 


98 


questionnaire,  the  failure  of  the  method  of  canvass,  bias 
arising  from  non-response  or  late  returns,  bias  arising 
from  the  interviewer,  careless  field  procedure,  and  careless 
editing,  coding  and  interpretation  of  the  results. 

Deming ' s  illustration  of  the  triangular  relationship 
between  non-sampling  errors  and  sampling  errors  is  shown  in 
Figure  III-3.   The  conceptual  use  of  this  figure  is  most 
helpful  in  determining  the  proper  allocation  of  resources 
to  the  sampling  technique. 

In  some  types  of  simple  industrial  inspection,  non- 
sampling  errors  may  be  relatively  small  and  resources  should 
lie  dedicated  to  the  reduction  of  sampling  error.   In  much 
of  the  survey  work  associated  with  urban  planning,  the 
converse  is  probably  true. 

Accordingly,  it  is  not  uncommon  for  urban  planning 
sampling  procedure  to  incorporate  a  preliminary  test  of  the 
survey,  usually  called  a  pilot  study.   This  will  serve  to 
check  the  design  parameters  such  as  sample  size,  sample 
selection,  procedural  bias,  interviewer  effects  and 
variance . 

Accuracy  and  Precision 
Precision  measures  sampling  error.   Accuracy  measures 
total  error,  i.e.,  both  sampling  and  non-sampling  error. 
A  precise  design  has  a  small  sampling  error  and  an  accurate 
design  has  a  small  non-sampling  error  as  well.   In  Figure 
III-4,  design  A  is  typical  of  say,  a  poorly  designed  mail 
questionnaire  of  a  sample  too  small  to  measure  a  character- 
istic of  the  population.   In  design  B,  the  sample  size  may 
have  been  expanded  and  stratified  and  the  questionnaire  left 
unchanged.   In  design  C,  the  original  sample  design  remained 
the  same,  but  the  questionnaire  was  redesigned  to  remove 
bias,  nonresponses  were  pursued,  and  editing  and  coding 
procedures  were  strengthened.   Design  D,  of  course,  reduces 
both  the  sampling  and  non-sampling  errors. 


99 


SAMPLING      ERROR 


ABC     represents     some     given     error    representation     with     RMSE  =  AB 
RMSE  =  AD    (a    decrease     in     root    mean    square     error)    can    be 
achieved     by  : 

I    an    increase    in    sampling     error    if    the    concurrent     decrease 
in    non-sampling    error    is    great     enough     (AEF)j 

2.  an    increase    in    non-sampling    error    if    the   concurrent    decrease 
in    sampling     error    is    great     enough     (AGH)> 

3.  or,   of     course,    a    decrease    in     both    types     of    error    (AKJ). 


Figure  III-3 
The  Relationship  Eetween  Sampling  and  Non- samp ling  Error' 


100 


neither    precise 
nor     accurate 


precise  ,    but 
not    accurate 


DESIGN      B 


accurate  ,  but 
not     precise 


DESIGN      C 


both     precise 
and    accurate 


DESIGN     D 


Figure  III-4 
The  Relationship  Between  Accuracy  and  Precision 


101 


Urban  Information  Systems 

As  demonstrated  by  the  previous  sections  of  this  work, 
the  collection  and  use  of  urban  information  is  complex,  time 
consuming  and  expensive.   One  is  tempted  to  serach  for  short 
cuts  in  the  hope  of  possibly  finding  the  Holy  Grail,  the 
information  already  collected  and  available  for  planning. 

Every  urban  area  has  an  urban  information  system. 
The  complexity  of  these  systems  ranges  from  the  very  simple 
to  the  most  sophisticated.   The  simple  systems  are  typically 
found  in  the  files  of  municipal  service  agencies  of  small 
towns.   Examples  are  a  list  of  dwelling  units  in  a  mail 
route,  the  fire  chief's  knowledge  of  fire  main  locations,  a 
list  of  voters,  familial  information  collected  with  school 
enrollment  and  church  affiliation. 

At  the  other  extreme,  urban  information  systems 
conceptually  exist  with  complex  models  and  data  manipulations 
which  measure  real  time  changes  in  the  urban  area  and  take 
administrative  action  on  these  changes.   An  example  might 
be  the  occurance  of  the  relocating  of  a  family  in  town. 
Here  the  information  system  might  gather  demographic  data 
about  the  family,  match  the  family  to  the  new  rented  or 
owned  parcel  of  land  and  dwelling  unit,  establish  utility 
service  and  monitor  consumption  and  bill,  assign  the  children 
to  schools  and  measure  their  impact  on  the  school  program, 
measure  the  new  transportation  service  demands  and  their 
impact  on  the  transportation  system,  and  a  whole  host  of 
other  planning  and  administrative  decisions.   Perhaps  the 
relocation  of  this  family  will  automatically  program  the 
construction  of  a  new  elementary  classroom,  the  hiring  of 
an  additional  teacher,  the  reallocation  of  children  to 
classes,  and  the  resultant  changes  in  the  tax  structure. 

The  planner  is  faced  with  two  related  problems  in 
urban  information.   One  is  to  search  the  already  existing 
system,  whether  simple  or  sophisticated,  for  his  data  needs. 


102 


The  related  problem  is  to  consider  the  need  for  a  system 
more  sophisticated  than  that  in  existence.   Some  of  the 
concepts  which  must  be  considered  in  upgrading  the  system's 
level  of  sophistication  are  addressed  here  to  conclude  this 
subject  of  the  inventory  phase  of  the  urban  planning  process. 
Much  of  the  information  on  this  subject  which  follows  was 
compiled  from  Maxman  (1968). 

Information  Hierarchy 
The  conceptual  formulation  of  an  information  theory 
has  resulted  in  identifying  a  three  step  hierarchy  of 
information  (Horwood,  1964).   The  first  stage  of  informa- 
tion is  known  as  raw  data  and  it  consists  of  numbers,  symbols, 
lists,  etc.,  generally  on  paper  and  not  yet  organized  into 
a  machine  record.   When  this  information  is  machine  proces- 
sable,  it  is  known  as  banked  data,  the  second  stage  of  the 
hierarchy.   When  this  banked  data  is  able  to  be  manipulated 
such  as  in  updating,  searching  and  retrieval  operations  it 
is  termed  a  data  library. 

Levels  of  System  Sophistication 
There  are  likewise  three  general  levels  of  system 
sophistication.   The  first  and  most  basic  only  tabulates 
data.   The  second  level  will  contain  certain  specialized 
models  which  may,  for  instance,  compare  two  parameters  to 
form  a  ratio  which  may  be  considered  valuable.   The  highest 
level  of  system  sophistication  describes  that  system  that 
can  both  monitor  and  simulate  the  real  world  (Hamilton,  1964). 

System  Development 
The  choices  of  levels  of  system  sophistication  and 
hierarchy  of  information  to  be  incorporated  into  an  urban 
information  system  are  based  upon  a  number  of  criteria. 
Some  of  these  are:   the  purpose  of  the  information,  the 
essentiality  of  the  information,  the  cost  of  the  information, 


103 


the  maintainability  of  the  information,  the  ease  of 
reduction  and  aggregation  of  the  information,  the  applic- 
ability of  the  information  to  the  users'  end  needs,  the 
available  hardware  and  software,  and  the  political  climate 
surrounding  the  establishment  of  the  system  (Hamilton,  1964). 

These  criteria  are  actually  breakdowns  of  two  essential 
considerations,  the  modules  of  collection  and  the  methods 
of  aggregation.   In  urban  planning,  the  most  commonly  used 
module  of  collection  is  the  land  parcel.   This  makes  good 
sense  as  urban  studies  are  generally  defined  in  place  over 
the  passage  of  time  and  it  is  the  basic  premise  of  urban 
planning  that  the  physical  arrangement  of  land  uses  has 
far  reaching  social  and  economic  implications.   Returning 
to  Figure  III-2,  the  land  parcel  provides  information 
according  to  the  logic  diagrammed  in  Figure  III-5.   Thus, 
demographic,  social  and  economic  data  are  tied  to  the  land 
parcel . 

Since  urban   studies  are  located  in  space,  the  land 
parcel  is  also  most  valuable  as  a  means  of  aggregation. 
With  proper  coding  and  programming,  land  parcels  can  be 
logically  aggregated  into  blocks,  tracts,  zones,  areas, 
and  the  political  city  as  a  whole.   To  maintain  flexibility 
in  this  aggregation,  the  land  parcel  should  be  the  lowest 
level  of  aggregation  collected.   Unfortunately,  the  informa- 
tion used  in  urban  planning  is  sometimes  private  in  nature 
and  safeguards  must  be  established  against  unauthorized 
disclosure  of  this  information.   Thus,  the  decennial  census 
data  is  only  published  in  aggregation  sufficient  to  mask 
individual  identification  and  its  use  is  severely  constrained 
in  this  respect.   As  a  general  rule,  any  data  collected  as 
an  investment  for  future  use  would  be  in  the  least  aggre- 
gated form  possible.   This  principle  differs  from  the  highly 
utilitarian  guidelines  previously  set  forth  for  data 
collection  for  a  specific  planning  process.   For  a  specific 
process,  the  end  use  is  known  and  it  is  more  economical  to 


104 


LAND 
INFORMATION 


STREET 


YES 


STREET 
INFORMATION 


'ENDX 


NO 


DWELLING     UNIT 
INFORMATION 


'END 


YES 


STRUCTURE 


YES 


DWELLING      UNIT 


NO 


NO 


STRUCTURAL     \ 
INFORMATION      J 


'NON-DWELLING  UNIT> 
INFORMATION 


'ENDN 


'END 


Figure   III-5 
Logic   Diagram  for  Coding   Information   to  Land   Parcel 


105 


use  the  highest  aggregation  of  data  feasible  for  two  reasons; 
it  is  generally  easier  to  obtain,  and  it  facilitates  analysis 
and  forecasting  in  the  aggregate  with  attendant  error 
reduction.   But,  if  the  end  use  of  the  data  is  not  known, 
any  aggregation  is  a  constraint  that  may  render  the  data 
useless . 

As  an  example,  consider  a  data  item  measuring  popula- 
tion.  Population  per  traffic  zone  is  highly  aggregated 
and  probably  useful  enough  for  macro  transportation  plans. 
It  would  be  unwise,  however,  to  collect  population  data  in 
this  aggregation  for  an  urban  information  system.   It  would 
not  disclose,  for  instance,  the  numbers  and  ages  of 
children  in  a  school  district  should  that  information  be 
desired  at  a  later  date.   Accordingly,  population  informa- 
tion should  probably  be  collected  by  age  and  sex  for  each 
dwelling  unit.   Then  any  information  necessary  could  be 
extracted  from  the  system  in  any  aggregation  deemed 
appropriate.   It  is  this  need  for  future  flexibility  that 
makes  the  design  of  an  urban  information  system  so  complex. 

Summary 
Urban  information  systems  are  expensive  undertakings 
which  accrue  benefits  only  in  the  future.   As  such  they 
comprise  very  real  investments  and  must  be  judged  as  such. 
In  these  times,  when  so  many  public  agencies  and  municipal 
authorities  have  great  difficulty  just  meeting  their  operating 
expenses,  the  investment  in  an  urban  information  system  is 
difficult  to  justify.   When  it  does  occur,  however,  it 
signals  a  very  real  committment  by  that  agency  or  authority 
to  the  philosophy  of  a  continuing  planning  process. 

Notes 
1.   After  W.  E.    Deming,  Some  Theory  of  Sampling,  p.  129. 


106 


CHAPTER  IV 
ANALYSIS 


In  the  ideal  case  of  the  conceptual  model  of  planning 
activity,  the  analysis  phase  is  something  of  a  watershed. 
The  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency  have 
been  established  and  endorsed  by  all  concerned.   The  planning 
staff  is  organized  and  funded  and  is  a  viable  entity.   The 
drudgery  of  data  collection  is  over  and  the  planner  now  has 
everything  at  his  disposal  to  plan.   He  has  entered  his 
element . 

The  rub  is  that  in  all  too  many  cases,  this  element 
is  unfriendly  if  not  openly  hostile.   Instead  of  rigorous 
theory  to  guide  him,  he  finds  vague  hypotheses.   In  the 
place  of  certainty  he  finds  conjecture.   Little  seems 
universal,  much  is  unique.   Worse,  some  things  claimed  sure 
seem  doubtful . 

That  this  situation  may  be  typical  of  a  new  discipline 
such  as  urban  planning  offers  little  consolation.   The 
planner  must  face  the  prospect  of  evolving  nearly  ad  hoc 
theories  of  urban  behavior  before  he  can  begin  to  apply 
them.   However  he  does  have  an  arsenal  of  potent  tools  with 
which  to  work. 

This  chapter  investigates  some  of  those  tools  within 
the  framework  of  the  analysis  phase  of  the  planning  process. 
Analysis  is  defined  as  the  separating  or  breaking  up  of  the 
whole  into  its  parts  with  an  examination  of  these  parts 
to  find  out  their  nature,  proportion,  function  and  inter- 
relationship.  It  implies  the  reverse,  synthesis,  as  well. 
Analysis  can  and  does  occur  with  data  at  any  point  in  time 
or  over  time.   Historic  data  can  be  analyzed.   Contemporary 


107 


data  can  be  analyzed  and  future  data  can  be  analyzed.   The 
only  distinction  made  in  this  work  is  that  the  actual  fore- 
casting of  future  data  will  be  treated  in  the  next  chapter 
because,  in  practice,  it  follows  at  least  the  analysis  of 
contemporary  data. 

Harris  (1966)  has  correctly  pointed  out  that  urban 
planning  analyses  tend  to  follow  the  classical  scientific 
method;  induction,  generalization,  deduction,  testing. 
While  all  these  elements  may  not  be  present  in  a  single 
plan,  the  distinction  has  its  use. 

Confronted  with  an  array  of  data,  the  planner  arranges 
the  array  into  patterns.   This  pattern  arrangement  may  come 
about  as  a  result  of  intuitive  feeling  on  the  part  of  the 
planner,  or  as  a  result  of  his  prior  experience.   From  these 
patterns  he  generalizes  their  structural,  spatial,  temporal 
and  functional  relationships.   These  relationships  may  be 
based  on  a  hypothesis  of  cause  and  effect,  probability,  or 
simply  correlation.   The  planner  analyzes  from  the  specific 
conditions  presented  by  the  data  to  some  generalities 
regarding  their  behavior.   He  thus  induces  theory.   This 
theory  is  then  applied  to  other  sets  of  data,  perhaps 
historical,  perhaps  from  another  planning  effort,  or  perhaps 
from  his  own  contemporary  data  (a  subset  not  considered  in 
the  original  induction).   The  behavior  of  the  test  data  is 
deduced  and  then  matched  against  actual  observation.   If 
the  deduced  behavior  and  the  observed  behavior  are  different, 
the  theory  must  then  be  modified.   If  these  behaviors  are 
the  same,  the  theory  is  not  disproved  and  then  used  to 
describe  the  behavior  of  forecasted  data. 

As  Harris  notes,  this  distinction  between  induction 
and  deduction  is  quite  commonly  blurred.   Usually,  induction 
begins  with  some  preconception  of  theory.   This  preconception 
tends  to  identify  the  behavior  patterns  likely  to  occur. 
Also,  when  the  deduced  and  observed  behavior  patterns  differ, 
the  planner  returns  to  an  inductive  process  to  try  to 
reformulate  a  theory. 


108 


The  fact  that  these  preconceptions  occur  is  not 
necessarily  alarming.   Based  upon  experience  or  insight, 
they  may  suggest  theory  that  indeed  proves  to  be  valid. 
Further,  these  preconceptions  are  the  only  way  to  break 
the  otherwise  circular  argument  advanced  in  this  work  that 
one  must  design  his  analysis  to  see  what  data  are  needed, 
hut  one  must  investigate  data  patterns  to  design  a  proper 
analysis . 

Implicit  in  analysis  is  a  normative/substantive 
comparison.   The  analysis  may  demonstrate  a  cause  for  each 
effect,  a  probable  cause  for  each  effect  or  merely  a 
correlation  of  effects  or  patterns.   Some  judgement  needs 
to  be  made  in  any  case  as  to  the  desirability  of  these 
effects.   This  judgement  is  facilitated  by  a  comparison  of 
that  which  is,  with  that  which  should  be;  or,  for  the  future, 
that  which  probably  will  be,  with  that  which  probahly  should 
he.   The  philosophy  and  mechanics  of  these  comparisons  for 
design  evaluation  are  discussed  in  Chapter  VII,  but  this 
phase  of  the  planning  process  and  those  following  are  rife 
with  evaluative  judgements  and  some  aspects  of  this  need 
be  opened  here. 

Procedurally,  the  planner  must  take  the  observed 
contemporary  data  patterns,  perhaps  generalized  into  theory, 
and  compare  them  to  some  normative  data  patterns  or  theory. 
This  comparison  of  contemporary  patterns  to  contemporary 
standards  yields  contemporary  excesses,  deficiencies,  faults 
or  aberrations  which  may  then  be  deemed  worthy  to  be  met 
by  short  range  corrective  plans.   The  same  holds  true  for 
selected  times  in  the  future.   Key  variables  are  forecasted, 
behavior  patterns  deduced,  and  these  patterns  are  compared 
to  forecasted  future  standards.   At  each  temporal  stage  in 
the  analysis,  of  course,  previously  injected  plans  have  their 
effects.   Plans  are  then  conceived  to  shape  and  serve  the 
deduced  patterns. 


109 


There  remains  the  question  of  the  source  of  these 
standards.   First  and  foremost  they  are  based  on  the  goals 
and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency.   The  inter- 
pretation and  refinement  of  these  goals  and  objectives  for 
a  specific  planning  purpose  has  already  been  made  in  the 
organization  phase  of  the  process.   It  remains  for  the 
planner,  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  committees 
structured  in  the  organization  phase,  to  further  refine 
these  planning  objectives  into  planning  factors. 

These  planning  factors  are  discrete,  measureable 
criteria  inferred  from  the  objectives  of  the  plan.   As  an 
example,  suppose  that  "to  provide  for  adequate  housing  for 
all  residents"  was  a  plan  objective.   It  might  be  profession- 
ally inferred  that  minimum  occupancy  standards  should 
include  a  measure  of  floor  space  per  occupant.   This  planning 
factor  may  he  then  refined  to  mean  2  50  square  feet  today, 
2  75  square  feet  five  years  from  now,  300  square  feet  ten 
years  from  now,  and  so  forth. 

A  collection  of  these  planning  factors  describes  a 
level  of  service  of  a  particular  entity.   The  planning 
design  effort  then  centers  around  correcting  contemporary 
deficient  levels  of  service,  forecasting  future  standard 
levels  of  service  and  then  meeting  these  future  levels  in 
future  plans. 

The  Use  of  Models 

All  the  concepts,  preconcepts ,  theories,  patterns, 
and  levels  of  service  so  far  referred  to  can  be  generically 
called  models.   These  models  are  the  tools  of  planning 
analysis. 

Lowry  (1965)  has  noted  that  models  can  be  classified 
as  to  their  function.   Descriptive  models  imitate  some 
feature  of  the  real  world  as  it  is  observed.   An  urban 
descriptive  model  could  possibly  reduce  the  complex  structure 
of  a  city  to  a  set  of  relationships  both  coherent  and 


110 


rigorous.   Such  a  model  would  show  the  interaction  of  the 
social,  economic,  political  and  physical  environments  of 
the  city.   But,  by  definition,  such  models  will  not  help 
with  information  about  the  future  or  aid  in  the  evaluation 
of  alternatives. 

If  one  adds  to  a  descriptive  model  the  notions  of 
process  and  causality,  the  result  is  a  predictive  model. 
The  planner  generally  begins  with  a  desired  output  and  tries 
to  relate  it  to  the  available  input.   The  induction- 
deduction  process  is  followed  with  the  result  that  future 
input  (plans  and  resources)  is  acted  upon  by  future  relation- 
ships (theory)  yielding  future  output  (the  meeting  of  fore- 
casted levels  of  service). 

If  the  planner  has  more  than  one  set  of  future  inputs, 
as  is  likely  to  be  the  case,  and  wishes  to  test  each  set 
of  future  outputs  seeking  the  most  utile,  he  may  devise 
a  planning  model.   This  is  the  most  complex  model  in  the 
Lowry  scheme  and  the  process  includes  the  specification  of 
alternatives,  the  prediction  of  the  consequences  of  each 
alternative,  and  the  rating/ranking  of  these  consequences 
as  to  how  well  they  fulfill  specified  goal  statements. 

The  Strategy  and  Tactics  of  Modeling 
Lowry' s  classification  suggests  that  there  may  exist 
a  strategy  of  modeling.   This  strategy  can  be  phrased  as 
"employing  appropriate  techniques  with  a  sense  of  style." 
There  are  two  key  concepts.   Appropriateness  suggests  that 
which  is  right  for  the  purpose  and  a  proper  fit.   Each 
modeling  effort  must  then  be  tied  to  a  purpose,  and  fit 
both  the  specific  purpose  and  auxiliary  conditions  such  as 
quality  of  data  and  resources  available.   When  any  of  these 
conditions  is  emphasized  more  or  less  than  the  others, 
dysfunction  occurs.   Examples  of  dysfunction  include  a 
modeling  effort  too  simple  by  assumption  for  the  quality  of 
data  available;  the  converse;  too  little  or  too  much  relative 


Ill 


allocation  of  resources  to  the  data  collection  and  the 
modeling  effort;  and  the  generation  of  a  predictive  model 
based  upon  data  which  can  only  be  poorly  forecasted. 

A  sense  of  style  refers  to  the  artfullness  of  applica- 
tion.  II  is  very  closely  tied  to  design  and  creativity  and 
is  the  specific  or  characteristic  manner  of  expression, 
execution  and  construction  of  the  model.   A  sense  of  style, 
like  appropriateness,  only  gains  its  meaning  in  application. 

Contributing  to  this  modeling  strategy  is  a  collection 
of  tactics.   One  set  of  these  tactics  is  that  group  of 
writings  which  deal  with  the  choice  between  dichotomous 
facets  of  modeling.   Harris  (1967)  offers  a  list  of  these 
facets  which  includes  the  distinctions  between  models  that 
are:   descriptive  versus  analytic,  holistic  versus  partial, 
macro  versus  micro,  and  static  versus  dynamic. 

The  descriptive  versus  analytic  distinction  is  the 
same  as  that  between  inductive  and  deductive  reasoning. 
This  has  already  been  explored  and  it  is  only  necessary  to 
reiterate  that  each  has  its  use  in  urban  planning. 

The  holistic  versus  partial  distinction  is  most 
manifest  in  the  separation  of  urban  planning  practice  and 
urban  planning  research.   The  practitioner  is  forced  to  take 
as  holistic  a  view  as  possible  whereas  the  researcher  can 
afford  the  luxury  of  holding  the  balance  of  the  urban 
environment  constant  while  he  investigates  but  one  aspect 
of  it.   The  distinction  blurs  as  holistic  views  come  to  be 
aggregations  of  partial  views.   The  substantive  scope  axis 
of  the  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity  was  devised 
to  define  the  hierarchy  of  various  types  of  urban  plans. 
The  distinctions  along  that  axis  came  closest  to  mirroring 
the  distinctions  among  various  degrees  of  holistic  and 
partial  analyses. 

Harris  holds  that  the  macro  versus  micro  distinction 
centers  around  the  level  of  aggregation  concept.  This  was 
first  addressed  in  the  inventory  phase  of  the  planning 


112 


process  where  it  was  noted  that  data  should  be  collected 
on  as  disaggregated  a  basis  as  possible.   The  basis  of  this 
tactical  distinction  is,  however,  that  most  of  the  variables 
in  urban  planning  only  gain  statistical  meaning  in  aggrega- 
tion.  Thus  we  are  interested  in  total  street  utilization, 
park  space  per  neighborhood,  sales  in  the  CBD,  school  age 
population,  etc.,  but  these  impacts  are  cumulative  over 
discrete  individuals,  families,  businesses  and  institutions. 
Micro  analyses  are  often  necessary  to  assess  these  individual 
impacts  even  though  a  macro  analysis  may  show  the  cumulative 
effect  of  some  change. 

The  static  versus  dynamic  distinction  is  largely 
procedural.   There  is  no  philosophic  difficulty  in  recogniz- 
ing that  urban  systems  are  dynamic  and  should  be  so  modeled. 
The  difficulty  is,  of  course,  a  computational  one.   For 
ease  of  conceptualization  and  manipulation,  urban  models 
are  generally  structured  in  static  equilibrium.   An 
approximation  to  dynamics  is  sometimes  made  through  recur- 
sive manipulation. 

Another  class  of  tactics  associated  with  model  building 
deals  with  the  relative  propagation  of  error  through  possible 
model  forms.   Alonso  (1968)  suggests  that  the  error  pro- 
pagated and  amplified  by  "long  chains  of  argument"  may  be 
so  great  as  to  obviate  the  benefit  of  these  complex  models. 
In  this  case,  the  aggregation  or  complementary  use  of 
simpler  models  may  yield  better  results.   As  an  extension  of 
the  strategy  of  appropriateness,  poor  quality  data  is 
probably  best  used  in  simple  models.   Further,  error  cumulates 
differently  with  different  mathematical  techniques.   Alonso 
demonstrates  that  addition  is  the  least  dangerous  of  the 
mathematical  operations.   If  one  cannot  add,  multiplication 
or  division  are  preferable  to  subtraction  or  raising 
variables  to  powers. 

Yet  another  class  of  modeling  tactics  are  largely 
situational  in  context.   Bolan  (1970)  clearly  rejects  the 


113 


notion  that  models  which  are  more  clever,  more  complex,  and 
which  contain  more  facts  are  per  eg  necessarily  superior 
Lo  Lhose  with  less  such  Ingredients.   He  argues  that  the 
long  range  master  planning  predisposition  of  planners  may 
make  them  too  Utopian  in  method  and  philosophy  to  model  short 
range  problems.   Models  must  take  into  consideration 
political  realities  as  well  as  technical  bases.   The  power 
and  capacity  of  the  planning  agency,  the  government  as  a 
whole,  and  the  political  process  must  be  a  part  of  the 
modeling  effort.   Fact  should  be  distinguished  from  value 
judgments  and  further,  there  is  a  question  of  value  to 
whom.   Effects  need  be  disaggregated  and  the  diversity  of 
value  existent  in  society  should  be  modeled,  lest  the 
planning  decisions  resulting  therefrom  force  homogeneity 
where  it  is  neither  warranted  nor  wanted.   Further,  models 
should  have  relevant  and  real  meaning  to  the  client  constitu- 
ency in  their  planning  situation.   Analyses  should  answer 
questions  that  are  utile,  not  questions  that  have  not  been 
asked . 

An  Example 

That  modeling  should  be  at  least  as  much  art  as  science 
is  apparent.   Whether  it  be  called  creative  technology  or 
technologic  creativity  is  a  matter  of  indifference  as  long 
as  both  elements  are  present.   The  process  occurs  in  the 
analysis  phase  of  the  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity. 

Consider  Figure  IV-1.   Within  the  model  this  figure 
shows  the  organization,  inventory  and  analysis  of  that 
planning  effort  which  is  defined  along  the  substantive  scope 
axis  as  statewide  (origin)  to  state  parks  (destinations). 
Illustrated  are  two  analytical  methods,  typical  of  the  many 
that  could  be  conceived  based  upon  the  same  organization 
and  inventory. 

Schulman  (1964)  designed  a  model  of  statewide  state 
park  recreational  travel  based  upon  the  gravity  model . 


114 


1        i  \  i 


0) 

u 

3 

00 


■PROCEDURAL 


SCOPE 


52  | 

<  UJ 


s-l 


o> 

Vj 
<J 

CD 
<X 

1) 

ft 

0) 
4J 

U 

in 


a 
u 
a 

QJ 

U 

C 
o 

CJ 

01 

H 


115 


R. 

J 


T. .  =  T. 


R. 
J 


j-i      ^lM 


where 


T..  =  the  number  of  automobile  trips  from  residential 

area  j  to  recreational  area  i, 
T.   =  the  total  number  of  automobile  trips  attracted 
to  recreational  area  i  from  all  residential 
areas , 
D. .  =  the  road  distance  in  miles  between  residential 
area  i  and  recreational  area  j , 
and   R.   =  the  number  of  recreational  trips  to  all  recrea- 
tional areas  generated  from  residential  area  j. 
Matthias  (1967),  working  with  a  similar  problem, 
designed  two  models,  one  for  travel  to  a  state  park  when 
there  was  no  intervening  state  park,  and  one  for  travel 
when  an  intervention  occurred. 
For  the  closest  park, 

Y  =  338e"0,379  x' 

and  for  an  intervening  park, 

Y  -  129e-°-488  x> 

where : 

Y  =  annual  trips  from  all  origins  per  1000  population, 
and   X  =  distance  to  the  recreational  area  in  question  in 
miles  from  the  population  centroids. 

Both  the  Schulman  gravity  model  and  Matthias  logarithmic 
model  are  inductive.   Schulman  apparently  had  a  strong  per- 
conception  that  his  data  would  fit  a  version  of  the  well 


116 


known  gravity  model.   Matthias1  work  may  have  been  more 
inductive  in  that  the  logarithmic  form  evolved  from  the 
data  patterns.   Both  researchers  then  proposed  using  their 
models  in  a  deductive  way  to  forecast  future  trip  generations. 

Neither  research  was  associated  with  an  ongoing  plan 
(such  as  to  provide  transportation  service  to  the  recreational 
areas)  so  there  was  no  need  to  evolve  and  compare  levels  of 
service.   Both  Schulman  and  Matthias  investigated  the  "level 
of  service,"  so  to  speak,  provided  by  already  existent  models 
of  this  type  of  behavior  and  felt  that  improvements  could 
be  made . 

The  models  are  both  descriptive  and  predictive. 
Matthias'  conceptual  basis  was  that  trips  will  be  generated 
according  to  distance  from  the  facility  with  due  account  for 
intervening  opportunities.   Schulman' s  conceptual  basis  was 
that  trips  will  be  generated  in  proportion  to  attractiveness 
and  in  inverse  proportion  to  difficulty,  resistance  or  "the 
friction  of  space".   Both  researchers  assumed  that  historical 
patterns  will  continue  which,  however  self-perpetuating,  is 
hard  to  argue  against,  at  least  in  the  near  future. 

Both  models  are  partial  rather  than  holistic  and  both 
are  macro  rather  than  micro.   In  addition,  both  models  are 
static  although  Schulman's  has  a  wider  conceptual  use  of 
equilibrium  as  it  considers  origins  as  well  as  destinations. 

Neither  researcher  needed  to  consider  the  political 
environment.   If  this  research  were  carried  out  in  an  applied 
situation,  this  environment  would  be  very  strong  as  has  many 
times  been  demonstrated  in  the  siting  of  major  recreational 
facilities  and  their  attendant  impacts. 

Outside  of  the  contextual  issue  of  a  plan,  it  would  be 
difficult  to  pass  judgement  on  the  adequacy  of  these  models. 
It  is  apparant ,  however,  that  they  model  only  a  small  part 
of  something  bigger.   In  addition,  they  are  each  composed 
of  parts  of  smaller  concepts  which  might  be  more  meaningful 
if  considered  separately.   The  philosophic  and  procedural 


117 


problems  of  "smallness",  "bigness"  and  the  feeling  that 
everything  may  influence  everything  else  leads  quite  naturally 
to  the  analysis  of  the  behavior  of  systems. 

The  Use  of  Systems  Analysis 

General  Systems  Theory 
Every  systems  analysis  paper  in  the  rich  field  of 
the  discipline  begins  with  a  definition  of  a  system. 
Definitions  are  elusive  at  times  and  this  is  perhaps  no 
better  exemplified  than  in  the  attempts  made  to  define 
a  system.   For  clarity  in  definition  one  usually  lists 
attributes  or  else  makes  some  attempt  to  classify  systems. 

Generally  speaking,  a  system  is  a  set  of  related 
elements.   Beer  (1959)  has  noted  that  these  elements  can 
be  simple  and  deterministic  as  in  a  window  catch.   They 
can  be  complex  and  deterministic  as  in  an  electronic 
computer.   The  elements  can  be  simple  and  stochastic  as  a 
set  of  coin  flips.   Or  they  can  be  complex  and  stochastic 
as  in  a  warehouse  inventory  system.   There  is  usually 
reserved  the  classification  of  exceedingly  complex  stochastic 
for  such  systems  as  the  United  States  Economy.   The  exceed- 
ingly complex  deterministic  system  set  is  generally  regarded 
as  empty. 

Systems  analysis  is  an  interdisciplinary  endeavor. 
To  prevent  this  endeavor  from  degenerating  into  undisciplined 
approaches,  some  integrating  structure  must  be  applied  to 
the  analysis.   Boulding  (1956)  suggests  that  between  the 
general  constructions  of  pure  mathematics  and  the  highly 
specialized  theories  of  specific  disciplines  there  exists 
a  general  systems  theory.   There  are  two  paths  to  this 
theory:   an  investigation  of  real  world  phenomena  that  them- 
selves cross  disciplines,  and  the  study  of  the  hierarchy  of 
systems  according  to  the  complexity  of  their  basic 
individuals . 


118 


There  are  several  real  world  cross  disciplinary 
phenomena.   The  birth-survival-death  syndrome  is  one  which, 
for  instance,  can  be  applied  to  a  living  organism,  an 
idea,  a  communication  bit,  an  element  in  a  queue  and  many 
otherwise  unrelated  occurrences.   Other  cross  disciplinary 
phenomena  include  behavior,  growth,  and  communication. 

The  second  path  to  general  systems  theory  could  be 
the  result  of  the  following  hierarchy  of  levels  in  systems 
analysis  offered  by  Boulding.   The  first  level  is  that  of 
statics.   Some  typical  systems  in  this  level  would  consist 
of  frameworks.   Geography  is  a  good  example.   The  second 
level  is  that  of  simple  dynamics.   Implied  here  is  regularity 
and  a  clockwork  is  a  good  example.   The  third  level  of 
systems  is  cybernetic  in  nature.   These  are  those  kept  in  a 
state  of  homeostasis  by  which  a  variable  is  kept  between 
two  limits  and  always  tending  to  equilibrium.   Blood  pressure 
is  a  good  example.   The  fourth  level  of  systems  constitutes 
those  that  are  open  or  self-maintaining  such  as  the  cell. 
This  level  is  usually  the  limit  of  theoretical  systems 
study.   The  fifth  level  is  genetic-societal  in  nature.   An 
example  of  this  is  the  society  of  cells  in  a  plant.   The 
sixth  level  is  that  of  self-awareness  and  is  characterized 
by  animals.   The  seventh  level  of  systems  is  that  of  self- 
awareness  coupled  with  abstraction  and  is  typified  by  man. 
The  eighth  level  is  that  of  human  social  organization  and 
it  is  the  level  of  the  nature  and  dimension  of  human  value 
systems.   An  understanding  of  this  level  would  benefit  the 
discipline  of  urban  planning.   The  ninth  and  highest  level 
of  systems  is  that  of  transcendence  and  the  systems  character- 
ized by  this  level  are  beyond  human  experience. 

Another  hierarchy  of  levels  of  systems  based  on  their 
degree  of  automaticity  has  been  offered  by  Kossiakoff  (1960). 
The  zero  order  system  replaces  no  human  energy  and  assumes 
no  control  function.   Examples  are  hand  tools.   The  first 
order  system  requires  energy  but  input  and  control  are 


119 


supplied  by  man.   Examples  include  bench  saws  and  pneumatic 
drills.   The  second  order  system  uses  mechanical  power 
exclusively  but  man  must  start-stop  the  system.   Examples 
are  radial  drills  and  pipe  threading  machines .   The  third 
order  systems  are  completely  self  acting  and  first  genera- 
tion automatics.   Examples  include  special  manufacturing 
machines  as  for  cigarettes,  lamp  bulbs  and  bottling.   The 
fourth  order  system  measures  its  own  performance  and  corrects 
to  a  standard.   Examples  are  oil  refineries,  generators  and 
regulators.   The  fifth  order  system  automatically  solves 
problems  according  to  pre-specif ied  control  equations.   An 
example  is  a  pre-programmed  computer  controlled  machine. 
The  sixth  order  system  is  that  of  system  solution  to  complex 
formal  logic  conditions.   Examples  include  telephone 
circuits  and  robots.   The  seventh  order  system  learns  from 
its  mistakes,  attempts  different  modes  of  operation  as 
necessary  and  improves  its  techniques.   Examples  include 
any  system  that  learns  by  experience.   The  eighth  order 
system  extrapolates  from  its  experience,  forms  modes  of 
operation  beyond  its  experience  and  performs  inductive 
reasoning.   Examples  include  systems  that  have  intuition. 
The  ninth  order  of  system  can  create  beyond  itself. 

Because  of  the  breadth  of  systems  analysis  and  because 
the  analysis  is  compounded  by  the  fact  that  systems  exist 
in  systems,  the  search  for  a  general  systems  theory  is 
probably  futile  in  terms  of  the  end  desired.   But  the 
ancillary  effects  of  this  search  yield  new  techniques  and 
perspectives,  the  value  of  which  cannot  be  denied. 

So  finally  we  are  forced  to  define  systems  analysis 
by  listing  its  characteristics.   Fundamental  among  these  is 
the  definition  of  the  problem  and  the  systematic  examination 
of  objectives  and  of  the  alternative  ways  of  achieving  these 
objectives.   Systems  analysis  often  is  iterative  in  nature, 
involving  formulation,  testing,  reformulation,  re-testing, 
etc.   Even  if  the  conclusion  of  the  process  is  that  there 


120 


is  no  preferred  alternative,  the  process  itself  is  often  of 
educational  value  to  the  decision   maker.   The  time  frame 
of  the  analysis  usually  extends  far  into  the  future  and  as 
such  is  often  fraught  with  uncertainty.   Often  there  exists 
the  possibility  of  catastrophic  outcomes  and  this  might 
preclude  the  use  of  simple  expected  value  models.   Sensitivity 
analysis  and  contingency  analysis  are  often  better  tools. 
Systems  analysis  usually  deals  with  problems  within  a  very 
broad  context.   Straight-forward  solutions  are  the  exceptions 
in  the  welter  of  variables  and  often  simulation  by  a  black 
box  is  required.   For  this  same  reason  many  systems  analyses 
are  neither  exhaustive  nor  entirely  quantitative.   As 
stressed  earlier,  this  does  not  necessarily  negate  their 
value . 

Despite  the  complexity  of  some  systems,  some  useful 
classifications  can  be  made  of  systems  in  terms  of  their 
analytical  properties.   The  first  distinction  that  is 
usually  made  is  between  natural  and  man-made  systems. 
Often  clues  to  behavior  of  systems  can  be  obtained  simply 
by  this  distinction  although  the  distinction  may  not  be 
easy  to  make.   Once  made,  there  exists  the  possibility  of 
applying  such  things  as  the  Newtonian  Laws  or  the  precepts 
of  the  behavioral  sciences  as  applicable  to  the  system  in 
question . 

There  exists  an  analytical  distinction  between  an 
open  and  a  closed  system.   Open  systems  exchange  materials, 
energies  or  information  with  their  environment.   A  closed 
system  operates  independently  of  environment.   Some  systems 
are  characterized  by  their  control  mechanisms.   An  open 
loop  system  is  one  which  once  activated  permits  no  further 
control.   A  closed  loop  system  permits  and  possibly  requires 
control.   Feedback  may  exist  in  either  system  but  when  it 
is  used  for  active  control  it  "closes  the  loop."  Yet 
another  distinction  usually  made  is  that  between  adaptive 
and  non-adaptive  systems.   Adaptive  systems  are  those  that 
possess  the  ability  to  react  to  their  environment  in  such 


121 


a  way  that  is  favorable  to  the  continued  operation  of  the 
system. 

Urban  Systems  Analysis 
Most  long  range  planning  decisions  are  reached  through 
the  use  of  the  decision  maker's  judgment  and  intuition. 
The  role  of  systems  analysis  in  this  process  is  the  same  as 
that  of  English,  arithmetic  and  science.   All  of  these  taken 
together  influence  and  hopefully  sharpen  the  judgment  and 
intuition  of  the  decision  maker.   In  almost  no  cases  can  the 
results  of  systems  analysis  be  taken  as  the  optimal  decision 
because  of  the  unquantif iable  nature  of  some  of  the 
variables . 

To  more  clearly  define  the  role  of  systems  analysis 
in  planning,  it  would  be  helpful  to  define  the  extremes  of 
opinion  regarding  it.   At  one  end  of  the  spectrum  there  are 
those  who  say  that  planning  is  entirely  Intuitive  and 
based  only  on  personal  judgment  and  experience.   At  the 
other  extreme  are  those  who  deny  the  role  of  anything  not 
measurable  in  numbers.   The  usual  outcome  of  either  of  these 
two  positions  is  either  a  model  so  simple  that  it  no  longer 
fairly  represents  the  system,  or  an  analysis  so  complex  that 
it  is  not  available  until  two  years  after  the  decision  had 
to  be  made.   Obviously  the  correct  range  of  endeavor  is 
between  these  two  limits. 

These  two  extremes  are  mirrored  in  the  applications  of 
systems  analysis  to  urban  problems.   Moore  (1966)  notes  that 
at  one  extreme  there  are  people  who  argue  that  there  is  a 
wide  range  of  problems  simply  begging  for  analysis  within 
the  urban  sphere.   These  people  maintain  that  there  is  a 
wealth  of  methodology  even  today  available  that  is  not  being 
properly  exploited  in  urbanology.   Other  people  dispair 
that  when  analyses  have  been  carried  out  they  have  not  been 
used  for  decision  making  due  to  institutional  and  political 
constraints . 


122 


The  two  positions  are  reconcilable.   Their  recon- 
ciliation involves  defining  the  characteristics  which  make 
certain  problems  suitable  for  the  application  of  systems 
analysis.   This  involves  a  consideration  of  such  issues 
as  welfare  economics  and  political  institutions,  public 
goods  vis-a-vis  private  goods,  incentives  in  the  operation 
of  specific  systems  and  the  political  feasibility  of  alterna- 
tives. 

The  provision  of  public  goods  generally  requires  the 
consideration  of  multiple  objectives.   Among  these  objectives 
are  to  use  resources  efficiently,  to  be  equitable,  to  benefit 
special  groups,  and  to  permit  scope  for  individual  initia- 
tive.  The  trade-offs  required  in  making  any  decision  here 
are  largely  subjective  in  nature  and  perhaps  best  left  to 
the  political  arena.   The  very  least  required  of  the  systems 
analyst  under  these  conditions  is  to  specify  alternative 
outcomes  for  different  criteria.   A  more  worthy  project  would 
be  to  formulate  a  clearly  superior  and  universal  set  of 
criteria. 

Moore  notes  that  another  problem  which  overlaps 
analysis  and  politics  rests  with  the  design  of  incentives. 
Too  often  such  items  as  rent  subsidies  and  tax  preferences 
are  not  self  adjusting  to  market  conditions  and  freeze  into 
the  economy. 

Surely  the  safest  problems  on  which  to  conduct  air 
tight  analyses  are  those  which  are  very  limited  in  extent. 
It  does  not  take  much  imagination  to  realize  that  these 
local  optimal  solutions  are  most  probably  suboptimizations 
in  the  next  system  and  so  on  ad  infinitum.   Even  with  that 
in  mind  we  can,  and  indeed  must,  suboptimize  at  higher  levels 
than  the  present . 

Even  so,  systems  analysis  will  never  reduce  urban 
planning  to  an  objective  process.   The  substance  of  such 
planning  is  too  subjective;  the  political  process  in  which 
planning  must  take  shape  is  too  subjective;  and  decisions 


123 


which  must  be  made  about  planning  are  made  with  bounded 
rationality,  constrained  by  such  humanist  qualities  as 
politics  and  ethics,  and,  on  a  lower  level,  by  human 
frailities  such  as  ignorance  and  prejudice. 

Nonetheless,  systems  analysis  brings  to  urban  planning 
some  significant  benefits.   First  and  foremost,  systems 
analysis  is  educative  as  to  both  the  plan  process  method- 
ology and  the  plan  itself.   It  ties  policy,  function, 
process,  programming  and  budgeting  together  in  one  analysis. 
It  may  disclose  wasted  resources,  clarify  issues,  reconcile 
conflicting  or  overlapping  objectives.   It  may  possibly 
introduce  a  sense  of  unity  to  otherwise  disparate  features 
or  seemingly  unrelated  aspects  of  the  plan  or  planning 
process . 

In  conclusion,  systems  analysis  is  not  merely  the  use 
of  complex  and  holistic  models.   Rather,  systems  analysis 
is  itself  a  precedural  model  of  a  method  of  approach  to 
problems.   It  involves  the  specification  of  objectives, 
the  systematic  search  for  alternative  methods  of  achieving 
these  objectives,  and  a  comparison  of  the  results  obtained 
through  the  use  of  each  alternative.   Models,  analytical 
methods,  and  scientific  procedures  are  used,  but  their 
assembly  and  application  are  strong  functions  of  intuition 
and  imagination. 

The  application  of  systems  analysis  to  the  urban 
planning  process  is  direct  and  obvious.   In  fact,  there  is 
no  major  difference  between  the  use  of  systems  analysis  in 
planning  and  the  planning  process  as  described  in  this  work. 
As  a  planner  moves  along  the  procedural  scope  axis  of  the 
conceptual  model  of  planning  activity,  he  executes  a 
systems  analysis.   Objectives  are  defined,  a  multidisci- 
plinary  organization  is  established,  data  are  collected, 
analyses  are  made  and  tested,  parameters  are  forecasted, 
urban  designs  are  conceived  and  evaluated,  the  most 


124 


optimal  is  selected  according  to  some  rational  process, 
and  the  selected  plan  is  implemented.   The  consummate 
planner  is  a  systems  analyst. 


125 


CHAPTER  V 
FORECASTING 

With  this  step  the  planner  begins  the  second  half  of 
the  planning  process.   Typically  more  than  half  the  resources 
available  to  him  have  been  expended,  but  this  should  cause 
no  great  concern  as  it  has  already  been  recognized  that  the 
inventory  phase  is  very  expensive  and  time  consuming  and 
this  has  been  taken  into  account  in  the  study  design. 

Since  plans  are  concerned  with  future  activities,  the 
analysis  of  contemporary  data  alone  does  not  normally 
provide  a  strong  rational  base  for  any  but  the  most  remedial 
or  short  range  plans.   The  planner  is  now  forced  to  manu- 
facture or  synthesize  a  future  inventory  for  the  develop- 
ment of  future  planning  demands.   There  is  a  very  clear 
clement  of  uncertainty  in  this  formulation.   This  forced, 
synthetic,  probabilistic  and  assumptive  "inventory"  for  the 
"analysis"  of  future  planning  conditions  is  called  a 
"forecast. " 

Sometimes  the  historical  inventory  already  taken 
yields  data  too  aged  to  accurately  portray  the  contempory 
conditions.   The  planner  must  not  only  then  forecast  into 
the  future,  he  must  also  forecast  from  the  past  into  the 
present.   This  latter  process  has  come  to  be  called 
"estimating"  and  this  convention  is  maintained  here. 

The  techniques  of  estimating  are  generally  the  same 
as  those  of  forecasting.   Usually,  however,  some  of  the 
inputs  to  the  estimating  procedure  are  presently  known  for 
certain,  thus  making  estimating  less  risky  than  forecasting. 
Before  considering  some  of  these  techniques  it  is  necessary 
to  examine  the  general  conceptual  bases  for  forecasting. 


126 


The  Forecasting  Model 
Consider  Figure  V-l.   It  represents  the  forecasting 
phase  in  the  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity. 

Substance 

Along  the  substantive  scope  axis  of  the  conceptual 
model  of  planning  activity,  forecasting  Ls  used  in  all  types 
of  planning.   However  because  of  the  risk  and  difficulty 
involved  in  forecasting  the  conditions  at  any  point  in  the 
future,  only  a  few  key  variables  are  forecast.   All  other 
future  conditions  are  then  inferred  from  these  forecasts. 

These  key  variables  are  characterized  by  two  general 
conditions.   They  are  forecastable  with  some  degree  of 
confidence  by  some  generally  accepted  and  rational  technique; 
and  they  are  so  closely  linked  to  other  desired  variables, 
either  by  cause  or  correlation,  that  the  behavior  of 
these  other  variables  can  be  inferred  from  the  behavior  of 
the  key  variables. 

Suppose  that  the  inventory  phase  of  the  planning 
process  yielded  the  data  conceptually  shown  in  Figure  V-2. 
Some,  of  the  data  are  current  and  some  are  three  years  old. 
Suppose  further  that  the  planning  process  was  designed  to 
provide  a  plan  for  five,  ten,  and  fifteen  years  into  the 
future.   Figure  V-2  shows  the  development  of:   first,  the 
estimate  of  the  present  condition;  second,  the  five  year 
forecasts  of  the  key  variables;  and  third,  the  expansion  of 
those  variables  by  inference  at  each  of  the  five  year 
points  of  investigation. 

The  present  or  past  measurement  of  all  the  variables 
is  the  inventory  phase  of  the  planning  process.   The 
establishment  of  the  inferences  for  this  contemporary  data 
(estimated  data  if  need  be)  is  accomplished  in  the  analysis 
phase.   Key  variables  are  then  forecasted  and  inferences 
drawn  from  them  as  to  the  behavior  of  other  variables  based 
upon  the  discovered  contemporary  inferences.   In  the  example 


127 


4-1 
•H 
> 

U 
U 

< 

c 

•H 
C 

C 


O 


D 
4-J 

CL 

0) 

CJ 

c 
o 
u 


CO 

PL, 

c 


•  PROCEDURAL 


SCOPE 


o 

z 

1- 

S3 

o 

c/) 

UJ 

_i 

cr 

< 

o 

z 

u. 

< 

z 
o 

N 

z 
< 

cr 
o 


to 

CO 

o 

CD 

o 

CD 
H 


128 


I      I 


-r_T. 
i      i 


II  i      i  ill 

66      $<)    66  6 


6  6(j)      QQ   66  66 


15     YEARS 


10     YEARS 


-r-r-t  — 
1      1 


._L 


INFERRED 


!7T/T~lvm 


6  666  6  6^666  6  6  v6 


5      YEARS 


! FORECASTED 


QOOo6oq66qQQOQOOO 


INVENTORY  8  ANALYSIS 


V    r 


PRESENT 


I      ! 


66 


ESTIMATED 


6 


3    YEARS    PAST 


Figure  V-2 
A  Conceptual  Forecasting  Model 


129 


shown  in  Figure  V-2 ,  the  forecasting  is  halted  every  five 
years  of  forecast  time  and  the  behavior  of  the  inferred 
variables  is  deduced.   Some  of  these  inferences  may  be 
deemed  by  the  planner  to  be  viable  only  in  the  near  future 
and  thus  the  figure  shows  a  gradual  reduction  in  the  number 
of  inferences  drawn  as  the  fifteen  year  forecast  year  is 
approached.   Should  the  circumstances  warrant  it,  no 
intermediate  inferences  need  be  made  at  all,  or,  conversely, 
inferences  could  be  drawn  yearly  or  monthly  into  the  future. 

The  substance  of  the  key  variables  for  all  types  of 
urban  planning  is  one  or  more  of  the  following: 
measures  of  economic  activity, 
population  characteristics, 
land  use  characteristics,  and 
transportation  characteristics. 

Each  of  these  key  variables  can  be  further  broken 
down  into  demand  variables,  resource  variables,  or  standard 
variables.   The  interest  of  the  planner  is  in  properly 
satisfying  the  future  demand  for  recreation,  housing, 
community  facilities,  streets,  or  whatever  the  substance 
of  the  plan  in  question.   This  demand  is  forecasted,  future 
standards  of  satisfaction  are  applied  to  the  forecasted 
demand  yielding  forecasted  requirements.   These  requirements 
are  met  by  the  allocation  of  resources  forecasted  to  be 
available . 

Consider,  by  way  of  example,  the  forecasted  demand  for 
retail  food  shopping  in  an  area.   This  demand  is  generated 
by  the  resident  forecasted  population  in  the  area.   It  also 
need  not  be  forecasted  as  a  key  variable,  but  rather  inferred 
from  the  forecasted  population. 

The  demand  is  very  obviously  related  to  a  resource 
variable  which  measures  the  supply  of  land  likely  to  be 
available  for  retail  food  merchandising,  and  number  and  types 
of  retail  food  merchandising  establishments,  their  spatial 
distribution  in  the  urban  area,  and  the  buying  population 
hinterland  necessary  to  support  each  of  them. 


30 


The  specific  relationships  between  the  forecasted 
demand  variables  and  the  forecasted  resource  variables 
■  ire  (he  forecasted  standard  variables.   These  standard 
variables  measure  levels  of  service.   Examples  in  this  case 
might  include  a  maximum  walking  distance  between  households 
and  convenience  food  shopping,  the  parking  necessary  for  a 
supermarket,  and  the  residential  population  necessary  to 
support  such  a  supermarket.   Not  only  must  the  demand  and 
resource  variables  be  forecast,  but  the  relationships 
between  them,  the  levels  of  service,  these  standard  variables 
must  be  forecast  as  well.   Perhaps  there  will  be  no  need 
for  convenience  shopping,  perhaps  supermarkets  will  take 
over  this  function,  perhaps  delivery  will  assume  a  greater 
importance,  perhaps  people  will  shop  less  often,  or  more 
often,  etc.   Each  of  these  assumptions  creates  a  different 
state  of  nature.   In  the  forecasting  of  standards,  there 
tend  to  be  several  possible  states  of  nature  with  associated 
probabilities  that  are  either  nearly  equal  or  difficult  to 
evaluate  at  all.   In  contrast,  the  forecasting  of  demands 
and  resources  typically  considers  only  a  few  states  of 
nature  and  one  of  these  usually  predominates.   In  the  example, 
the  forecasted  population  is  unlikely  to  change  present 
eati  ng  habits . 

Another  complicating  factor  is  that  acceptable  levels 
of  service  tend  to  rise.   As  soon  as  a  certain  level  of 
service  is  met,  the  public  expectancy  grows  and  clamor  is 
soon  raised  for  the  newer,  the  better,  the  faster,  the  less 
expensive  and  the  more  convenient. 

Thus,  the  forecasting  of  standards  is  something  of 
the  bete  noire  of  urban  planning.   The  beast  must  be 
approached  however,  to  help  reduce  the  many  unanswered 
demands  and  oversupplys  that  pLague  modern  urban  life. 

The  distinction  between  planning  in  the  public  sector 
and  planning  in  the  private  sector  has  been  assiduously 
avoided  thus  far  in  the  model  because  it  is  not  until 


131 


forecasting  that  il  gains  meaning.   Consider  Figure  V-3  (a). 
It  shows  four  forecasts  of  a  hypothetical  variabJe  based 
upon  different  sets  of  assumpti ons .   The  solid  line  is  the 
forecast  based  upon  a  continuance  of  present  governmental 
policies  and  no  significant  cultural  changes.   It  is  thus 
the  most  likely  occurrence.   This  depends,  of  course 
upon  how  distant  the  forecast  year  may  he,  hut  is  particu- 
larly likely  in  the  near  term  because  of  cultural  and 
governmental  inertia  effects. 

The  private  sector  is  nearly  powerless  to  affect  the 
occurrence  of  this  condition.   As  such,  planning  in  the 
private  sector  seeks  to  meet  these  forecasted  conditions 
in  the  best  possible  way.   This  is  usually  measured  in 
terms  of  profit.   The  most  likely  forecast  is  taken  as  a 
"given",  speculation  on  the  other  forecasts  ends,  and  the 
process  continues  from  this  point. 

The  public  sector,  on  the  other  hand,  has  some  powers 
available  to  it  which  may  change  the  likelihood  of  the 
different  forecasted  outcomes.   Suppose  it  is  deemed  that 
point  A,  in  Figure  V-3  (a),  is  a  forecast  with  qualities 
deemed  preferable  to  those  of  point  B,  resulting  from  a 
continuance  of  present  public  policies.   What  results  then 
is  the  first  major  design  decision  faced  by  the  planner. 
He  must  consult  very  closely  with  the  client  constituency 
and  they  together  must  determine  whether  they  will  simply 
plan  to  meet  the  conditions  of  point  B,  as  in  the  private 
sector,  or  accept  a  higher  risk  course  of  changing  public 
policy  or  public  culture  in  the  plan  in  an  attempt  to  reach 
point  A. 

The  degree  of  risk  involved,  in  addition  to  the  risk 
of  forecasting  itself,  depends  upon  the  substance  of  the 
forecast.   If  points  A  and  B  represented  amounts  of  land 
zoned  for  high  density  apartment  use  and  the  local  planning 
commission  could  easily  change  the  limits  on  this  use,  then, 
if  subsequent  market  pressure  could  be  withstood,  there  could 


132 


Q 

< 

UJ 
Q 


TIME 
(a) 


POINTS  OF 

TIME 


REEVALUATION 


(b) 
Figure  V-3 
Conceptual  Forecasted  Outcomes 


133 


very  well  result  less  of  this  use  and  the  public  policy 
could  change  public  culture  in  the  community.   This  is  a 
relatively  low  risk  change  in  public  policy. 

Suppose  points  A  and  B  were  population  forecasts. 
Public  policy  could  provide  a  system  of  Incentives  and 
penalties  to  limit  population  growth,  perhaps  the  public 
culture  would  react  favorably  with  these  programs  and  the 
forecast  might  move  away  from  po Lnt  B  towards  point  A. 
But  to  plan  on  the  forecast  significantly  moving  is  probably 
a  high  risk  undertaking. 

In  practice,  the  criticality  of  decisions  of  this 
type  is  muted  by  three  factors.   First,  planning  is  continu- 
ous, not  only  within  the  process  as  outlined  here,  but  also 
"from  process  to  process"  over  time  as  inputs  change. 
Changing  inputs  include  changing  personalities,  changing 
resources,  changing  demands,  changing  values  and  changing 
complimentary  or  supplementary  programs  and  conditions. 
Thus,  although  planning  may  consider  effects  fifty  or  even 
one  hundred  years  into  the  future,  the  programs  generating 
those  effects  will  be  reviewed  almost  as  many  times  in  the 
interval.   The  forecast  conceptually  shown  in  Figure  V-3  (a) 
actually  occurs  in  a  pattern  similar  to  Figure  V-3  (b)  as  time 
goes  by,  with  resultant  corrective  programs  (if  the  hypothesis 
is  still  valid)  or  (should  conditions  change)  new  plans 
entirely . 

The  second  muting  influence  has  as  its  basis  the 
linn  ted  power  of  government  in  a  democratic  society.   Although 
some  key  variables  could,  under  different  circumstances,  be 
considered  as  endogenous  to  the  urban  planning  process,  they 
are  not.   The  governmental  controls  on  economic  activity 
and  population  growth  necessary  to  make  these  variables 
endogenous  are  too  severe  to  be  in  consonance  with  the 
La  Lssez-faire  tradition  of  United  States  government .   As  a 
result,  these  variables  are  considered  exogenously  with,  at 
most,  only  a  mild  warping  of  their  expected  outcomes 
resulting  from  governmental  activity. 


134 


The  third  muting  influence  is  operational  in  nature. 
In  order  to  get  on  with  the  design  of  alternative  solutions 
to  any  problem,  that  problem  must  be  bounded,  perhaps 
assumptively ,  but  bounded  nonetheless.   There  is  a  clear 
need  for  rigorous  urban  theory  and  for  this  reason  the 
planner  and  client  constiuency  must  not  be  capricious  in 
cutting  off  debate.   That  point  must  come,  however,  and 
when  it  does,  the  conclusions  then  reached  are  taken  as 
"given 8 "  and  the  problem  solving  process  proceeds.   This 
does  not  preclude  the  important  concept  of  feedback,  but 
for  the  substance  of  forecasting,  the  feedback  loop  is  too 
long  and  awaiting  its  information  is  antithetical  to 
planning.   To  the  philosophers  we  leave  the  rest. 

Area 

Concerning  the  areal  scope  axis  of  the  conceptual 
model  of  planning  activity,  only  a  few  points  need  be  made 
regarding  forecasting. 

In  the  inventory  phase  of  the  process,  it  was  recognised 
that  delimitation  of  the  study  area  could  have  a  significant 
impact  on  the  inventory.   As  might  be  expected,  this  holds 
true  for  the  synthetic  inventory,  the  forecast,  as  well. 
In  particular,  however,  some  measures  of  economic  activity 
are  very  sensitive  to  areal  delimitation.   Further,  some 
forecasting  techniques  make  use  of  historical  areal  relation- 
ships to  "step  down"  greater  area  forecasts  to  their 
lesser  area  conponents .   This  occurs  because  large  area 
forecasts  can  be  made  with  greater  confidence  than  small 
area  forecasts,  all  else  being  equal. 

The  problem  with  large  area  forecasts  rests  with  the 
loss  of  refinement.   This  becomes  especially  apparent  when 
the  object  of  the  study  at  hand  is  to  locate  some  particular 
facility.   The  large  area  forecast  may  indeed  warrant  the 
location  of  that  facility  but  the  question  of  where,  within 
the  area,  may  require  an  additional  subdivision  of  the 


135 


large  area,  an  additional  analysis  making  that  already  done 
wasteful  by  reason  of  being  inconclusive. 

In  general ,  the  area  under  consideration  in  the  plan- 
ning process  is  subdivided  according  to  Che  homogeneity  of 
the  forecasted  variable.   There  may  be  areas  of  a  certain 
kind  of  residential  land  use,  areas  of  a  certain  population 
density,  areas  of  a  similar  family  income,  areas  of  similar 
transportation  demand,  or  whatever  else  may  be  under  consid- 
eration.  The  homogeneity  of  the  forecasted  characteristic 
enables  the  planner  to  treat  these  variables  in  aggregate 
rather  than  to  have  to  deal  with  each  family,  each  automobile 
and  each  residence. 

Thus  the  problem  of  areal  subdivision  for  forecasting 
involves  balancing  the  three  characteristics  of  largeness 
for  methodological  simplicity,  smallness  for  refinement  and 
the  degree  of  homogeneity  of  the  important  forecasted 
variables  . 

Procedure 

The  point  was  made  earlier  in  this  chapter  that  the 
substance  of  the  forecasted  key  variables  for  all  types  of 
urban  planning  is  one  or  more  of  economic  activity  character- 
istics, population  characteristics,  land  use  characteristics 
and  transportation  characteristics.   Those  characteristics 
dealing  with  economic  activity  and  population  tend  to  be 
much  more  exogeneous  than  the  remaining  two,  and  procedurally 
are  usually  forecast  first.   They  are  as  near  to  primary 
inputs  as  exist  in  urban  planning,  whereas  transportation 
and  land  use  characteristics  are  more  clearly  associated 
with  whatever  the  nature  of  the  plan  in  question  happens 
to  be  . 

Population  and  economic  activity  characteristics  can 
methodologically  be  forecast  independent  of  each  other. 
This  then  provides  a  cross  check  of  at  least  some  of  the 
characteristics.   From  population  studies  one  could  deduce 


136 


employment  and  income;  and  from  economic  activity  studies 
one  could  deduce  employment  thence  population. 

Land  use  and  transportation  characteristics  are  less 
independent  of  each  other.   Different  land  uses  affect  the 
transportation  system  differently,  and  different  transporta- 
tion facilities  tend  to  promote  different  land  uses.   The 
forecasting  techniques  for  these  characteristics  are  recursive- 
involving  trial  distributions  and  tests  for  internal  com- 
patability  as  well  as  satisfaction  of  boundary  conditions. 
Some  of  the  forecasting  techniques  are  quite  sophis- 
ticated and  draw  from  academic  disciplines  not  only  supportive 
of  urban  planning  but  also  with  a  body  of  knowledge  and 
methodology  unique  to  them.   This  is  particularly  true  with 
regional  economics  and  demography.   Accordingly,  the  question 
of  hiring  professional  staff  to  execute  these  forecast  s 
must  be  addressed  in  the  organization  phase  of  the  planning 
process . 

Forecasting  Techniques 
This  section  on  the  forecasting  phase  of  the  urban 
planning  process  concludes  by  stepping  back  from  conceptual 
considerations  and  operationally  considering  some  of  the 
commonly  used  specific  forecasting  techniques.   Many  are 
adapted  from  other  original  uses  and  combinations  and 
permutations  of  techniques  which  have  been  used  in  the  past. 
There  are  clear  favorites,  but  the  application  of  any  is  a 
strong  function  of  not  only  the  end  use  of  the  forecast, 
but  also  the  resources  available  to  execute  it. 

Economic  Activity  Forecasts 
Almost  all  economic  activity  forecasts  make  use  of 
national  or  regional  forecasts  as  primary  inputs,  and 
selectively  apply  this  data  to  smaller  areas  of  influence. 
The  selectivity  of  application  ranges  from  the  most 
refined  to  the  most  crude. 


137 


In  general,  the  planner  must  seek  to  answer  the 
question  "What  are  the  effects  on  the  area  in  question  if  a 
certain  industry  with  a  certain  number  of  jobs  moves  into 
or  out  of  the  area?"   The  most  crude  method  of  analysis  is 
to  assume  average  conditions  for  the  Industry,  area,  and 
jobs  and  to  apply  national  averages  supplied  by  such 
organizations  as  the  U.S.  Chamber  of  Commerce.   One  such  set 
of  averages  (Community  Relations  Fact  Booklet,  196*0  might 
say  that,  for  every  one  hundred  new  factory  workers  there 
will  be : 

359  more  people, 

$710,000  more  personal  income  per  year, 
3  more  retail  establishments, 
100  more  households, 
97  more  passenger  cars, 
$331,000  more  retail  sales  per  year, 
91  more  school  children, 
$229,000  more  bank  deposits,  and 
65  more  people  employed  in  non-manufacturing. 
One  of  the  most  refined  methods  is  that  of  input- 
output  analysis  (Leontief,  1951).   The  conceptual  basis  of 
this  method  is  that  every  industry  in  a  given  area  has  a 
relationship  to  every  other  industry  in  the  area,  and  that 
these  relationships  are  measureable  and  can  be  expressed  by 
a  series  of  mathematical  equations.   For  each  industry,  an 
analysis  is  made  of  the  distribution  of  its  output  and  the 
sources  of  its  input.   Many  of  the  inputs  are  themselves 
outputs  of  another  industry  requiring  another  analysis  and 
iterations  continue  until  the  process  converges.   What 
results  is  a  many  level  model  of  the  area  economy  in  terms 
of  production.   The  use  of  input-output  analysis  in  fore- 
casting occurs  when  some  share  of  national  or  regional 
forecasted  demand  can  be  inferred  to  the  area  in  question. 
Then  the  impacts  of  this  larger  demand  can  be  traced  through 
the  model  of  the  area  economy  resulting  in  area  forecasts. 


138 


As  an  example,  consider  a  simplified  hypothetical 
area  with  only  three  industries,  printing,  paper,  and 
chemicals.   For  every  dollar's  worth  of  printing  output, 
fifty  cents  is  spent  on  paper,  five  cents  on  chemicals,  and 
a  penny  is  spent  hy  the  printing  industry  itself.   For 
every  dollar's  worth  of  paper  output,  a  penny  each  is  spent 
on  printing  and  paper  and  five  cents  is  spent  for  chemicals, 
And  for  every  dollar's  worth  of  chemical  output,  a  penny 
each  is  spent  on  printing  and  paper  and  forty  cents  is 
spent  for  other  chemicals.   The  transaction  table  is  shown 
below . 

Table  V-l 

Cents  Worth  of  Input  per  Dollar  Output 

Printing         Paper         Chemicals 
Printing  111 

Paper  50  1  1 

Chemicals  5  5  40 

Suppose  the  national  or  regional  paper  production  is 
forecasted  to  rise  and  that  this  hypothetical  area's  share 
of  that  rise  is  forecast  to  be  one  hundred  dollars.   The 
biggest  assumption  in  the  technique  is  that  the  input- 
output  relationships  will  continue  to  hold  true,  so  that 
the  first  effect  is  a  dollar  rise  in  printing  production,  a 
five  dollar  rise  in  chemical  production  and  an  additional 
dollar  rise  in  paper  production.   This  is  entered  in  the 
first  round  of  input  requirements  shown  in  Table  V-2 . 

These  first  round  requirements  likewise  require 
inputs  in  the  same  fashion.   The  five  dollars  worth  of 
chemicals  generates  five  cents  worth  of  printing  ($1  input/ 
$100  output  X  $5  output);  five  cents  worth  of  paper  ($1 
input/$100  output  X  $5  output);  and  $2  worth  of  additional 
chemicals  ($40  input/$100  output  X  $5  output).   So  too  for 


140 


employment,  sales,  value  added,  or  income  accruing  to 
residents.   Economic  activity  serving  both  local  and  export 
markets  is  prorated  accordingly. 

Just  as  in  the  input-output  technique,  the  economic 
base  technique  traces  the  flow  of  this  economic  activity 
from  industry  to  industry.   What  results  is  another  model 
of  economic  behavior,  this  one  showing  the  impact  on  both 
basic  and  non-basic  activity  for  any  exchange  in  the  basic 
portion  of  any  activity. 

As  an  example  of  this  tracing  or  linking  of  economic 
activities,  consider  again  the  simplified  economic  area 
composed  of  the  printing,  paper,  and  chemical  industries. 
Suppose  that  the  printing  industry  sold  80%  of  its  output 
to  private  concerns  outside  of  the  area  under  consideration, 
the  "exports  private"  sector.   Another  17%  is  sold  to  the 
federal  government,  "exports  government",  and  the  remainder 
is  sold  locally,  a  percent  each  to  other  printing,  the  paper 
and  chemical  industries.   Similar  data  are  inventoried  for 
the  paper  and  chemical  industries  and  the  results  are 
tabulated  below. 

Table  V-3 

Allocation  of  Sales  by  Percent 

Private  Government 

Exports   Exports    Local  Printing  Paper  Chemicals 

Printing     80       17        3       11        1 

Paper        28       20       52      50      1        1 

Chemicals    10       40       50       5      5       40 

Before  the  planner  can  say  that  the  printing  industry 
is  977,  export  (807o  +  177.)  or  that  the  paper  industry  is 
487,  export  (28%  +  20%)  he  must  investigate  how  the  local 
percentages  are  distributed.   Consider  the  local  consumption 
of  paper,  52%  of  the  paper  production.   The  majority  of  this 
goes  to  the  printing  industry.   And  printing  will  export 


141 


some  of  that.   Printing  will  export  to  private  concerns 
407,  of  the  paper  production  (507  of  paper  to  printing  X 
807,  of  printing  to  exports  private);  to  the  government  8 .  57, 
of  the  paper  production  (507,  of  paper  +  printing  X  1/7, 
of  printing  to  exports  government)  and  distribute  locally 
1.57  of  paper  production,  (507  of  paper  to  printing  X  307 
of  printing  to  local).   In  the  same  manner  printing  will 
redistribute  the  57,  of  production  it  gets  from  the  chemical 
industry  and  the  17  of  production  it  gets  from  its  own 
industry.   So  that  the  three  industries  are  tied  to  exports 
both  directly  and  indirectly.   This  is  shown  in  the  table 
below. 

Table  V-4 
Allocation  of  Sales  by  Percent  Direct  and  Indirect 


Export 
Private 

Export 
Gov't 

Local  (to  be 
distributed 
in  the  next 
round) 

Printing 

Direct 

Indirect 

Total 

80.00 
1.18 

17.00 
.77 

1.05 

81.18 

17.77 

1.05 

1007c 

Paper 

Direct 

Indirect 

Total 

28.00 
40.38 

20.00 
9.10 

2.52 

68.38 

25.10 

2.52 

1007 

Chemicals 

Direct 

Indirect 

Total 

10.00 
9.20 

40.00 
18.05 

22.75 

19.20 

58.05 

22.75 

1007 

Considering  the  paper  industry,  its  first  round  indirect 
private  exports  is  composed  of  the  407,  that  printing  will 
export,  the  0.287  that  paper  will  export  (287  paper  to  private 
exports  X  17,  paper  to  paper),  and  the  0.107  that  chemicals  will 
export  (107  chemicals  to  private  exports  X  17  paper  to  chemicals) 


142 


The  first  round  indirect  government  exports  is  composed  of  the 
8.5%  that  printing  will  export,  the  0.2%  that  paper  will  export 
(20%  paper  to  government  export  X  1%  paper  to  paper),  and  the 
0.4%  that  chemicals  will  export  (40%  chemicals  to  government 
export  X  1%  paper  to  chemicals).   The  residual  of  2.52%  will 
continue  to  he  distributed  in  a  like  manner,  round  by  round, 
until  it  becomes  insignificant. 

In  this  simple  example,  there  are  no  local  sectors 
of  ultimate  consumption.   In  reality,  of  course,  there  are. 
Some  of  the  paper,  printing,  chemicals  or  whatever  will  be 
consumed  locally  and  some  will  eventually  be  consumed  by 
such  .local  sectors  as  business  investment,  housing  investment, 
local  governmental  operations  and  export  governmental  invest- 
ments . 

In  forecasting  with  this  model  inferences  are  drawn 
from  national  or  regional  forecasts  for  those  industries  that 
are  basic  to  the  area,  the  inferred  shares  of  the  large  area 
basic  industry  forecasts  inputed  to  the  model,  and  the 
result  is  the  forecasted  impact  on  the  local  area.   This  is 
clearly  analogous  to  forecasting  with  the  input-output  model. 

The  sample  inventory  shown  in  Chapter  111  lists  the 
input  information  necessary  for  this  type  of  economic  I  ase 
study.   The  technique  is  somewhat  sensitive  to  the  unit  of 
measure  of  the  economic  activity  and  more  so  to  the  delimita- 
tion of  the  area  studied. 

Both  the  input-output  technique  and  the  economic  base 
technique  result  in  models  of  economic  behavior  of  the  study 
area  that  are  at  once  sophisticated  and  costly.   If,  for  the 
purposes  of  the  plan,  such  analyses  are  not  required  or  are 
prohibitively  expensive,  there  are  a  number  of  cruder,  quicker 
and  less  costly  techniques  which  may  suffice.   One  of  these  is 
the  Hoyt  (1939)  economic  base  theory  of  which  the  Tiebout 
technique  is  a  sophisticated  extension.   In  the  Hoyt  technique, 
the  employment  in  each  basic  industry  in  the  area  is  calculated. 
The  judgement  of  the  degree  to  which  an  industry  may  be  basic 


143 


is  not  traced  out,  as  with  Tiebout ,  but  estimated  by  inter- 
viewing the  industries  or  using  national  averages  and  pro- 
ration techniques.   If,  for  example,  a  national  average 
shows  that  there  are  three  retail  trade  employees  per  one 
hundred  population  and  the  area  under  consideration  has 
four,  the  fourth  employee  is  considered  to  be  serving  some 
undiagnosed  export  function  and  is  considered  basic. 
Similarly,  if  the  area  in  question  receives  one  percent  of 
t  he  national  income  and  a  local  industry  markets  a  product 
nationally,  ninty-nine  percent  of  that  industry's  employees 
are  considered  basic  and  one  percent  non-basic. 

Given  the  basic  employment  and  the  total  employment, 
the  basic/non-basic  employment  ratio  is  calculated.   This 
ratio  is  then  applied  to  forecasted  shares  of  national 
changes  in  employment  for  each  basic  industry.   This  applica- 
tion results  in  a  forecast  of  non-basic  employment,  and 
hence  total  employment,  likely  to  occur  as  a  result  of 
changes  in  the  area's  basic  economic  activity. 

The  has ic/non-basic  employment  ratio  is  a  comparative 
tool  and  its  value  is  more  relative  than  absolute.   A  very 
high  ratio  is  typical  of  an  area  of  intense  export  activity. 
It  may  also  describe  an  area  of  service  activity  so  weak 
that  it  is  difficult  to  obtain  a  doctor's  appointment  or  to 
get  a  carpet  cleaned  or  a  haircut.   If  the  export  activity 
is  dominated  by  a  single  industry,  a  high  ratio  may  indicate 
that  the  area  under  investigation  is  dangerously  dependent 
on  changes  in  the  economic  behavior  of  that  industry. 

A  very  low  basic/non-basic  employment  ratio  could 
describe  an  area  of  many  duplicative  and  marginally  performing 
service  industries  selling  each  other  gasoline  and  doing 
each  other's  wash.   Here  is  a  clear  need  for  the  nutritive 
impact  of  additional  basic  industry  for  the  area's  economy. 

There  are  two  remaining  classes  of  economic  activity 
forecasting  techniques,  differentiated  by  their  use  or  non- 
use  of  large  area  or  perhaps  national  economic  forecasts. 


144 


By  the  use  of  large  area  or  national  economic  fore- 
casts the  planner  can,  through  a  series  of  proration 
techniques,  successively  apply  historical  relationships  of 
smaller  area  participation  in  bigger  area  economic  activity. 
For  example,  historical  data  on  a  county's  share  of   state 
employment  can  be  obtained  and  plotted  on  a  time  scries. 
A  curve  is  fitted  and  a  likely  ratio  obtained  for  a  future 
time  period.   When  this  future  ratio  is  applied  to  the 
forecasted  state  employment,  the  result  is  the  forecasted 
county  employment.   The  future  state  employment  was  obtained 
in  the  same  manner  from  forecasted  regional  employment ,  and 
that  from  the  forecasted  national  employment. 

This  technique  can  be  used  to  forecast  any  economic 
indicator  in  addition  to  employment,  providing  the  input 
data  are  available.   It  also  can  be  used  to  forecast  any  of 
these  indicators  by  component  sector  such  as  heavy  manu- 
facturing employment,  retail  trade  employment,  and  agricul- 
tural employment. 

The  technique  is  probably  best  used  when  forecasts 
are  obtained  for  all  the  component  parts  of  each  larger 
area.   Then  internal  consistancy  checks  can  be  made  to 
insure  that  the  sum  of  the  parts  does  indeed  equal  the  whole 
and  that  the  relationships  of  the  parts  to  each  other  remain 
rational  at  each  stage  in  the  process.   When  this  is  done  this 
technique  is  commonly  called  the  apportionment  method. 

Tf,  however,  the  proportioning  is  done  without  reference 
to  the  complimentary  areas,  as  a  regional  share  may  he  pro- 
portioned to  a  state  without  considering  the  other  states 
making  up  the  region,  or  a  state  share  may  he  proportioned 
to  a  county  without  considering  the  other  counties,  then  I  lie 
technique  has  come  to  be  called  the  ratio  step-down  method. 

Every  forecasting  technique  so  far  outlined  depends 
upon  the  readily  available  national  forecasts  of  specific 
economic  indicators  as  exogenous  variables.  Should  these 
for  some  reason  be  suspect  or  not  applicable,  the  only 


145 


recourse  is  to  forecast  based  upon  an  extrapolation  of  present 
and  historic  local  trends.   This  last  class  of  techniques 
is  the  most  crude  and  only  as  good  as  the  imagination  and 
intuition  of  the  forecaster. 

Population  Estimates  and  Forecasts 
As  in  economic  activity  forecasting,  population 
forecasting  methods  range  from  the  refined  to  the  crude, 
but  in  each  case  they  are  inherently  simpler  to  execute 
owing  to  the  consideration  of  only  three  central  variables; 
births,  deaths  and  migration.   Of  these,  migration  offers 
the  most  difficulty  owing  to  the  lack  of  a  good  basis  for 
forecasting  it. 

In  the  cohort-survival  method,  the  population  is 
separated  by  sex  and  perhaps  race  into  convenient  a^e  groups 
each  covering  typically  five  years.   Using  specific  mortality 
rates  for  each  sex-race-age  group,  called  a  cohort,  the 
survivors  are  forecast  into  the  same  sex,  same  race,  but 
five  year  older  cohort.   This  is  done  for  all  cohorts  and 
then  a  forecasted  net  migration  is  distributed  over  these 
groups  and  added  to  or  subtracted  from  the  survivors.   Using 
specific  birth  rates  for  the  women  in  each  race-age  cohort, 
the  zero  to  five  year  old  sex-race-age  cohorts  are  generated 
to  fill  the  vacancies  caused  by  the  five  year  aging  process. 
The  procedure  is  repeated  until  the  forecast  year  is  met. 
The  strength  of  the  cohort-survival  method  is  that  it 
recognizes  that  the  vital  birth  and  death  rates  vary  from 
cohort  to  cohort. 

The  use  of  the  cohort -survival  method  is  at  the  same 
time  limited  by  the  availability  of  forecasted  specific 
rates  and  the  judgement  involved  in  computing  and  distri- 
buting migration.   A  simpler  case  of  the  cohort-survival 
method  involves  considering  the  aggregate  population  rather 
than  sex-age-race  cohorts  and  applying  aggregate  forecasted 
rates.   Thus  is  called  the  migration  and  natural  increase 
method . 


146 


If  national  or  large  area  population  forecasts  are 
available,  they  can  be  prorated  down  to  the  smaller  area 
being  considered  by  either  the  apportionment  ov    ratio  step- 
down  methods  in  a  manner  analogous  to  that  for  economic 
activity . 

Cruder  population  forecasts  can  be  obtained  from  the 
forecast  of  employment  made  in  the  economic  activity  fore- 
casts or  from  a  conceptual  technique  which  forecasts  the 
population  holding  capacity  of  an  area  based  upon  forecasted 
zoning,  land  characteristics,  available  water  and  other 
utilities,  etc.   Also,  if  the  city  in  question  is  clearly 
analogous  in  development  to  another  older  city,  some  fore- 
casts can  be  based  on  the  present  day  development  of  the 
older  area. 

Again  as  in  the  case  of  the  economic  activity  studies., 
local  trends  can  be  used  exclusively  to  forecast  population, 
these  trends  being  identified  by  any  of  a  number  of  common 
ma tbeniat ical  techniques.   A  strong  basis  must  be  held  for 
assuming  that  bistorical  rates  will  continue  and  that 
specific  correlative  relationships  will  remain  constant. 

Because  of  the  relative  ease  of  employing  any  of  these 
techniques,  it  is  a  recommended  practice  to  use  several 
simultaneously  in  an  attempt  to  gain  greater  confidence  in 
the  accuracy  of  the  forecasted  population,  yet  writers  have 
been  hard  pressed  to  state  a  best  method.   If  the  migration 
of  an  area  were  known  to  be  zero,  the  simple  natural  increase 
method  might  prove  to  be  the  "best." 

Estimating  the  present  population  is  a  lesser  included 
case  of  forecasting  the  future  population.   This  is  so  because 
some  of  the  input  data  is  presently  available.   The  most 
refined  methods  deal  with  migration  and  natural  increase 
in  a  manner  first  developed  by  the  bureau  of  the  Census 
(Cliapin,  1965).   The  method  is  to  take  the  most  recent 
census  enumeration,  compute  the  natural  increase  by  any  of 
the  methods  above,  estimate  the  net  migration  and  loss  or 


147 


gain  from  the  armed  forces,  and  the  resultant  sum  is  L  In- 
present  population.   The  net  migration  is  estimated  in  either 
of  two  ways.   In  one  case  the  ratio  of  the  census  year- 
total  population  to  the  census  year  school  popuiat  ion  is 
multiplied  by  the  current  year  school  population.   This 
would  give  current  year  total  population  if  local  and  national 
school  enrollment  trends  were  the  same.   This  is  usually  not 
the  case  so  the  resultant  figure  is  corrected  by  multiplying 
it  by  the  percent  change  in  local  school  enrollment  minus 
the  percent  change  in  national  school  enrollment. 

An  alternative  method  develops  an  estimate  of  current 
school  population  hased  upon  natural  increase  alone  using 
for  example,  a  cohort  survival  approach  with  one  year  cohorts. 
The  difference  between  this  estimate  and  the  current  school 
enrollment  is  attributable  to  net  migration. 

Other  methods  of  population  estimating  depend  upon 
symptomatic  data.   As  deaths  are  commonly  a  matter  of  public- 
record,  for  instance,  one  could  apply  to  them  known  average 
death  rates  to  arrive  at  the  estimated  population  of  each 
death  group  for  which  a  rate  exists.   The  same  holds  true 
for  birth  rates  to  arrive  at  the  number  of  women  of  child- 
bearing  age,  thence  the  rest  of  the  population.   Changes  in 
the  number  of  dwelling  units,  automobile  registrations  or 
similar  such  data  could  be  used,  in  conjunction  with  known 
rates,  to  arrive  at  population  estimates.   As  with  population 
forecasting,  it  is  not  uncommon  for  several  of  these  methods 
to  be  used  in  an  attempt  to  gain  confidence  in  the  resultant 
estimate . 

Land  Use  Forecasts 
Land  use  forecasting  is  of  a  different  genre  than 
population  or  economic  activity  forecasting  because  it  is 
tied  very  closely  to  design  considerations.   It  a  1  so  enjoys 
an  interdependent  relationship  with  transportation  forecasting. 
Further,  of  all  the  types  of  forecasting,  that  of  land  use 


148 


has  the  strongest  association  with  forecasted  standards  of 
n.",e.   For  these  reasons  as  well  as  the  fact  thai  specific 
land  use  forecasting  techniques  are  typically  unique  Lo  the 
circumstances  of  their  application,  it  is  only  with  reluctance 
that  land  use  forecasting  can  he  discussed  outside  of  the 
context  of  a  specific  problem. 

Nonetheless,  the  conceptual  basis  is  clear.   land  use 
forecasting  predicts  the  amounts  and  kinds  of  land  use 
likely  to  occur  as  a  result  of  the  fulfillment  of  l  he- 
population  and  economic  activity  forecasts.   Further,  it 
forecasts  the  likely  locations  of  these  uses  and  in  this 
sense,  enters  the  whole  area  of  design  considerations 
discussed  in  the  next  chapter.   Included  in  these  considera- 
tions are  the  careful  balancing  of  uses  to  each  other,  the 
impacts  of  uses  on  the  transportation  system,  and  the 
possible  plan  elements  and  public  policies  which  might 
favorably  change  the  forecasts. 

Chapin  (1965)  calls  these  considerations  loeation  and 
space  requirements,  and  Martin  (1961)  calls  them  location, 
activity  and  intensity  considerations.   The  manipulation 
of  these  considerations  and  the  affixing  of  them  to  pieces 
of  land  is  typically  accomplished  through  the  use  of  one 
or  more  of  the  following  four  classes  of  models. 

The  first  class  of  forecasting  model  is  judgemental  in 
nature.   The  planner  simply  studies  the  area  under  considera- 
tion, its  relationship  to  the  rest  of  the  area,  the  character- 
istics of  the  supply  of  land  and  the  expected  population  and 
economic  demands  on  the  land,  its  present  or  future  zoning, 
accessibility  and  like  considerations,  and  intuitively 
forecasts  what  the  likely  development  will  be.   This  is 
not  to  imply  that  intuitive  and  creative  judgement  is  not 
used  in  the  other  methods,  but  here  there  are  no  computa- 
tional or  procedural  techniques  employed  to  aid  in  judgment. 

The  second  class  of  forecasting  model  adds  to  the  first 
some  procedural  rules.   Martin  calls  this  land  use  accounting 


149 


and  from  the  balance  of  available  land  after  each  forecast 
are  successively  subtracted  out  public  open  space  and 
recreational  land,  singular  uses  such  as  cemeteries,  airports 
and  public  buildings,  then  major  commercial  use,  streets, 
industrial  use,  residential  use,  and  finally,  non-residential 
uses  within  residential  areas  such  as  schools,  churches  and 
fire  houses. 

The  third  general  class  of  models  uses  mathematical 
abstractions  to  allocate  total  land  use  requirements  to  each 
available  land  unit.   This  includes  all  forms  of  the  gravity 
model  and  a  good  example  is  the  Hansen  (1959)  model  for 
Washington,  D.C.   In  this  class  of  models,  population  and 
economic  activity  growth  forecasted  for  the  whole  area  is 
distributed  to  various  zones  in  the  area  based  upon  each 
/one's  attractive  force  compared  relative  to  the  al  tractive- 
forces  of  the  remaining  zones. 

The  fourth  class  of  land  use  forecasting  models  is 
composed  or"  mathematical  abstractions  of  economic  lehavior. 
This  analysis  can  he  micro  or  macro  in  approach,  and  typical 
examples  include  the  work  by  Herbert  and  Stevens  (1960), 
Stewart  (1969),  and  Lowry  (1964).   Models  of  this  type 
allocate  to  zones  amounts  of  population  and  economic  activity 
based  upon  observed  economic  behavioral  patterns  used  by 
individuals  and  firms  in  location  decisions. 

Transportation  Forecasts 
This  introduction  to  transportation  forecasting  con- 
cludes this  chapter  on  the  forecasting  phase  of  the  urban 
planning  process  and  is  necessarily  limited  to  urban  ground 
transportation.   The  forecasting  techniques  for  this  type 
of  activity  are  part  of  a  large  and  strong  body  of  knowledge, 
primarily  due  to  a  favorable  set  of  federal,  state  and 
local  legislation  supportive  of  both  research  and  operations. 

This  body  of  knowledge  includes  more  than  forecasting 
methods,  of  course,  and  has  come  to  be  called  Urban 


150 


Transportation  Planning  or  UTP.   A  brief  review  of  UTP  is  in 
order  here  in  relation  to  the  conceptual  model  of  planning 
activity. 

In  the  organization  phase,  UTP  has  become  somewhat 
more  institutionalized  than  planning  in  general;  first, 
because  of  a  generally  more  refined  and  widely  applicable 
set  of  procedures,  and  second,  because  of  various  legisla- 
tive and  administrative  requirements  imposed  by  state  and 
federal  agencies.   In  the  inventory  phase,  UTP  concentrates 
on  four  major  c Lasses  of  information:   demographic,  social 
and  economic  characteristics  of  the  area;  a  complete  facil- 
ities inventory  of  the  urban  transportation  system;  land  use 
characteristics;  and  an  origin-destination  survey  composed 
of  home  interviews  or  widely  sought  after  substitutes,  a 
truck  and  taxi,  survey,  and  cordon  counts  of  traffic  across 
boundaries  of  the  study  area.   In  the  analysis  phase  a 
network  is  constructed  to  simulate  the  transportation  system 
together  with  these  inventoried  characteristics.   Land  use, 
demographic,  social,  and  economic  relationships  are  con- 
structed to  explain  the  amount,  location  and  timing  of 
inventoried  trips.   Distributional  relationships  are  con- 
structed to  explain  movements  observed  from  one  traffic 
zone  to  another.   These  generally  balance  the  desire  to 
travel,  measured  by  some  propensity  to  interchange,  against 
the  resistance  to  travel,  measured  by  a  decay  of  this  pro- 
pensity due  to  zonal  separation,  which  is  in  turn  measured 
by  time,  distance,  cost,  etc.   If  the  application  of  these 
and  other  relationships  (for  instance,  the  split  of  trips 
between  the  automobile  mode  and  the  mass  transit  mode)  to 
the  network  results  in  a  duplication  of  the  inventoried 
observations  regarding  the  amount,  location,  timing,  mode 
and  distribution  of  trips,  both  the  network  and  the 
relationships  are  hypothesized  to  be  valid.   UTP  then  moves 
to  the  forecasting  phase. 


151 


The  first  step  in  UTP  forecasting  is  to  determine  the 
amount  of  trips  produced  at,  or  attracted  to,  each  traffic 
zone  for  the  forecast  year.   Separately  forecast  demographic , 
economic,  social  and  land  use  characteristics  serve  as  inputs 
to  the  various  techniques. 

One  method,  first  used  hy  the  Chicago  Area  Transporta- 
tion Study  (1960),  constructs  from  the  inventoried  data  a 
trip  rate  per  acre  for  different  land  uses.   The  land  uses 
are  differentiated  by  character,  location  and  density 
characteristics.   New  trip  rates  are  forecast  and  applied 
to  forecasted  land  uses  resulting  in  the  amount  of  forecasted 
trips . 

Another  method,  developed  by  Walker  (1960)  for  the 
Puget  Sound  Regional  Transportation  Study,  uses  cross 
classification  analysis,  a  statistical  technique  in  which 
average  values  of  a  dependent  variable  can  be  obtained  for 
different  combinations  of  two  or  more  independent  variables. 
The  independent  variables  are  considered  in  ranges  or  classes 
and,  in  this  case,  there  were  three  classes  of  environmental 
factors  and  six  classes  of  household  characteristics.   For 
each  of  the  eighteen  combinations  of  these  independent 
variables,  trip  production  rates  and  trip  attraction  rates 
were  calculated  from  the  inventoried  data  by  cross  classifi- 
cation.  For  each  zone,  the  forecasted  environmental  and 
household  characteristics  then  determined  the  applicable 
rate  of  trip  production  or  attraction. 

Another  method  uses  the  statistical  technique  of 
multiple  regression  analysis.   Equations  are  typically 
constructed  with  trip  production  or  attraction  being  some 
function  of  independent  variables  such  as  trip  purpose, 
family  income,  vehicle  ownership,  land  use,  distance  from 
the  CB,  length  of  trip,  mode  of  trip,  and  time  of  day.   The 
analysis  calibrates  this  model  to  present  and  historical 
data  for  the  area  in  question.   Any  forecasted  changes  in 


152 


the  independent  variables  are  then  inserted  by  zone  and 
the  equation  solved  for  future  trip  generation  by  zone. 

All  these  methods  base  trip  generation  on  the  demo- 
graphic, economic  and  land  use  characteristics  of  the  traffic 
zone.   Another  type  of  trip  generation  model  includes  "as  well 
consideration  of  the  transportation  subsystem  that  serves 
the  zone  and  connects  it  to  other  zones.   Zones  with 
relatively  more  accessible  destinations  should  produce  more 
trips  and  zones  that  are  themselves  relatively  more  access- 
ible should  attract  more  trips.   Nakkash  (1969)  has  developed 
a    model  that  considers  this  accessibility  which  states  that 
the  relative  accessibility  of  a  zone  to  an  activity  for  a 
certain  purpose  is  equal  to  the  accessibility  of  that  zone 
to  that  activity  for  that  purpose  divided  by  the  sum  of  all 
the  accessibilities  of  all  the  zones  to  that  activity  for 
that  purpose.   The  accessibility  of  any  one  zone  to  any  one 
activity  for  any  one  purpose  is  the  sum  over  all  the  zones 
of  the  size  of  the  activity  in  each  zone  multiplied  by  a 
friction  factor  corresponding  to  the  travel  time  from  the 
zone  in  consideration  to  each  of  the  other  zones  for  the 
purpose  under  consideration. 

Trip  generation  models  forecast  the  likely  number  of 
trip  ends,  either  productions  or  attractions.   The  links 
between  these  ends  are  next  distributed  from  zone  to  zone 
in  the  area.   The  several  distribution  models  used  to  forecast 
these  interzonal  transfers  can  be  broadly  classified  into 
two  types,  synthesis  models  and  growth  models. 

Synthesis  models  forecast  interzonal  transfers  based 
upon  the  behavior  patterns  of  travelers  observed  in  the 
inventory  and  analysis  phases.   One  type  of  synthesis  model 
is  the  opportunity  model  which  mathematically  states  that 
the  probability  that  a  trip  will  terminate  within  a  zone  is 
equal  to  the  probability  that  the  zone  contains  an  acceptable 
destination  times  the  probability  that  an  acceptable  destina- 
tion closer  to  the  point  of  origin  has  not  been  found.   The 


153 


probabilities  are  determined  empirically  from  the  inventoried 
data  and  follow  the  observed  trend  that  the  longer  the  trip, 
the  more  selective  is  the  destination. 

Another  synthesis  model  is  the  gravity  model  which 
mathematically  states  that  the  number  of  trips  from  one  zone 
to  another  zone  is  directly  related  to  the  total  number  of 
trips  originating  in  the  first  zone  and  to  the  total  number 
of  trips  ending  (a  measure  of  attractiveness)  in  the  second 
zone,  and  is  inversely  related  to  a  "friction  of  space"  as 
measured  in  travel  time,  distance,  cost  or  a  combination  of 
these  factors.   The  friction  defined  by  these  factors  varies 
by  trip  purpose. 

Tomazinis  (1962)  formulated  a  combination  of  the 
gravity  model  and  the  opportunity  model  called  the  competing 
opportunity  model.   This  model  states  that  the  probability 
that  a  trip  is  going  into  a  zone  is  the  ratio  between  the 
number  of  trip  destinations  in  the  zone  divided  by  the 
number  of  destination  opportunities  an  equal  time  away 
from  the  origin  as  the  zone  in  question.   This  model  considers 
the  land  uses  at  the  origin  and  destination  as  well  as  the 
intervening  land  uses.   It  uses  zone  productions  and  the 
resultant  attractions  may  not  be  in  accord  with  the 
attractions  as  forecasted  by  trip  generation  techniques. 
This  is  resolved  by  successive  approximations. 

Grecco  (1962)  has  developed  a  synthesis  model  based 
upon  the  theory  and  mechanics  of  linear  graph  theory.   Trip 
flow  is  a  function  of  demand  and  travel  time.   In  the 
linear  graph,  flow  sums  to  zero  at  each  vertex  or  zone,  and 
demand  sums  to  zero  around  each  circuit  or  interzonal 
d  i  stribution . 

The  other  general  class  of  distribution  models  are 
growth  factor  methods  and  they  differ  from  synthesis  model 
in  that  they  project  current  demands  rather  than  synthesize 
future  demands. 


154 


In  the  uniform  factor  method,  a  single  growth  factor 
is  estimated  for  the  entire  area  under  consideration.   The 
interzonal  transfers  inventoried  by  the  origin-destination 
study  are  then  multiplied  by  this  factor  to  yield  future 
interzonal  transfers. 

In  the  average  factor  method,  different  growth 
factors  are  forecast  for  each  zone  and  the  average  of  the 
two  appropriate  factors  is  used  to  multiply  the  inventoried 
interzonal  transfer  between  any  two  zones.   Adjustments 
are  successively  approximated  to  satisfy  the  control  totals. 
Fratar  (1954)  has  developed  a  growth  factor  based  upon 
the  present  distribution  and  the  growth  factors  of  the  future 
destinations.   The  ratios  of  the  present  attractions  for 
each  destination  divided  by  the  total  present  production 
for  the  origin  in  question,  are  multiplied  by  the  respective 
destination  growth  factors  to  yield  distributional  factors. 
These  distributional  factors  are  then  normalized  and 
applied  to  the  future  trip  productions  from  the  origin  in 
question. 

Although  the  use  of  growth  factors  to  distribute  trips 
is  simple,  it  does  require  the  input  of  an  origin-destination 
survey  and  constant  zonal  boundaries.   The  growth  factor 
mechanics  also  break  down  when  considering  low  volume  zones 
that  are  likely  to  greatly  increase  from  the  base  year  to 
the  forecast  year. 

The  next  step  in  the  forecasting  phase  of  UTP  is  to 
split  these  distributed  trips  between  those  likely  to  be 
accomplished  by  automobile  and  those  likely  to  be  accomp- 
lished by  mass  transit.   The  four  most  important  factors 
affecting  mass  transit  usage  are  automobile  ownership, 
density  of  development,  transit  service  characteristics,  and 
the  economic  status  of  the  tripmaker. 

The  Pittsburgh  Area  Transportation  Study  (1961)  has 
shown  that  an  automobile  ownership  increases  from  no  cars 
to  three  cars  per  household,  transit  usage  decreases  from 


155 


sixty  percent  to  eleven  percent  of  ,-iJJ  trips  made  per 
household.   The  reasons  for  the  decrease  are  intuil  ively 
c Icar. 

Transit  usage  increases  with  density  or  intensity  of 
land  use  development.   Again  the  reasons  are  simple.   High 
density  residential  development  is  generally  inhabited  by 
low  income  -  low  auto  ownership  families.   High  density 
non-residential  development  is  typically  associated  with 
high  attractiveness  for  tripmaking  together  with  difficult 
and  expensive  driving  conditions. 

Four  factors  govern  the  level  of  service  offered  by 
mass  transit;  travel  time,  travel  cost,  travel  comfort  and 
tr.ivel  convenience.   bach  of  these  has  a  preferred  direction 
of  improvement  is  perceived  by  the  potential  user. 

Increasing  family  income  is  correlated  with  a  decrease 
in  transit  usage.   This  decrease  is  not  quite  so  severe  with 
work  trips  as  it  is  with  non-work  trips  because  of  the 
continued  use  of  rapid  rail  mass  transit  for  work  trips  in 
some  areas  as  a  cultural  phenomenon  rather  than  an  economic 
one . 

These  four  factors  are  not  independent  of  each  other. 
They  are  also  related  to  and  vary  according  to  trip  purpose 
such  as  the  work  trip  or  the  school  trip.   Accordingly, 
modal  split  models  variously  consider  combinations  of  some 
or  all  of  these  factors,  based  upon  intuitive  and  statistical 
evidence,  to  forecast  the  probable  split  between  the  automo- 
bile and  mass  transit  usage.   The  mechanics  of  these  consider- 
ations typically  involve  graphical  techniques  or  regression 
analyses,  the  interdependence  of  the  independent  variables 
notwithstanding . 

Graphical  techniques  of  modal  split  forecasting  include 
the  use  of  diversion  curves  which  are  a  function  of  system 
characteristics.   For  various  ratios  of  mass  transit  cost 
to  automobile  cost,  or  of  mass  transit  travel  time  to  auto- 
mobile time,  curves  are  constructed  showing  the  probable 


156 


percent  of  total  trips  diverted  to  mass  transit  usage.   These 
curves  are  actually  several  families  of  curves,  each 
family  classifying  and  cross  classifying  the  factors  affecting 
transit  usage  such  as  trip  purpose,  trip  direction,  time  of 
day,  levels  of  service,  economic  status  of  the  traveler, 
trip  destination,  and  many  more. 

Mechanically,  these  diversion  curves  either  deal  with 
trip  ends,  origins  and  destinations,  or  trip  interchanges, 
the  movements  or  trips  themselves. 

Trip  end  modal  split  models  are  applied  to  generated 
Lrips,  and  only  after  the  modal  split  are  these  trips  dis- 
tributed as  outlined  in  the  previous  discussion.   Fertal 
(1966)  has  summarized  the  key  features  of  some  of  the  trip 
end  models.   In  the  Chicago  model,  modal  split  was  explained 
by  automobile  ownership  and  orientation  to  the  CBD.   The 
Pittsburgh  model  introduced  the  concept  of  "captive"  and 
"choice"  riders,  the  former  being  totally  dependent  upon 
the  transit  system  for  their  needs.   The  Erie  model  added 
employment  accessibility  as  a  means  to  differentiate  between 
transit  usage  and  automobile  usage.   The  Puget  Sound  model 
considered  accessibility  by  four  trip  purposes. 

Trip  interchange  modal  split  models  are  applied  to 
distributed  trips.   Fertal  notes  that  the  Washington  D.C. 
model  considered  only  the  morning  peak  hour,  and  then  by 
trip  purpose  and  classes  of  tripmaker  characteristics.   The 
Twin  Cities  model  used  multiple  regression  analyses  to 
construct  two  equations  for  work  and  non-work  trips.   These 
equations  were  then  plotted  to  result  in  diversion  curves 
of  travel  time  ratio,  income,  residential  density,  employ- 
ment density,  and  parking  cost  for  each  of  the  two  purposes. 
The  Buffalo  model  introduced  the  concept  of  "auto  avail- 
ability."  If  an  automobile  is  used  for  a  work  trip  it  is  no 
longer  available  for  other  trips  and  this  concept  was  used 
to  replace  auto  ownership. 


157 


The  result  of  all  the  work  to  this  point  in  the  UTP 
forecasting  phase  is  a  trip  table.   This  table  shows  the 
forecasted  traffic  flow  from  all  origins  to  all  destinations 
by  mode.   Thus  the  forecasting  phase  dealing  with  demand 
has  ended. 

It  has  been  noted,  however,  that  the  conceptual  model 
of  planning  activity  includes  forecasting  considerations 
of  resource  supply  and  standards.   These  considerations  lead 
quiLe  naturally  to  the  final  phase  of  UTP,  traffic  assign- 
men  L  . 

Traffic  assignment  is  the  process  of  allocating  trips 
to  an  existing  or  proposed  system  of  transportation  facil- 
ities.  Just  as  in  land  use  forecasting,  traffic  assignment 
brings  design  and  evaluation  considerations  to  bear  and 
the  discussion  of  these  in  the  conceptual  model  of  plan- 
ning activity  is  deferred  to  the  next  two  chapters.   These 
design  and  evaluation  considerations  arise  because  traffic 
assignment  techniques  evaluate  and  compare  alternative 
transportation  systems  by  allowing  proposals  to  be  syntheti- 
cally tested  for  their  traffic  carrying  capabilities  according 
to  various  design  standards. 

The  computational  technique  for  traffic  assignment  is 
one  of  network  analysis.   Traffic  is  assigned  to  a  minimum 
path  tree  in  the  network  from  an  origin  to  all  possible 
destinations.   The  minimum  path  is  that  which  minimizes  some 
travel  function  such  as  time,  cost,  distance,  accidents  or 
a  combination  of  these  factors. 

All  the  traffic  from  one  origin  to  one  destination 
seeks  the  same  minimum  or  equally  minimum  paths.   The  result 
simulates  how  the  trips  would  be  made  in  the  absence  of  any 
capacity  considerations  along  this  otherwise  minimum  path. 
This  is  called  the  "all  or  nothing"  assignment  technique 
and  is  useful  as  a  design  consideration  to  see  how  the  system 
should  operate  unrestrained  by  resource  considerations. 


158 


In  contrast,  "capacity  restraint"  assignment  techniques 
have  been  developed.   These  recognize  that  the  all  or  nothing 
technique  tends  to  overload  some  links  in  the  network.   The 
capacity  restraint  technique  applies  a  restraint  function  as 
the  links  in  the  network  become  overloaded  in  successive 
minimum  path  assignments.   This  restraint  function  could 
be  static,  as  a  certain  maximum  number  of  trips  at  any  time, 
or  iL  could  be  dynamic  relating  capacities  to  volumes  and 
speeds  at  all  times. 

Another  method  developed  by  McLaughlin  (1965)  incor- 
porates linear  graph  analysis  to  assign  traffic.   One 
component  is  the  number  of  trips  from  the  centroid  of  any 
origin  zone  to  the  centroid  of  any  destination  zone  as 
displayed  in  the  trip  table.   The  other  component  is  the 
street  and  its  intersections.   The  trips  sum  to  zero  at 
each  vertex  and  are  the  flow  variable.   The  pressure 
variables  is  the  value  that  travelers  perceive  in  the  choice 
of  a  route.   McLaughlin  formulated  a  value  function  based 
upon  cost  to  reflect  otherwise  indeterminate  subjective 
values  held  by  travelers. 

Summary 

This  chapter  has  considered  forecasting  both  as  a 
phase  in  the  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity  and  as 
a  collection  of  techniques  constituting  this  phase.   The 
purpose  of  forecasting  is  to  manufacture  a  synthetic  inventory 
of  future  planning  conditions.   There  is  feedback  to  the 
analysis  phase  for  the  interpretation  of  this  inventory  and 
feedforeward  from  the  earlier  phases  of  the  planning  process 
for  its  construction  and  scope. 

Given  this  information  and  interpretation,  the  planner 
is  now  ready  to  design  a  plan,  or  a  set  of  alternative  plans, 
to  meet  these  forecasted  conditions  in  a  manner  arising 
from  and  consistent  with  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the 
client  constituency. 


159 


CHAPTER  VI 
DESIGN 


The  design  phase  of  the  conceptual  model  of  planning 
activity  is  both  simple  and  complex.   It  is  simple  because, 
in  its  most  basic  sense,  urban  design  is  a  bounded  problem. 
Prior  phases  have  resulted  in  the  identification  of  demands. 
These  demands  translate  into  facilities  through  the  applica- 
tion of  standards.   Urban  design  is  the  locating  of  these 
facilities  on  the  land  surface  of  the  area  in  question. 
The  amount  of  land  is  bounded  by  physical  constraints,  the 
amounts  and  types  of  facilities  are  bounded  by  demand  con- 
straints.  The  problem  is  simplified  to  a  locational  and 
distributional  one. 

While  this  view  of  urban  design  has  a  conceptual 
clarity  and  an  operational  ease  that  make  it  attractive, 
it  could  easily  result  in  a  design  that  is  sterile,  harsh, 
repulsive  and  inhuman  even  though  it  may  be  mechanically 
functional.   The  design  process  becomes  complex  because  it 
cannot  be  approached  from  the  standpoint  of  mechanical 
functionality  alone.   True,  machines  and  systems  of  services 
must  function  if  an  urban  area  is  to  survive.   But  the  most 
important  functional  operative  in  an  urban  area  is  man  and 
his  refined  sensibilities  demand  an  environment  that  is  not 
only  mechanically  functional  but  also  harmonious,  fitting, 
comfortable  and  aesthetically  in  balance  with  himself,  other 
men,  his  machines  and  facilities,  and  nature. 

This  is  as  awesome  a  mandate  as  has  ever  been  presented 
by  man  to  himself.   It  is  not  new  and  will  never  be  old. 
[t  is  a  mandate  that  comes  from  everyone  in  contact  with  the 
area  in  question.   The  attempts  to  satisfy  the  mandate  affect 


160 


everyone  and,  for  thai  reason,  urban  planning  enjoys  no 
lack  of  spirited  criticism,  at  times,  it  would  seem,  from 
all  sides.   So  it  is  with  a  mixture  of  reverence,  wonder  and 
fear  that  the  urban  planner  takes  up  his  pen  and  accepts 
the  charter  to  design. 

Fortunately,  the  urban  planner  is  not  alone.   It  is 
widely  recognized  that  nearly  equal  participation  in  the 
design  phase  of  urban  planning  is  required  of  architects, 
landscape  architects,  and  engineers  as  well  as  urban  planners 
No  one  of  these  professions  is  necessarily  preordained  to 
take  the  lead  in  this  effort.   In  fact,  this  consideration 
is  ancillary  to  the  need  for  all  to  participate.   The  com- 
position of  t fie  design  team  is,  of  course,  a  function  of 
the  probLem  at  hand  and  the  resources  available.   In  the 
ideal  case  of  a  large  and  well  supported  undertaking,  the 
design  team  should  include  these  professions  as  well  as 
those  of  sociology,  regional  economics,  political  science, 
operations  research,  education  and  many  more. 

The  orchestration  of  these  individuals  and  their 
ideas  is  a  problem  not  without  danger,  and  it  could  well  be 
that  the  single  most  important  member  is  identified  because 
of  his  administrative  capability  as  well  as  his  professional 
contribution . 

The  composition  of  the  design  team  is  ad  hoc  in  nature 
and  it  would  be  difficult  to  construct  a  normative  example. 
Referring  to  the  organizational  aspects  detailed  in  Chapter 
II,  the  key  planning  staff  and  principal  consultants  would 
certainly  be  expected  to  participate.   Tf  the  Technical 
Advisory  Committee  has  been  intimately  involved  in  the 
planning  process  thus  far,  they  certainly  should  be  con- 
sulted.  It  is  not  beyond  feasibility  that  the  Citizens' 
Advisory  Committee  could  be  represented  on  the  design  team. 

There  is,  of  course,  a  strong  element  of  evaluation 
in  any  design  judgement.   When  the  design  team  cannot  agree 
on  a  clearly  superior  design  facet  among  those  considered, 


161 


•  il  ternat  i  ve  plans  should  be  prepared  to  reflect  the  differing 
points  of  view.   Although  evaluation  methods  are  considered 
in  t  lie  next  chapter,  a  system  of  staged  design  and  evaluation 
cycles  could  he  employed,  each  more  detailed  in  agenda  than 
the  previous  to  keep  the  number  of  alternatives  currently 
viable  to  a  manageable  level.   In  this  way,  as  soon  as  an 
alternative  becomes  undesirable,  its  development  ceases, 
and  only  those  judged  to  be  still  possible  continue  to  the 
next  stage. 

An  operational  device  such  as  this  only  reflects,  of 
course,  the  continuum  design  effort  from  the  general  to 
the  specific.   As  the  design  process  travels  along  this 
continuum,  the  input  of  the  urban  planner  gradually  diminishes 
in  relation  to  that  of  the  architect  and  engineer  until, 
finally,  specific  design  facets  of  a  particular  facility 
come  to  bear.   Recognizing  that  is  is  quixotic  to  establish 
the  point  along  the  continuum  where  the  theory  and  practice 
of  urban  planning  defer  to  the  theory  and  practice  of 
architecture  and  engineering,  this  work  nonetheless  proposes 
that  this  point  occurs  somewhere  between  the  gross  locational 
characteristics  of  a  facility  and  the  design  of  the  facility 
itself.   The  continuum  continues  through  this  point  as 
locational  characteristics  affect  the  design  and  the  design 
affects  locational  characteristics. 

All  along  the  design  continuum,  the  urban  planner  and 
the  design  team  as  a  whole  must  consider  many  ideas.   These 
may  be  pedagogically  grouped  into  considerations  of  form 
and  considerations  of  quality. 

Considerations  of  Form 
Webster's  New  World  Dictionary  defines  a  palimpsest  as 
"a  parchment,  table,  etc.  that  has  been  written  upon  or 
inscribed  two  or  three  times,  the  previous  text  or  texts 
having  been  imperfectly  erased  and  remaining,  therefore 
still  partly  visible."  Martin  (1968)  uses  this  marvelous 


162 


word  to  describe  the  form  of  the  city  and  it  is  most  appro- 
priate.  Throughout  the  history  of  the  city,  wave  after 
wave  of  influence  has  left  its  mark  on  the  city  form,  never 
quite  obliterating  the  prior  images. 

In  recent  American  history,  several  individuals  have 
sought  to  identify  these  influences  as  determinants  of  form. 
CoJby  (1933)  identified  opposing  centrifugal  and  centripetal 
forces  as  locational  determinents .   Centrifugal  forces  are 
those  that  cause  a  move  away  from  the  central  part  of  the 
city.   Examples  are  spatial  force  owing  to  central  congestion, 
site  force  owing  to  intensity  of  use  in  the  central  city, 
situational  force  owing  to  the  unnatural  juxtaposition  of 
land  uses  in  the  central  city,  a  force  of  social  evolution 
owing  to  climbing  land  values  and  taxes  in  the  central  city, 
and  a  force  relating  to  the  status  and  organizat i on  of 
occupance.   The  centripetal  forces  of  attraction  to  the 
central  city  are  those  associated  with  site   attraction, 
functional  convenience,  functional  magnetism  and  functional 
prestige . 

Burgess  (1929)  proposed  that,  as  a  city  grows,  it 
expands  radially  from  its  center  resulting  in  a  series  of 
concentric  circles,  each  two  enclosing  a  discrete  zone. 
Recognizing  the  exceptions  caused  by  natural  or  artificial 
barriers,  he  proposed  that  each  zone  has  the  tendency  to 
expand  to  the  next  outer  zone  as  city  growth  occurs.   In 
Chicago,  he  identified  five  such  zones;  the  CBD,  the  zone 
surrounding  the  CBD  in  transition,  the  zone  of  independent 
workingman's  homes,  the  zone  of  better  residences,  and  the 
commuter  zone. 

Hoyt  (1939)  proposed  that,  instead  of  forming  concentric 
circles,  zones  of  similar  land  use  tended  to  be  wedge  shaped, 
radiating  outward  from  the  CBD.   New  development  on  the  arc 
of  the  wedge  tended  to  be  of  the  same  character  as  the 
wedge  itself. 


163 


Harris  and  Ullman  (1945)  agreed  that  such  city  forms 
as  the  concentric  circle  and  the  wedge  do  occur,  but  they 
noted  that  there  were-  several  such  centers  of  circles  and 
origins  of  wedges  in  the  typical  American  city.   Among  them 
are  the  CBD ,  various  districts  of  wholesale  operations,  light 
manufacturing,  heavy  industry,  residential  districts  of 
various  kinds,  and  suburbs  and  satellites.   The  centers  are 
places  oi  high  accessibility  such  as  provided  by  the  inter- 
section of  important  automobile  routes,  rail  lines  or  rapid 
trans  it.  1  ines  . 

Models  such  as  these  have  become  classics  in  modern 
urban  planning,  and  survive  to  this  day  despite  the  now 
forma]  influences  caused  by  the  post-war  population  growth, 
increase  in  disposable  income,  housing  and  shopping  facilities, 
and  the  rapid  rise  in  automobile  ownership.   Factors  such  as 
these  have  made  urban  dwellers  more  mobile  than  ever  before, 
and  this  is  recognized  in  the  more  recent  studies  of  urban 
form  which  consider  the  dimension  of  time. 

Vance  (1966)  has  mapped  seven  sequential  stages  of  the 
development  of  the  CBD.   The  first  stage  is  the  process  of 
inception  which  includes  the  original  siting  of  the  town 
and  is  intimately  associated  with  the  functional  character- 
istics of  the  landscape.   Next  occurring  is  the  process  of 
exclusion  whereby  the  high  rent  paying  abilities  of  certain 
functions  tend  to  locate  these  functions  in  the  CBD,  and 
functions  with  lesser  rent  paying  ability  locate  in  descending 
ability  along  a  rent  gradient  that  has  its  apex  at  the  CBD. 
The  third  stage  is  one  of  segregation  in  which  one  class  of 
high  renters  becomes  so  large  that  it  naturally  subdivides 
and  segregates  into  smaller  units  to  maintain  identity. 
Vance  notes  that  the  New  York  financial  district  has  segre- 
gated into  a  stock-exchange  district  around  Wall  Street, 
the  ship  company  district  on  Park  Row,  advertising  on  Madison 
Avenue,  and  other  corporate  headquarters  on  Park  Avenue, 
in  the  next  temporal  stage  of  growth,  the  CBD  extends  itself 


164 


outward  in  long  thin  alignments  along  arterial  strec 
With  individual  mobility,  these  sections  become  an  integral 
part  of  the  CBD  and  typically  offer  business  servicer, 
equipment  for  example.   The  next  stage  of  readjustment  occurs 
because  of  the  development  of  areas  outside  of  the  CBD  which 
attract  functions  formerly  occurring  in  the  CBD.   In  the 
sixth  stage,  physical  redevelopment  of  the  CBD  takes  place 
so  that  in  the  last  stage,  many  of  the  functions  associated 
with  the  CBD  at  the  beginning  of  the  cycle  are  now  performed 
in  satelite  districts,  and  the  CBD  now  performs  new,  unspec- 
ified and  highly  specialized  functions. 

The  cycle  reoccurs  for  both  the  new  CBD  and  the  satelite 
districts . 

Birch  (1971)  has  proposed  and  tested  the  concept  of 
seven  stages  of  residential  growth.   Stage  one  is  rural  in 
nature  and  characterized  by  very  low  density  single  famil 
units.   Stage  two  is  characterized  by  a  high  rate  of  new 
construction  o£  single  family  units.   Stage  three  occurs 
when  the  area  becomes  fully  developed,  with  high  quality 
relatively  new  single  family  structures  and  perhaps  some 
multi-unit  structures  as  well.   Property  values  and  rents 
are  at  their  maximum.   In  stage  four,  the  structures  built 
in  stage  three  have  aged  and  rents  have  fallen.   Lower  income 
groups  move  into  the  area  and  live  at  a  higher  density  than 
the  original  inhabitants.   In  stage  five,  building  deter- 
ioration continues  and  the  grown  children  of  the  stage  four 
inhabitants  leave  for  other  stage  four  or  stage  two  areas 
of  the  city.   Population  declines  and  average  age  of  the 
inhabitants  is  high.   Stage  six  occurs  when  the  land  become: 
too  valuable  for  stage  five  use  and  the  inhabitants  do  not 
have  enough  political  strength  to  retain  it.   The  land  is 
acquired  and  redeveloped  into  a  stage  three  residential  area, 
but  with  typically  higher  densities.   Stage  seven  occurs 
when  the  recaptured  areas  themselves  decay. 


165 


Theories  such  as  these  emphasize  the  temporal  as  well 
as  the  spatial  aspects  of  urban  form.   Hlumenfeld  (1967) 
likened  the  city  not  to  a  work  of  visual  art  but  rather  to 
a  work  of  music  or  literature.   He  notes  the  single  failure 
of  this  analogy  arises  from  the  fact  that  a  symphony  or  a 
novel  is  the  work  of  one  man  in  a  definite  period  of  time. 
Once  completed,  it  remains  so.   On  the  other  hand,  the  city 
changes  over  time,  with  each  new  wave  of  influence  altering 
what  was  there  before  and  adding  new  forms.   Additions  to 
the  palimsest  never  cease. 

Urban  planners  recognize  that  their  symphonies  wil 
be  "unfinished";  that  their  plans  will  be  subject  to  the 
exigencies  of  politics  and  finance;  that  their  plans  are 
based  on  an  incomplete  knowledge  of  causal  relationships; 
and  that  their  plans  may  be  diluted,  misunderstood,  and 
possibly  wither. 

One  way  out  of  this  problem  is  to  "make  no  little 
plans"  and  to  drive  for  acceptance  through  sheer  audacity, 
force  of  will  and  personality.   An  equally  preferred  method 
is  to  accept  the  complexity  of  the  problem  and  treat  it  as 
one  of  stimulus  provision  -  response  classification  in  the 
classic  manner  of  black  box  simulation. 

The  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency 
map  the  desired  response.   Included  here  are  private 
entrepreneurial,  household,  and  individual  decisions  desired 
as  part  of  that  response. 

The  stimuli  are  public  policies,  the  policies  of  the 
client  constituency,  the  resources  operationally  available 
for  both  planning  and  implementation,  and,  not  to  be 
overlooked,  short  range  changes  in  current  methods  of 
operation . 

The  task  of  the  planner  is  to  assemble  one  or  more 
sets  of  stimuli  which,  when  added  to  the  form  and  policy  now 
existing  in  the  city,  will,  in  his  professional  opinion, 
provoke  varying  degrees  of  the  desired  response. 


166 


The  considerations  of  form  begin  with  statement  of 
the  desired  response.   As  an  example,  Safdie  (1970)  prepared 
an  environmental  code  for  urban  residential  living. 

Every  family  or  individual  must  be  provided  with  an 
outdoor  space  equal  to  or  greater  than  its  interior 
living  space.   This  is  essential  to  proper  functioning 
of  the  family.   The  nature  of  the  spaces  themselves 
would  vary  from  climate  to  climate. 

The  outdoor  space  must  be  continuous  with  the  indoor 
spaces  for  family  functions. 

Sleeping  facilities  for  young  children  should  be 
close  to  those  of  their  parents.   Teenage  or  older 
children  should  have  separate  sleeping  accomodations. 
Families  with  children  of  different  ages  should  have 
two  children's  sleeping  areas. 

Every  child  should  have  a  private  sleeping  space  (a 
North  American  criterion;  other  cultures  may  be 
different).   Children  should  have  work  and  play  space 
of  sufficient  size  for  these  functions. 

House  design  must  allow  the  individual  to  adapt  and 
change  the  dwelling. 

A  family  should  be  able  to  function  normally  without 
hearing  or  being  heard  by  its  neighbors.   "Normal" 
functioning  includes  occasional  fights,  playing  loud 
music  or  instruments,  children  playing  and  running 
around.   A  decibel  rating  similar  to  that  of  a  single 
family  house  walls  with  a  six-foot  air  space  should 
be  considered  minimal. 

The  family  should  be  able  to  carry  on  normal  functions 
without  being  observed  by  others. 

The  living  and  dining  spaces  should  not  be  observable 
from  another  dwelling  closer  than  one  hundred  feet. 

In  the  Florida  climate,  glass  area  should  not  face 
south  or  west  unless  adequately  protected.   In  the 
Quebec  climate,  some  openings  and  living  spaces  should 
receive  sun.   A  dwelling  should  receive  at  least  three 
(four,  six)  hours  of  sunshine  per  day. 

In  hot  climates,  openings  should  be  arranged  to 
capture  any  prevailing  winds  and  make  dwellings 
less  dependent  on  mechanical  air-conditioning. 


167 


North  America  is  traditionally  a  single-family-house 
culture.   It  is  mandatory  that  the  dwelling  unit  must 
be  recognizable  and  definable  from  the  outside  by  the 
occupant  when  he  is  in  its  immediate  vicinity. 

Access  to  the  house  should  be  through  pleasant,  space 
in  which  there  is  daylight.   It  should  be  possible 
to  sit  or  talk  to  people.   No  accumulation  of  odors. 
Provision  for  children  similar  to  the  experience  of 
a  residential  street. 

A  child  of  this  age  should  be  able  to  leave  his  family 
dwelling  on  his  own  and  wander  to  a  minimum  distance 
of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet,  meet  at  least  six  to 
ten  children  of  his  age,  and  find  some  play  areas. 

Access  to  play  areas  and  play  fields  within  an  area 
of  five  acres. 

Access  on  their  own  to  cultural  and  recreational 
facilities  such  as  movie  houses,  libraries,  parks, 
sport  centers,  etc. 

Within  the  community  there  must  be  spaces  where  adults 
can  spontaneously  meet  or  just  sit  around. 

The  ideal  arrangement  for  the  North  American  family 
of  any  income  group  is  to  be  able  to  drive  into  the 
kitchen. 

Within  the  inner  community  of  5,000,  pedestrians  and 
vehicles  should  never  cross. 

Public  transportation  is  mandatory  so  that  the  family 
will  not  be  dependent  on  one  (or  two)  cars. 

Entrance  to  houses  should  be  shared  by  about  four 
families,  to  permit  social  inter -dependency .   This 
assumption  may  be  wrong  in  number  or  even  in  its  basic 
form,  but  something  of  the  sort  must  be  established. 
It  is  certainly  true  in  the  selfbuilt  favellas  of 
Latin  America. 

People  need  to  be  able  to  identify  with  a  larger 
community  unit.   This  can  be  observed  in  most 
vernacular  village  architecture. 

The  ideal  community  is  a  mixture  of  various  individuals 
and  families  of  different  size  and  make  up.   Older 
people,  families  with  young  or  older  children,  single 
people . 


168 


The  community  must  also  have  within  it  a  mixture  of 
families  of  varying  professions  and  racial  origin 
(this  of  course  is  a  value  judgment  that  can  he 
challenged,  but  writing  it  down  forces  one  to  fate  it). 

Facilities  beyond  the  reach  of  individual  low  income 
families,  such  as  work  shops,  car  shop  facilities, 
furniture  making  shops,  greenhouses  and  plant  supplies, 
should  be  provided  by  the  community. 

Within  fifteen  minutes'  walking  distance  the  family 
should  find  a  medium-size  park,  shopping  facilities 
of  a  minimum  of  100,000  square  feet,  a  variety  of 
cultural  and  recreational  facilities,  elementary 
school,  and  some  employment  opportunities. 

Within  ten  minutes  by  mass  transportation  or  car  must 
be  major  employment  opportunities  of  varying  types, 
regional  shopping  facilities  of  a  minimum  of  500,000 
square  feet,  high  schools  and  trade  schools,  a  major 
regional  park. 

The  community  must  be  designed  so  as  to  take  full 
advantage  of  natural  amenities,  existing  tree  areas, 
natural  topography,  views. 

New  construction  in  an  existing  city  must  achieve 
physical  and  social  continuity  with  existing  con- 
struction .  1 

Similar  sets  of  criteria  could  be  devised  to  describe 
the  working  environment,  the  recreational  environment,  the 
travel  environment,  the  shopping  environment  and  so  forth. 
These  desired  responses  set  constraints  on  the  forms  of  the 
stimuli . 

It  is  important  to  note  that  the  effect  of  these 
stimuli  over  time  has  some  important  secondary  and  tertiary 
aspects.   There  is  first  of  all  a  period  of  debate  on  the 
stimuli  and  expected  response.   There  is  a  period  of  flux 
during  which  the  stimuli  are  instituted  or  constructed. 
There  is  a  period  of  reaction  and  response  to  the  stimuli, 
hopefully  in  the  direction  expected.   These  stimuli  may 
provoke  a  response  that  is  itself  a  stimulus  to  further 
response.   And  lastly,  the  response  may  be  time  lagged, 
dampened  or  amplified  beyond  the  expected.   It  is  important 


169 


to  consider  all  these  considerations  in  assessing  the  value 
of  likely  responses. 

Of  course  it  is  recognized  that  the  separation  between 
form  and  quality  is  artificial  as  they  affect  each  other  in 
a  manner  similar  to  site  selection  and  building  design. 
Safdie's  criterion  that  every  family  should  be  able  to  drive 
into  its  kitchen  tells  us  something  about  form  but  it  is 
clear  that  the  quality  of  that  design  must  be  examined. 

Considerations  of  Quality 

In  the  practice  of  urban  design,  there  exists  an 
often  repeated  litany  of  adjectival  calls-to-arms  exhorting 
the  practitioner  to  excellence.   Such  terms  as  color, 
texture,  grain,  lightness,  symmetry,  proportion,  balance, 
fitness,  size,  density,  harmony,  difference,  extension, 
contrast,  accent,  expression,  vista  and  scale  are  familiar 
to  the  profession. 

Unfortunately,  there  is  no  formula  that  combines  these 
qualities  in  ways  to  insure  design  of  high  quality.   Rather 
there  are  general  guidelines  for  each  of  them  which  state 
that,  in  the  absence  of  deliberate  discordance  for  effect, 
some  combine  in  ways  more  pleasing  than  others.   Considered 
singly  and  in  combinations,  they  are  known  to  evoke  certain 
responses  as  viewed,  used  and  lived  in. 

Since  the  urban  planner  is  interested  in  evoking 
certain  responses,  however  complex  or  ill-defined  they  may 
be,  he  needs  to  be  familiar  with  these  relationships, 
although  on  a  scale  larger  than  that  used  in  building  design. 
He  must  design  for  the  response,  for  human  experience. 

Because  both  the  response  set  and  the  qualitative 
conditions  are  so  complex,  urban  planning,  like  architec- 
ture and  engineering,  is  a  true  creative  effort.   Proficiency 
is  established  through  practice  and  urban  planners  undergo 
internships  similar  to  those  of  other  professions  with  the 
same  degree  of  creativity. 


170 


The  urban  planner  must  have  highly  sharpened  sensibil- 
ities to  urban  life  and  an  intimate  and  personal  knowledge 
of  the  natural  and  man-made  landscape.   For  this  reason, 
considerations  of  design  quality  begin  with  a  personal  and 
technical  site  analysis. 

The  technical  site  analysis  is  relatively  straight 
foreward  and  is  comprised  mainly  of  base  maps  and  surveys 
noted  in  Chapter  III.   Simonds  (1961)  details  an  excellent 
version  uf  a  personal  analysis  in  which  the  planner  gets 
the  feel  of  the  area,  its  relationship  to  its  surroundings, 
and  the  character  of  the  area.   This  character  includes  the 
best  views,  the  poor  views,  the  objectionable  views,  the 
vegetation  which  should  be  preserved  or  removed,  off  site 
nuisances,  logical  avenues  of  ingress  and  egress,  the  direc- 
tion and  force  of  the  sun  and  wind,  protection  from  these 
elements  or  their  emphasis  as  appropriate,  natural  and 
topological  features  affecting  development  and  the  overall 
effect  of  buildings,  roads  and  structures  currently  in 
place . 

Site  qualities  by  themselves  suggest  qualitative 
design  considerations.   Simonds  classifies  several  such 
site   conditions  as  the  pastoral  site,  the  heavy  industrial 
site,  the  site  oriented  to  major  vistas,  the  windswept  site, 
the  site  dominated  by  the  highway,  the  resort  site,  the 
site  oriented  to  a  body  of  water  and  many  more. 

Consider,  by  way  of  example,  the  steeply  sloped   site. 
If  it  were  proposed  that  this  might  be  a  candidate  for 
residential  land  use,  certain  qualitative  design  considera- 
tions come  to  bear  arising  from  the  site  itself.   Table  VI-1 
lists  the  site  features  and  the  corresponding  design  con- 
siderations in  this  case. 

It  has  been  noted  earlier  that  there  is  a  large  cross- 
over of  influence  between  form  and  the  response  that  a  form 
tends  to  evoke.   Lynch  (1960)  has  distinguished  five  such 


171 


Table  Vl-1 

Site  Features/Design  Consideration: 
Steeply  Sloped  Site2 


Site  Features 


Qualitative  Design 
Considerations 


Contours  are  major 
plan  factors. 


Placing  of  plan  elements 
parallel  to  contours  is 
indicated . 


2.  Areas  of  equal  elevation   2 
are  narrow  bands. 

3.  Sizeable  level  areas  are   3 
nonexistant . 


The  top  of  the  slope  is 
most  exposed  to  the 
elements . 


The  essence  of  slope  is 
rise  and  fall. 


Perhaps  the  slope  grade 
is  too  steep  for  auto- 
mobile traffic. 


Bar  and  ribbon  plan 
forms  are  suggested. 

To  create  such,  earth 
moving  and  retaining 
walls  are  suggested. 

Perhaps  the  top  should 
be  developed  for  its 
view  and  protection  of 
the  slope. 

Terraced,  split-level, 
and  multideck  schemes 
are  suggested.   Ramps 
and  steps  are  indicated. 

Access  is  necessary  from 
the  side. 


10. 


The  pull  of  gravity  is 
down . 


The  slope  has  a  dynamic 
landscape  quality. 

The  slope  emphasises  the 
meeting  of  earth  and 
air . 

A  sloping  site  affords 
great  interest  in  view. 


10, 


Excepting  those  structures 
designed  to  look  daring, 
designs  must  express 
stability. 

Dynamic  plan  forms 
are  indicated. 

The  land  side  might 
express  an  anchoring  and 
the  air  side  fly  free. 

Artifical  landscape 
development  to  create 
interest  may  be 
minimized . 


172 


Table  VI -1 ,  cont . 

11.  The  slope  is  oriented     11.   Plan  orientation  is 
outwards.  normally  outward  and  down 

with  necessary  protec- 
tion from  the  elements. 

12.  A  sloping  site  has       12.   Water  must  be  intercepted 
particular  drainage  and  diverted  or  allowed 
problems.  to  pass  under  and 

through. 

13.  A  slope  brings  out  many   13.   The  play  of  running 
desireable  qualities  of       water  is  a  plan  opport- 
water.  unity. 


173 


forms  and  has  proposed  that  they  serve  to  define  the 
imagery  of  the  city  as  experienced. 

One  such  response  is  evoked  by  pathways.   These  are 
the  channels  along  which  people  move  and  are  comprised  of 
walkways,  streets,  transit  lines,  canals,  escalators, 
elevators  and  the  like.   They  can  further  be  grouped  into 
networks,  major  ones  for  the  street  system,  minor  ones 
for  the  neighborhood,  and  micro  ones  for  the  avenues  of 
ingress  and  egress  of  a  facility.   Structures  and  Jandscape 
along  the  path  give  it  identity.   Paths  have  qualities  of 
importance,  proximity,  activity,  direction,  continuity, 
motion  and  scale. 

Another  response  is  evoked  by  edges.   These  are  the 
linear  boundaries  of  different  parts  of  districts  of  the 
city  or  of  the  city  itself.   Edges  have  the  qualities  of 
penetrability  or  impenetrability,  disruption  of  continuity, 
visual  impact  and  limit. 

As  opposed  to  the  linear  qualities  of  paths  and  edges, 
districts  evoke  areal  responses.   Districts  are  areas  of 
uniformity  of  interest,  sometimes  poorly  defined  however. 
Examples  are  uptown,  downtown,  the  CBD ,  residential  areas, 
industrial  areas,  the  "Near  North  Side",  the  "Back  of  the 
Yards",  "The  Block",  the'Vieux  Carre",  and  so  forth. 
Depending  on  their  degree  of  definition,  districts  have  the 
qualities  of  entry  and  exit,  thematic  continuity,  and 
spatial  extent. 

Landmarks  are  places  of  reference,  generally  non- 
dimensional  in  nature.   They  are  promient  visual  images 
even  though  they  may  be  relatively  small,  as  a  clock  or 
a  statue.   Landmarks  have  the  qualities  of  singularity  of 
image,  orientation,  contrast,  prominence,  distinction  and 
identity. 

The  fifth  formal  image  identified  by  Lynch  is  the  node. 
A  node  is  a  center  of  activity  distinguished  from  a  landmark 
by  its  active  rather  than  passive  nature.   They  are  the  focal 


174 


points  of  the  city,  typically  located  at  the  intersections 
of  major  paths.   Nodes  have  the  qualities  of  dynamics, 
central ity,  interchange,  focus,  junction  and  decision. 

Lynch  suggests  that  the  analysis  of  such  forms  and  their 
qualities,  via  interpretive  studies  of  the  citizens'  res- 
ponses to  them,  will  enbale  the  city  planner  to  compose  a 
composite  image  of  the  city.   Then  design  would  take  the 
direction  of  preserving  attractive  images,  enhancing  mediocre 
images  and  changing  objectionable  images. 

Some  aspects  of  the  essential  mobility  of  urban  life 
have  been  examined.   This  motion  may  be  controlled  by  the 
urban  planner  to  evoke  certain  responses  such  as  speed, 
direction,  and  ease  of  mobility.   Simonds  has  catagorized 
a  number  (if  qualitative  aspects  of  design  in  accordance 
with  their  effect  on  man. 

Man  is  affected  by  horizontal  motion,  for  instance-, 
because  horizontal  motion  provides  efficiency,  freedom, 
choice  of  direction,  change  of  direction,  stability,  control  , 
and  ease  of  vision  of  and  in  motion.   Downward  motion  has 
the  qualities  of  less  effort,  retreat,  refuge,  return  to 
the  primitive,  nature,  confinement,  protection,  privacy, 
economy,  simplicity  and  increased  interest  in  the  things  of 
earth.   Upward  motion  has  the  qualities  of  force,  exhilaration, 
accomplishment,  potential,  detachment,  supremacy,  command, 
increased  concern  for  safety  and  visual  interest  in  overhead 
planes  and  the  sky. 

Man  is  encouraged  to  move  in  logical  sequences  of 
progression,  along  paths  of  least  resistance,  toward  that 
which  pleases,  is  fitting  and  wanted,  toward  change,  toward 
that  which  is  interesting  and  curious,  towards  points  of 
highest  contrast  and  richest  color.   He  moves  toward 
exposure,  if  adventurous;  toward  order,  if  tired  of  con- 
fusion; toward  confusion,  if  bored  with  order;  toward  pro- 
tection, if  threatened;  and  toward  objects,  areas  or  spaces 
that  suit  his  mood  or  need. 


175 


However,  man  has  some  degree  of  difficulty  in  moving. 
Indeed,  it  has  been  the  technological  goal  of  urban  planning, 
and  urban  transportation  planning  in  particular,  to  ease 
this  difficulty,  generally  called  the  friction  of  space 
(llaig,  1927). 

Hawley  (1950)  noted  that  the  physical  pattern  of  urban 
life  is  largely  the  result  of  this  friction  of  space  as 
manifested  in  time-cost  distance.   Actual  distance,  as  it 
effects  human  response,  is  largely  dependent  on  the  techno- 
logical developments  which  overcome  the  friction  of  space. 
If  the  technology  is  such  that  the  time-cost  per  mile  ratio 
if  high,  the  accessibility  of  any  one  area  is  small  and 
that  area  is  therefore  limited  in  its  number  of  potential 
uses.   If  the  technology  is  such  that  the  time-cost  per  mile 
ratio  is  low,  differentiation  and  specialization  of  land  use 
can  be  high. 

Isard  (1960)  noted  that  this  measure  of  the  friction 
of  space  could  include  fuel  comsumption,  the  number  of 
stops,  the  number  of  intervening  opportunities,  and  the 
social  distance  defined  by  factors  such  as  the  quality  of 
information  possessed  by  interacting  units,  cultural  patterns, 
and  economic  and  social  linkages. 

To  this  concept  of  the  friction  of  space  one  may 
conveniently  add  the  Simonds  qualitative  descriptors  of 
the  unpleasant,  monotonous,  uninteresting,  dull,  obvious, 
undesireable ,  uninspiring,  forbidding,  demanding,  dangerous, 
ugly  and  unsuitable. 

The  futility  of  attempting  to  consider  qualitative 
aspects  of  urban  design  out  of  context  is  fully  acknow- 
ledged here.   The  designer  must  indeed  be  an  artist,  working 
in  the  sincere  hope  that,  in  the  application  of  his  knowledge, 
he  can  provide  an  environment  that  is  both  functional  and 
aesthetic  to  the  user  and  beholder.   Functionality  comes 
easier  than  taste,  discrimination,  style  and  balance.   It 
has  been  noted  earlier  that  functionality  alone  is  not 


176 


sufficient.   But  functionality  combined  with  an  insensitive 
use  of  style  is  not  sufficient  as  well.   To  use  the  material 
outlined  here  in  such  a  recipe-like  fashion  will  result  in 
a  design  that  is  not  aesthetic  but  arty,  mannered,  stylized 
and  fey. 

The  question,  ultimately,  must  be  begged.   The  urban 
planner  must  design  for  the  appropriate  human  experience. 
He  must  be  sensitive  enough,  by  way  of  his  own  training, 
to  experience  fully  and  personally  an  abstract  design  concept 
He  must  be  sensitive  enough  to  vicariously  experience  the 
feelings  of  those  for  whom  he  plans.   In  addition  to  being 
technical  and  operational,  he  must  be  humanist  in  philosophy 
and  temperment,  contempletive  and  universal  in  interest. 
The  boldest  plans  are  fired  in  the  crucible  of  humility. 

Operational  Considerations 
Urban  design  is  so  large  and  complex  a  problem  that 
it  is  helpful  to  conceive  of  modi  operendi .   The  various 
approaches  depend  upon  the  constraints  of  the  problem  and 
the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency.   The 
first  general  constraint  is  that  the  development  of  a  city 
occurs  over  a  long  period  of  time.   Add  to  this  the  fact 
that  the  client  constituency  changes  over  time  and  the  design 
constraints  become  at  various  times  changeable,  transient, 
competing  and  subject  to  different  emphases.   Add  to  this 
the  fact  that,  in  most  cases,  the  substance  of  the  plan 
deals  not  with  a  clear  unobstructed  plane,  but  with  land 
currently  in  use,  with  a  city  currently  composed  of  struc- 
tures, people,  systems  and  many  planning  problems,  and  the 
planner  is  genuinely  challenged. 

Spreiregen  (1965)  has  noted  several  approaches  to 
this  problem.   The  idea  central  to  all  of  them  is  to  design 
a  skeletal  outline  based  on  the  principles  of  urban  activity 
systems,  spaces,  masses,  circulation  patterns,  growth  and 
change,  urban  scale,  and  the  ability  of  man  to  comprehend 
his  surroundings. 


177 


The  skeleton  is  such  that  there  is  ample  emphasis  and 
direction  for  the  proper  fleshing  in  of  i t ,  in  due  time. 
This,  of  course,  is  a  matter  of  risk  but  the  changeable 
nature  and  immensity  of  the  problem  to  begin  with   preclude 
it  having  a  determinate  solution. 

What  part  of  the  skeleton  to  begin  with  is  a  function 
of  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency. 
If  these  goals  and  objectives  reflect  the  fact  that  the 
constituency  is  most  concerned  about  aspects  of  circulation 
and  accessibility,  then  the  logical  place  to  begin  is  with 
the  transportation  system.   There  is  no  quarrel  that  the 
urban  transportation  system  is  one  of  the  primary  determin- 
ants of  urban  form  and  quality.   Nor  is  there  argument  that 
the  system  must  not  only  satisfy  functional  constraints, 
but  that  it  has  socio-economic,  political  and  psychological 
effects.   These  considerations  make  it  a  favorite  starting 
point  in  urban  design. 

Closely  allied  with  the  transportation  system  are 
various  questions  of  land  use.   From  a  design  standpoint, 
the  first  problem  is  to  determine  what  uses  to  site  first. 
Again,  clues  may  be  found  in  the  goals  and  objectives  of 
the  client  constituency  and  the  primary  community  function. 
These  should  not  normally  be  in  conflict. 

If  the  client  constituency  demonstrates  most  concern 
for  family  housing  conditions,  then  the  logical  place  to 
begin  is  with  residential  land  use.   In  the  absence  of  such 
specific  direction,  the  urban  planner  often  begins  by  con- 
sidering the  placement  of  open  space.   Spreiregen  notes  that 
this  is  a  most  flexible  position,  with  open  space  not  only 
reserved  for  use  as  such,  but  for  possible  future  development 
of  residential,  commercial,  industrial  and  transportation 
uses.   A  clear  distinction  needs  to  be  made,  however,  between 
open  space  reserved  for  future  development  and  open  space 
reserved  for  "non-development",  that  is,  to  remain  open 
space  permanently.   The  latter  suffers  from  the  unfortunate 


178 


quality  of  always  being  "in  the  market"  for  subsequent  pro- 
posals and  strong  justification  and  support  are  necessary 
to  establish  permanent  open  space  as  a  viable  and  necessary 
land  use  in  the  public  mentality. 

Often  it  is  best  to  first  site  those  land  uses  that 
are  the  most  conceptually  constrained,  secondly,  the  next 
so,  and  so  forth.   Typically,  industrial  land  uses  are  the 
most  constrained  owing  to  their  need  for  transportation, 
access  to  employment,  juxtaposition  to  complimentary  use 
and  need  for  large  and  integral  areas.   Another  constraint 
arises  from  the  protection  of  other  land  uses  from  the 
nuisances  of  industry.   If  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the 
client  constituency  and  the  economic  analyses  of  the  planner 
demonstrate  the  need  to  attract  industry,  this  argument  is 
greatly  strengthened. 

Another  design  emphasis  could  be  one  of  unifying  the 
impact  of  public  decisions  in  the  areas  of  not  only  trans- 
portation facilities,  but  also  to  include  urban  renewal, 
the  construction  of  governmental  facilities,  and  the  improve- 
ment of  governmental  operations  across  the  whole  spectrum 
of  governmental  concern.   An  area  could  be  designated  as 
one  of  intense,  cooperative  and  unified  change,  so  scheduled 
and  budgeted,  with  other  areas  to  follow  in  a  priority 
according  to  their  need. 

Closely  allied  with  this  is  the  design  technique  of 
siting  even  a  single  governmental  facility  or  complex,  and 
the  changes,  private  incentives,  and  ramifications  that  occur 
within  and  about  the  area  in  question. 

Another  important  design  consideration  deals  with  the 
integration  rather  than  separation  of  land  uses.   Jacobs 
(1961)  has  had  a  profound  effect  on  the  practice  of  urban 
planning  by  clearly  noting  that  the  vibrant  and  cosmopolitan 
life  style  of  the  city  comes  about  because  of  an  admixture 
of  land  uses  over  different  times  of  the  day.   A  familiar 
technique  is  to  integrate  commercial,  residential  and 


L79 


recreational  land  uses  ,-is  in  Le  Corbusier's  Marseille  Block 
and  Safdle's  Habitat. 

Once  again  it  is  recognized  that  many  of  these  con- 
siderations lose  meaning  when  discussed  outside  of  the 
context  of  a  specific  problem.   Within  this  context,  even 
the  same  approach  is  likely  to  diverge  into  several  alterna- 
tives.  This  is  entirely  consistent  with  good  planning 
practice  and  many  times  it  becomes  difficult  to  select  the 
best  plan  from  those  that,  at  the  surface  at  least,  appear 
equally  good.   Before  proceeding  to  these  concepts  of  evalua- 
tion in  the  next  chapter,  this  chapter  concludes  with  a 
simplified  design  example  based  upon  the  operational  considera 
tions  of  demand. 

An  Example 

Consider  the  hypothetical  example  of  siting  two  types 
of  recreational  activities,  swimming  pools  and  golf  courses, 
for  the  residents  of  three  residential  areas,  each  alike 
in  characteristics  germane  to  the  problem.   There  are  no 
such  facilities  currently  available  and  the  goals  and 
objectives  of  the  client  constituency  reflect  the  need  for 
them  to  the  exclusion  of  all  other  considerations.   There 
is  no  problem  associated  with  the  finances  necessary  to 
construct  and  operate  these  facilities,  be  they  public  or 
private  in  nature. 

Admittedly,  this  problem  is  simplified  to  make  the 
following  point:   these  facilities  can  be  sited  on  the 
basis  of  demand  satisfaction. 

Suppose  that  there  are  800  families  in  each  of  the 
three  areas  and  that,  through  the  use  of  surveys  or  analogy 
or  national  averages  or  any  of  the  other  techniques  detailed 
earlier,  the  planner  can  construct  demand  curves  for  these 
facilities  as  shown  in  Figure  VI-1  (a). 

The  abcissa  of  Figure  VI-1  (a)  is  a  measure  of  the 
friction  of  space,  including  all  the  factors  earlier  detailed 


180 


o 
h- 


-z. 

or 
If 


in 

Ld 

UJ 

T 

_) 

i 

o: 

U. 

< 

iii 

Li. 

V 

O 

SWIMMING 


FRICTION    OF    SPACE 
(o) 


FRICTION    OF    SPACE 
(b) 

Figure  VI-1 
Example  Demand  Curves,  Golf  and  Swimming 


181 


that  make  it  difficult  or  unpleasant  to  participate.   As 
might  be  expected,  the  curves  in  VI -I  (a)  show  that  t he 
families  are  unwilling  to  overcome  a   great  friction  of 
space  to  go  swimming.   Reductions  in  the  friction  at  the 
low  end  result  in  greatly  increased  participation  until 
some  limiting  maximum  is  reached. 

For  golf,  on  the  other  hand,  the  curve  demonstrates 
that  some  families  have  such  an  "investment"  of  time,  money, 
and  interest  in  this  activity  that  they  are  willing  to 
overcome  large  frictions  to  participate.   Conversely, 
reducing  the  friction  of  space  will  not  materially  effect 
the  level  of  participation. 

if  the  planner  were  operating  to  provide  for  today's 
demand  alone,  he  would  only  need  to  know  the  size  of  these 
facilities  in  order  to  site  them  properly.   If  the  standard 
size  of  a  swimming  pool  were  such  to  accomodate  300  families 
and,  a  golf  course,  1600  families,  one  could  proceed. 

But  let  us  assume  we  are  also  planning  for  ten  years 
hence.   Suppose  the  planner  forecasts  that  there  will  be 
then  1000  families  in  each  of  the  three  areas.   This  is  the 
new  gross  demand.   But  what  of  the  new  standards  of  sat- 
isfaction?  In  prior  sections,  it  was  noted  that  standards 
must  be  forecast  as  well  as  demand. 

Suppose  that  the  planner  feels  that  people  will  tend 
to  swim  only  if  the  pool  is  more  accessible  than  is  today 
the  case.   Otherwise,  their  interests  will  be  such  that, 
even  considering  the  effect  of  more  leisure  time,  they  will 
be  diverted  to  other  activities.   This  is  shown  as  the  swim 
curve  of  Figure  VI-1  (b),  and  reflects  a  change  in  the 
perception  of  the  friction  of  space. 

This  results  in  two  design  considerations  and,  quite 
possibly,  two  design  alternatives.   One  involves  the 
retaining  or  assuming  the  same  friction  of  space  and  designing 
a  greater  number  of  smaller  pools,  the  greater  number  result- 
ing from  the  rise  of  the  gross  demand  and  the  change  in  the 


182 


demand  curve  from  VI -1  (a)  to  VI -1  (b) .   The  pools  would  be 
smaller  because  they  would  not  be  accessible  to,  say  300 
families,  but  to  some  lesser  number  because  of  tbe  steepening 
of  the  demand  curve.   The  other  design  alternative  involves 
retaining  the  present  size  pool,  or  possibly  even  increasing 
it,  and  reducing  the  friction  of  space  or  access  to  the  pool 
sufficient  to  utilize  its  size.   In  this  case,  the  number  of 
pools  may  only  go  up  as  a  result  of  the  rise  in  the  gross 
demand  and  the  siting  would  revolve  about  reducing  the  fric- 
tion of  space. 

Suppose  that  the  planner,  in  forecasting  the  golf 
demand,  feels  that  the  nature  of  this  demand  will  not  change, 
but  that  the  percent  of  participating  families  will  rise 
as  shown  in  Figure  VI- 1  (b).   Suppose  he  feels  too  that  the 
rules  of  play  will  not  change  and  that  his  current  standard 
Ls  applicable.   Then  his  problem  is  much  simpler  than  that 
with  the  swimming  pools  and  he  need  only  plan  for  gross 
demand  factored  for  increased  participation.   The  location 
of  the  one  or  more  golf  courses  can  be  based  upon  con- 
siderations other  than  the  friction  of  space.   The  demand 
function  for  golf  closely  approximates  those  constructed 
for  recreational  boating  and  camping  in  this  respect. 

The  overall  solution  to  the  problem  (no  matter  which 
of  the  swimming  pool  alternatives  is  deemed  better)  is  to 
locate  these  facilities  such  that  they  satisfy  the  forecasted 
net  demand  according  to  the  forecasted  demand  curves.   These 
curves  describe  a  surface,  of  course,  radiating  outward  in 
all  directions  from  one  ordinate  (at  the  facility)  over  an 
abcissa  plane  (the  land  surface).   The  swimming  demand  surface 
undulates  as  the  falling  surface  graient  from  one  pool 
intersects  the  rising  surface  gradient  of  a  second  pool  as 
it  is  approached.   The  golf  demand  surface  hardly  undulates 
at  all. 

The  undulations  are  not  a  function  of  distance  but  of 
the  friction  of  space.   If,  for  instance, a  pool  abutted  some 


1  H*3 


physical,  social,  economic,  or  political  obstacle  which 
greatly  added  to  the  friction  of  space  from  that  direction, 
residents  near  that  pool  on  the  other  side  of  that  obstacle 
may  find  a  further  (in  distance)  pool  to  be  nearer  (in 
overcoming  friction).   Through  the  examination  of  this 
demand  surface  then,  the  planner  can  properly  site  the 
swimming  pools. 

Summary 
The  problem  faced  by  the  planner  in  urban  design  is  to 
provide  programs  and  facilities  that  will  evoke  certain 
human  responses  when  used.   The  nature  of  these  responses 
is  largely  determined  by  the  client  constituency.   These 
responses  to  facility  or  program  demands  are  accompl ished 
through  the  professional  education  and  experience  of  the 
planner,  coupled  with  a  highly  empathic  sense  of  what  is 
not  only  functional  but  also  fitting. 


Notes 

1.  After  Moshe  Safdie,  Beyond  Habitat,  pp.  158-163. 

2.  After  J.  0.  Simonds,  Landscape  Architecture:   The 
Shaping  of  Man's  Natural  Environment,  pp .  62-63 . 


184 


CHAPTER  VII 
EVALUATION 

This  chapter  discusses  the  concepts  of  urban  plan 
evaluation  with  the  implicit  notion  that  these  concepts  are 
used  in  decision  making.   It  specifically  addresses  the 
means  of  evaluating  alternative  plans  that  are  rather  fully 
developed.   It  is  recognized  that,  within  the  planning 
process  to  this  point,  much  evaluation  has  already  been 
made;  that  decisions  arising  from  such  evaluations  have 
occurred  from  the  start. 

The  fact  that  the  substance  of  this  chapter  affects 
earlier  phases  of  the  planning  process  is  not  a  fa  Lai  defect. 
This  is  just  another  example  of  the  point  already  made  that 
urban  planning  is  cyclical  and  iterative  with  feedforeward 
and  feedback  from  each  phase.   Indeed,  it  is  not  uncommon  to 
design  staged  or  nested  evaluations  within  the  process  to 
accomodate  this. 

At  each  of  these  stages,  or  perhaps  only  at  this  one 
should  the  planning  permit,  the  urban  planner  needs  to 
consult  with  the  decision  maker  to  pursue  one  alternative 
among  those  considered  feasible  to  that  point.   From  this 
"short  list",  one  alternative  is  selected  as  being  prefer- 
able to  the  rest,  the  decision  made,  planning  or  implementary 
effort  consolidated,  and  all  resources  are  then  directed 
foreward  along  a  single  path. 

Normally,  many  such  consultations  are  necessary.   Some- 
times the  decision  maker  is  an  individual,  sometimes  a 
group,  for  various  decisions  sometimes  different  individuals 
and  different  groups.   All  these  people  participate  in  the 
client  constituency  and  sometimes  the  client  constituency 
itself  may  make  the  decision. 


18' 


However  the  decision  maker  is  identified,  it  is  his 
everlasting  and  sole  prerogative  to  make  the  decision. 
However  obdurate  and  arbitrary  it  may  seem  in  context,  it 
is  his  prerogative  and  he  is  not  about  to  relinquish  it. 
If,  on  the  other  hand,  he  enlists  the  aid  of  the  urban 
planner  in  evaluating  the  alternatives  open  to  him,  such  aid 
may  take  one  or  several  of  the  forms  described  here. 

As  before,  the  urban  planner  does  not  stand  alone  as 
the  sole  source  of  evaluative  aid.   Steger  and  Lakshmanan 
(1968)  have  noted  that  the  urban  planning  decision  maker 
should  ideally  have  access: 

to  historian,  architect,  ecologist  and  anthropologist, 

for  what  articulate  human  beings  have  said,  and  say, 

about  the  quality  of  their  environment; 

to  sociologists  for  the  application  of  content  analysis; 

to  opinion  pollsters  for  what  people  claim  they  want, 

directLy ; 

to  the  econometrician  and  statistician  for  measuring 

what  has  and  actually  is  chosen  by  consumers; 

to  social  scientist  for  descriptive  and  normative 

models  of  consumer  behavior; 

to  the  social  psychologist,  for  structural  and 

constrained  methods  for  conducting  interviews; 

to  system  analysts,  for  structured  experimental 

si  tuations ; 

to  the  political  scientist  and  statistician,  for 

intensive  analysis  of  voting  behavior,  and  for  methods 

to  simulate  voting  behavior;  and, 

to  public  administrators,  for  improved  ways  to 

ascertain  the  trade-offs  between  effects  measures 

desired  by  community  leadership . L 

Steger  and  Lakshmanan  have  further  detailed  a  global 
solution  that  takes  into  account  the  differentiated  effects 
over  the  variables  of  investments,  times,  populations, 
economies,  areas,  social  indicators  and  projects.   Lt 
describes  the  different  response  sets  of  various  plans  over 
the  ranges  of  these  variables. 

Later  in  this  chapter,  various  operational  evaluative 
techniques  will  be  detailed,  beginning  with  the  most  simple 
and  proceeding  along  a  continuum  to  those  that  approximate 
this  global  conceptual  solution.   Before  this  however,  tlie 


186 


conceptual  model  of  urban  planning  activity  will  be  examined 
to  elaborate  on  each  of  these  variables. 

The  Conceptual  Model  of  the  Evaluation  Phase 
Consider  Figure  VII-1.   It  shows  the  conceptual  model 
of  planning  activity  developed  to  this  point,  emphasizing 
the  evaluation  phase.   Sociologists  and  political  scientists 
have  long  been  interested  in  the  general  question:   "Who 
governs,  where,  when,  why,  how  and  to  what  effect?"   These 
considerations  are  reviewed  within  the  context  of  the  model . 

Substantive  Scope 

The  substantive  scope  axis  reflects  and  measures  the 
range  of  issues  (Bolan,  1969)  or  outputs  (Clark,  1968) 
associated  with  the  evaluation  of  alternative  urban  plans. 

Bolan  hypothesizes  that  if  the  issues  are  such  that 
the  consequences  of  action  are  easily  predictable,  if  the 
action  is  easily  accomplished,  and  if  the  issues  are  gen- 
erally congruent  with  the  social  values  of  the  client  con- 
stituency, more  favorable  evaluation  of  the  issues  can  be 
expected  than  otherwise.   If  there  is  minimal  conflict  over 
the  ideological  content  of  an  alternative,  it  will  tend  to 
be  evaluated  higher  than  one  with  social  values  less  widely 
held.   If  many  people  are  intensively  affected  by  the  alterna- 
tive, it  will  generally  tend  to  be  evaluated  lower  than  one 
with  a  less  comprehensive  effect  in  both  distribution  and 
degree  of  influence. 

Another  issue  attribute  concerns  its  flexibility.   An 
irreversible  alternative  will  generally  be  evaluated  lower 
than  one  which  permits  modification  or  abandonment  altogether. 
If  the  implementary  and  programming  action  for  an  alternative 
would  require  complex  and  coordinated  action  by  many  agencies, 
it  will  tend  to  be  evaluated  lower  than  an  alternative  with 
a  single  focus  and  manager.   It  is  widely  recognized  that 
there  is  a  tendency  to  procrastination  involving  alternatives 


187 


01 
U 

3 
60 


< 

w 
c 

g 

CO 

IX, 
O 


O 


CO 
3 
U 

CL 
0) 

u 

c 
o 

x: 


to 

c 

0 


•PROCEDURAL 


CO 


SCOPE 


<  UJ 

i     i 


C5 


CC 
D 
i-t 
(0 

& 

X 
H 


with  perceived  high  risk  and  uncertain  consequences. 
Abstract  and  sophisticated  alternatives  have  a  built-in 
bias  toward  rejection  owing  to  the  relative  difficulty  of 
communication  vis  a  vis  simpler  alternatives. 

Although  it  is  comforting  to  see  propositions  such  as 
these  recognized  by  sociologists  and  political  scientists, 
their  content  should  come  as  no  surprise  to  anyone  who  has 
attempted  to  manage  a  program.   With  any  issue  there  is 
some  educative  and  motivative  effort,  and  as  the  program 
increases  in  complexity  and  sensitivity,  as  is  typical  of 
those  in  the  urban  aegis,  that  effort  must  be  redoubled. 
The  substantive  scope  axis  of  the  conceptual  model  provides 
a  rough  measure  of  the  intensity  of  education  and  motivation 
as  precursors  to  evaluation.   As  the  substantive  scope  is 
more  and  more  narrowly  defined,  less  such  effort  is  generally 
required. 

Areal  Scope 
Bolan  terms  areal  scope  attributes  as  those  influencing 
the  decision  field.   This  field  may  be  considered  as  com- 
prising attributes  of  the  evaluative  environment  and  attri- 
butes of  the  evaluating  unit  or  agency.   An  evaluation  by  a 
focused  decision  center  and  competent  and  articulated 
bureaucracy  is  more  likely  to  provoke  a  decision  than  an 
evaluation  carried  out  where  these  attributes  are  diminished. 
Clark  notes  that  faster  and  more  direct  evaluations  are 
likely  in  an  environment  with  large  demands  for  governmental 
activities  and  correspondingly  large  bureaucracies,  large 
political  parties  and  full  time  political  roles.   The 
political  party  serves  as  an  informal  integrating  mechanism 
to  implement  social  action.   This  applies  also  to  the  labor 
movement  which  in  less  intense  organization  decentralizes 
the  decision  making  structure  but  which,  when  intensively 
organized,  has  the  opposite  effect. 


189 


Without  these  and  other  such  integrative  mechanisms, 
increasing  horizontal  and  vertical  differentiation  in  a 
community  will  result  in  greater  differentiation  hetween 
potential  elites  and  more  decentralized  evaluation  of 
alternatives.   This,  in  turn,  makes  evaluation  less  predic- 
table and  tends  to  dilute  the  effect  of  dominent  publics  of 
the  client  constituency. 

Differentiation  of  publics  is  a  reflection  of  the 
degree  of  homogeneity  of  the  client  constituency.   Bolan 
notes  that  the  more  homogeneous  and  free  of  political  and 
social  tradition  that  a  client  constituency  may  be,  the 
more  likely  will  be  common  evaluations.   Conversely,  a 
heterogeneous  tradition-laden  client  constituency  may  tend 
to  indecision  unless  one  of  the  publics  has  a  clear 
dominence  over  the  others. 

The  power  base  of  the  agency  or  individual  making  the 
evaluation  has  an  effect  on  the  evaluation.   If  the  power 
base  is  stable  and  unthreatened  or  obscure,  favorable  action 
is  more  likely  than  if  the  evaluative  unit  is  challenged 
or  continuously  accountable.   Thus  appointed  bodies,  or 
those  with  a  long  term  of  office,  are  more  likely  to  decide 
a  difficult  issue  than  short  term  elected  bodies.   Bolan 
continues  that  an  evaluative  body  that  is  highly  cohesive, 
that  sees  itself  in  a  position  of  high  status  and  narrowly 
focused  areas  of  responsibility  is  more  prone  to  evaluative 
action  than  a  body  seen  as  less  important  and  with  no  clear 
mandate  other  than  that  of  comprehensiveness. 

These  attributes  are  characteristic  of  the  areal  scope 
axis  of  the  conceptual  model  in  the  sense  that  the  client 
constituency  is  a  function  of  that  same  axis.   Whether  the 
planner  is  dealing  with  a  group  of  states  or  cities  or  a 
group  of  families  or  individuals,  the  jurisdictional  nature 
and  the  degree  of  authority  of  the  client  constituency  and 
specifically,  the  mandates  perceived  by  the  decision  makers, 
affect  the  evaluation  of  alternative  proposals. 


190 


Procedural  Scope 
The  procedural  scope  axis  of  the  conceptual  model  of 
planning  activity  is  of  most  interest  to  this  work  hecause 
it  is  here?  that  the  most  clear  conceptual  measures  can  he 
taken  of  the  remaining  three  sets  of  variables  outlined  by 
Bo Ian ;  evaluation  steps,  evaluation  roles  and  evaluation 
strategies.   Clark  formulates  two  procedural  generalities 
that  summarize  this  work.   First,  as  a  function  gains 
importance  in  a  community,  the  community  members  from  the 
sector  performing  that  function  will  have  an  increased 
sway  over  the  nature  and  direction  of  evaluation,  and 
decision  making.   Secondly,  as  the  number  and  value  of  the 
resources  available  to  a  sector  increase,  that  sector  will 
have  similar  increased  influence. 

Evaluation  steps  for  communal  evaluation  and  decision 
making  are  the  same  as  those  in  the  classical  model  of 
individual  behavior.   Some  stimulus,  perhaps  external,  brings 
into  attention  some  need  or  opportunity  deemed  desirable. 
As  time  and  other  resources  permit,  alternative  means  of 
satisfying  this  need  or  seizing  this  opportunity  are  formu- 
lated.  Again,  as  time  and  resources  permit,  each  of  the 
identified  alternates  is  examined  for  costs,  benefits  and 
feasibility.   The  best  such  alternative  is  then  acted  upon 
or  not . 

Evaluation  roles  measure  the  specialization  and  dimen- 
sion of  each  actor's  ability  to  marshall  the  most  resources, 
to  occupy  favorable  positions  in  the  evaluative  and  decision 
making  structure,  to  negotiate  with  skill,  and  to  generally 
influence  the  behavior  of  others.   Some  of  the  specialized 
roles  in  the  context  of  urban  plan  evaluation  are  the  critic, 
the  initiator,  the  technical  expert,  the  analyst,  the  social- 
emotional  expert,  the  strategist,  the  organizer,  the  advocate, 
the  arbiter,  the  propagandist,  and  many  more  including  the 
planner  himself.   The  dimension  of  each  of  these  roles  is  a 
measure  of  each  actor's  motivation,  opportunity  and  personal 
skills . 


91 


Evaluation  strategies,  according  to  Bolan,  are 
reflections  of  both  the  nature  of  the  planning  and  the  nature 
of  the  programming  proposed  to  execute  the  plan.   If  the 
planning  was  done  by  an  agency  or  individual  attached  to  a 
center  of  power,  it  will  have  a  greater  influence  than  that 
planned  by  independent  or  advisory  agencies  or  individuals. 
Incremental  and  opportunistic  planning  tends  to  be  evaluated 
higher  than  the  classic  grand  comprehensive  planning,  owing 
partially  at  least  to  the  previously  discussed  problems  of 
interdependence,  coordination  and  complexity.   Planning 
dealing  with  immediate  or  short  range  objectives  and  having 
a  narrowly  constrained  influence  will  tend  to  be  evaluated 
higher  than  long  term,  goal  oriented  planning. 

As  for  programming,  plans  that  envision  moderate  to 
small  redistribution  of  resources,  minor  changes  in  behavior 
both  on  the  individual  and  aggregate  level,  and  minor 
changes  in  institutions  and  organizations  have  a  built-in 
favorable  bias  over  programming  actions  requiring  massive  such 
changes . 

Within  the  conceptual  model  then,  the  planner  should 
not  arbitrarily  propose  an  evaluative  procedure.   Rather  any 
such  procedure  must  necessarily  be  tailored  to  the  actors 
involved,  to  identify  them  as  they  themselves  change  through 
the  evaluative  steps,  and  to  recognize  that  alternative 
planning  strategies  may  be  necessary  to  reach  each  of  them 
in  turn. 

Summary 
There  is  nothing  particularly  Machiavellian  in  recog- 
nizing that  there  are  facets  of  evaluation  outside  of  the 
substance  of  an  alternative,  and  in  maneuvering  to  ameliorate 
their  consequences,  as  long  as  the  planner  remains  pro- 
fessionally disinterested  in  the  eventual  outcome  of  the 
evaluation.   In  this  way ,  each  alternative  comes  closer  U> 
being  judged  on  its  merits  rather  than  through  some  of  the 
procedural  bias  outlined  here. 


192 


Evaluation  is  by  its  nature  a  series  of  personal 
preference  decisions,  made  somewhat  less  so  by  being  firmly 
grounded  in  scientific  analysis  with  a  recognition  of  bias. 
This  tends  to  make  the  evaluation  more  univeral,  which  is 
an  attribute  much  to  be  desired  when  the  evaluator  speaks 
for  a  client  constituency. 

There  is  no  denying  that  evaluation  of  urban  planning 
alternatives  is  extraordinarily  complex.   Returning  to  the 
Steger  and  Lakshmanan  model,  it  is  seen  that  not  only  must 
the  urban  planner  be  concerned  with  the  variables  of  invest- 
ments, times,  populations,  economies,  areas,  social  indicators 
and  projects,  but  he  must  also  understand  (and  make  known  to 
the  decision  makers)  the  conditions  under  which  each  of  these 
is  valued  and  the  extent  to  which  that  valuation  is  a  func- 
tion of  the  variables  themselves,  their  interdependence  and 
externalities . 

Some  plan  aspect  may  be  judged  utile;  but  to  whom? 
Why?   Where?   When?   To  what  effect?   Some  plan  aspect  may 
be  judged  costly.   The  same  questions  must  be  addressed. 
This  plan  aspect  may  be  utile  to  one  sector,  costly  to  another, 
and  indifferent  to  a  third.   Is  there  a  balance  of  costs  and 
utilities  to  each  sector?   Should  there  be? 

The  plan  alternative  was  designed  to  evoke  a  set  of 
responses.   In  evaluating  it,  the  planner  and  decision  maker 
must  be  aware  of  the  distribution  and  differentiation  of 
that  set. 

Evaluation  Techniques 
As  has  been  the  pattern  in  previous  chapters  of  this 
work,  the  discussion  now  turns  to  operational  considerations 
of  evaluation,  beginning  with  those  simpler  in  concept  and 
proceeding  along  a  continuum  to  those  that  approach  the 
conceptual  Steger  and  Lakshmanan  model.   As  a  general 
comment,  the  use  of  any  of  these  operational  techniques  is 
partially  a  function  of  the  resources  available  for  the 


1.9 'J 


planning  effort  and  the  prior  phases  of  planning.   Few,  if 
any  of  these  can  be  artitrarily  applied  to  a  planning  process 
without  the  necessary  organizational,  inventory,  analysis 
and  forecasted  precursors.   The  study  design  must  take  into 
consideration  the  probable  evaluative  techniques  to  be  used 
some  months  hence. 

Intuitive  Methods 

The  simplest  and  most  direct  evaluative  methods  are 
those  based  on  intuition.   The  decision  makers  select  their 
preferences  from  among  the  alternatives  open  to  them  seem- 
ingly without  analysis,  drawing  intuitive  guidance  from  their 
own  experience.   As  outlined  earlier,  this  is  their  pre- 
rogative and,  once  taken,  the  discussion  is  closed.   There 
is  little  the  planner  can  do  but  acquiesce. 

There  is  nothing  necessarily  wrong  in  this  method  a s 
long  as  three  conditions  are  met.   First,  the  alternatives 
prepared  by  the  planner  must  each  be  viable  and  not,  as  may 
occasionally  be  the  case,  consist  of  one  or  two  viahle 
alternatives  with  the  remainder  being  "straw  men".   Indeed 
the  providing  of  non-viable  alternatives  to  the  decision 
maker  is  non-professional  behavior  and  implies  decision 
making  by  the  planner,  a  violation  of  his  advisory  authority. 
All  the  alternatives  considered  should  be  feasible  and  the 
choice  of  any  should  be  a  matter  of  relative  preference,  not 
rightness  or  wrongness.   The  second  condition  follows  from  the 
first,  that  while  the  planner  may  indeed  harbor  personal 
preferences  he  should  remain  professionally  disinterested 
in  the  outcome.   Third,  the  client  constituency  should  have 
such  faith  and  trust  in  the  decision  makers  that  the  decision 
makers  need  not  have  to  analytically  defend  their  prefer- 
ences . 

The  most  seldom  met  of  these  conditions  is  the  third. 
There  is  also  no  a  priori  reason  to  catagorize  decision 
makers  as  so  naive  that  they  will  consciously  ignore  the 


194 


manifold  difficulties  of  evaluation  of  urban  alternatives. 
Accordingly,  some  type  of  more  open  if  not  more  rational 
analysis  is  usually  employed. 

Monetary  Valuation  Methods 

A  very  widely  used  measure  of  utility  is  monetary 
valuation.   All  benefits  and  costs  are  reduced  to  a  monetary 
value,  dollars  in  this  discussion,  to  compare  future  flows 
of  benefits  and  costs  over  a  specified  time  frame.   The 
general  objective  is  to  establish  the  probable  net  return 
for  each  of  the  competing  alternatives  or,  conversely, 
determine  the  most  economical  alternative  producing  a 
specified  minimum  net  return. 

The  dollar  valuing  of  costs  and  benefits  is  acknow- 
ledged to  be  frought  with  danger,  but  it  also  very  con- 
veniently meshes  with  administrative  procedures  and  common 
cultural  values.   On  a  micro  level,  the  question  of  how  much 
an  individual  might  be  willing  to  pay  for  an  urban  service- 
is  answered  every  day.   In  both  the  private  and  publ ic 
sectors,  the  one  document  that  ties  all  facets  of  a  Life 
style  together  is  the  budget.   Further,  in  the  private 
sector,  nearly  all  entrepreneurial  decisions  are  based  on 
the  expected  monetary  return,  and  this  exerts  a  large  cross- 
over influence  on  the  public  sector. 

There  is  no  lack  of  literature  on  the  general  subject 
of  engineering  economics  with  the  unfortunate  side  effect 
of  a  multiplicity  of  terms.   The  convention  maintained  here 
is  from  Winfrey  (1969)  and  the  material  follows  from  his 
work. 

The  equivalent  uniform  annual  cost  method  disregards 
benefits  and  combines  all  investment  costs  and  all  operating 
costs  into  a  single  annual  figure.   This  annual  figure  is 
equal  to  all  costs  associated  with  the  alternative  if  such 
costs  were  distributed  equally  over  the  economic  life  of  the 
alternative.   Residual  or  terminal  values  at  the  end  of  the 


195 


economic  life  -ire  treated  as  negative  capital  costs.   This 
method  assumes  non-valuable  and  equal  benefits  will  accrue 
from  each  of  the  competing  alternatives.   This  assumption 
may  approximate  the  real  situation  in  only  a  very  limited 
scenario . 

The  present  worth  of  costs  method  again  disregards 
differentiated  benefits  and  combines  all  costs  into  a  single 
figure,  the  value  of  which  is  the  money  necessary  at  time 
zero  to  finance  the  project  over  its  economic  life.   This 
value  can  be  directly  converted  to  the  equivalent  uniform 
annual  cost  by  multiplying  it  by  the  appropriate  capital 
recovery  factor.   The  present  worth  of  costs  method  is 
likewise  limited  by  the  assumption  of  equal  and  non-valuable 
benefits  among  the  competing  alternatives. 

The  equivalent  uniform  annual  net  return  method  combines 
all  benefits  into  a  single  annual  figure  which  is  added  to 
the  negative  equivalent  uniform  annual  cost.   The  alternative 
having  the  most  positive  equivalent  annual  net  return  is 
the  one  preferred.   The  main  assumption  in  this  method  is 
that  the  alternatives  each  produce  an  annual  benefit  that 
can  lie  dollar  valued.   A  minimum  attractive  rate  of  return 
is  used  in  the  calculations  so  that  as  soon  as  the  net  answer 
becomes  positive,  the  alternative  will  be  earning  a  rate  of 
return  more  than  this  specified  minimum.   Since  the  benefits 
are  valued,  they  do  not  have  to  be  equal  among  competing 
alternatives . 

The  net  present  value  method  compares  the  present 
value  of  both  costs  and  benefits  and  is  the  same  in  principle 
as  the  present  worth  of  costs  method.   Whereas  the  methods 
outlined  so  far  call  for  comparisons  among  competing  alterna- 
tives, this  method  can  compare  alternatives  to  the  present 
value  of  doing  nothing,  the  null  alternative.   The  assump- 
tion is  that  the  money  is  currently  earning  a  minimum  accep- 
table rate  of  return.   When  the  calculated  net  present  value 
is  positive,  the  alternative  will  earn  at  a  rate  higher  than 
that  currently. 


196 


The  benefit/cost  ratio  method  provides  a  ratio  of  the 
equivalent  uniform  annual  benefit  to  the  equivalent  uniform 
annual  cost.   The  present  worths  of  benefits  and  costs  can 
be  used  in  ratio  form  as  well.   A  ratio  greater  than  one 
exceeds  the  minimum  acceptable  rate  of  return  used  in  the 
calculations  and  the  alternative  with  the  highest  ratio  may 
be  preferred.   More  typically  the  alternative  that  provides 
the  greatest  increase  in  the  benefit-cost  ratio  is  preferred. 
The  use  of  a  ratio  masks  the  absolute  values  of  the  costs 
and  benefits  and  may  obfiscate  considerations  of  magnitude. 
The  benefit/cost  ratio  method  allows  for  the  differentiation 
of  benefactors  and  beneficiaries  and  has  been  widely  used  in 
the  public  sector  for  this  reason.   Some  discussion,  outside 
the  scope  of  this  work,  has  centered  about  whether  annual 
operative  costs  are  a  negative  benefit  (and  thus  in  the 
numerator)  or  a  cost  (and  thus  in  the  denominator).   Winfrey 
holds  that  because  the  objective  of  the  analysis  is  to 
indicate  an  investment  profitability,  because  of  consistency 
with  other  methods,  and  because  of  general  cost  accounting 
procedures,  the  former  position  is  most  sound.   For  the 
same  reasons,  the  terminal  value  factor  should  be  placed  as 
a  deductive  in  the  denominator. 

The  rate  of  return  method  identifies  that  discounl  rate 
which  will  equate  the  negative  cash  flows  or  costs  to  the 
positive  cash  flows  or  benefits.   The  alternative  with  the 
highest  rate  of  return  is  preferred.   There  are  no  restric- 
tive assumptions  as  to  the  equality  of  benefits  among  alterna- 
tives as  long,  of  course,  as  they  can  be  monetarily  valued. 
Alternatives  can  be  compared  to  each  other  or  to  the  null 
alternative.   The  rate  of  return  method  yields  a  direct 
measure  of  the  profitability  of  an  alternative  that  may  be 
more  meaningful  than  the  benefit/cost  ratio  in  some  applica- 
tions . 

The  six  economic  models  of  evaluation  described  here 
become  somewhat  mechanically  limited  as  any  of  the  following 


197 


factors  become  significant;   alternatives  with  unequal 
economic  Lives,  reversals  in  the  direction  of  cash  flows, 
Fluctuation  in  the  magnitude  of  cash  flows  over  time  and  rates 
of  reinvestment.   There  are,  however,  procedures  and  assump- 
tions which  can  be  used  to  accomodate  these  considerations. 
The  models  could  also  be  sensitive  to  changes  in  the  terminal 
values  of  the  alternatives,  to  changes  in  the  length  of  the 
analysis  period,  and  to  changes  in  the  discount  rate.   Cer- 
tainly good  procedure  would  call  for  sensitivity  analyses 
of  these  factors. 

Of  course,  the  overriding  burden  of  these  methods  of 
economic  analysis  is  not  on  the  methods  so  much  as  on  their 
input  data,  the  dollar  valuation  of  costs  and  benefits. 
Hill  (1968)  has  noted  that  by  the  very  indivisible  nature  of 
some  collective  social  benefits  there  is  no  market  by  which 
to  measure  or  value  them.   There  are  indeed  some  social 
benefits  that  are  valued  because  they  are  produced  privately 
and  marketed;  there  are  some  that  are  never  marketed  but  may 
be  subject  to  monetary  valuation;  but  there  are  many  more 
that  are  simply  outside  the  scope  of  monetary  valuation. 
Although  some  recognition  is  given  these  intangibles,  Hill 
suggests  that  the  net  effect  of  economic  analyses  alone  is 
to  automatically  enhance  the  importance  of  effects  that  can 
be  monetarily  valued  to  the  detriment  of  the  effects  that 
cannot.   This  may  be  a  reversal  of  the  true  order  of  things. 

One  way  out  of  this  dilemma  might  be  to  consider  what 
might  be  called  second  order  market  effects.   If,  for 
example,  real  property  appraisal  were  a  more  exact  science, 
and  if  property  values  could  be  considered  to  reflect  social 
effects  not  otherwise  monetarily  valued,  perhaps  such 
appraisals  of  the  effects  of  each  alternative  could  aid  in 
distinguishing  among  them  by  imputing  the  market.   The 
values  thereby  imputed  could  then  be  used  in  economic 
analyses.   This  approach  seems  to  be  of  most  immediate  use 
in  evaluating  alternative  land  use  plans. 


198 


More  likely  than  not  however,  economic  evaluation 
methods  will  not  alone  suffice  to  properly  judge  urhan 
planning  alternatives. 

Social  Accounts  Valuation  Methods 
Litchfield  (1964)  has  proposed  and  used  a  system  of 
social  accounts  to  measure  the  costs  and  benefits  of  urban 
planning  alternatives.   The  costs  and  benefits  so  identified 
need  not  necessarily  be  included  in  the  overall  measure  of 
economic  efficiency.   Sectors  of  producers  and  sectors  of 
consumers  are  identified  and  for  each  sector  he  forecasts 
the  costs  or  benefits  that  will  accrue  under  each  alterna- 
tive.  The  values  given  these  costs  and  benefits  may  be 
monetary,  they  may  be  numerical  values  in  non-monetary 
terms,  or  they  may  be  intuitively  valued  in  descriptive 
terms.   For  each  alternative,  a  complete  set  of  social 
accounts  is  constructed  which  Litchfield  terms  the  planning 
balance  sheet.   With  the  use  of  this  balance  sheet  the 
decision  maker  has  a  firmer  base  from  which  to  compare 
tangibles  with  intangibles,  the  incidence  of  costs  and 
benefits  over  different  sectors  if  brought  to  light,  and 
those  design  elements  that  are  high  in  cost  and  low  in 
benefit  may  be  identified. 

In  discussing  this  technique,  Hill  recognizes  that  it 
is  a  step  foreward  along  the  evaluative  continuum  from 
strict  economic  methods  but  notes  that  the  planner's  evalua- 
tion of  the  intangibles  is  groundless  if  it  is  made  without 
reference  to  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  con- 
stituency.  Benefits  and  costs  are  not  necessarily  absolute 
but  have  a  relative  and  instrumental  value  defined  by  these 
goals  and  objectives.   To  maximize  some  benefit  in  the 
ab s t rac t  is  mean ing less. 

Still  in  the  absence  of  resources  for  methods  still 
further  along  the  continuum,  the  construction  of  a  set  of 
social  accounts  is  an  improvement  over  purely  economic 
analyses. 


199 


Utility  Value  Methods 

The  concept  of  utility  measures  has  been  introduced 
in  Chapter  I  in  the  context  of  measuring  the  preferences  of 
the  community  for  goals  and  ohjectives.   Rased  upon  these 
measures  of  preference,  weights  could  be  assigned  to  each 
goal  .'ind  objective  to  approximate  the  value  system  of  all 
or  portions  of  the  client  constituency.   Fishburn  (1967) 
has  summarized  twenty-four  mathematical  techniques  for  esti- 
mating additive  utilities  and  three  such  were  described  in 
Chapter  I,  ranking,  rating,  and  a  method  of  successive 
comparisons . 

Suppose  urban  planning  alternatives  could  be  assigned 
such  utilities;  each  utility  being  defined  as  the  sum  of 
the  cost  utilities  (negative)  and  the  benefit  utilities 
(positive)  for  each  alternate  plan  under  a  specific  set  of 
external  conditions  or  states  of  nature.   If  such  utilities 
could  be  assigned,  the  results  could  be  incorporated  into  a 
payoff  matrix  as  shown  below.   A's  designate  alternates; 
U's  designate  additive  utilities;  and  N's  designate  states 
of  nature. 

Table  VII-1 
Conceptual  Payoff  Matrix 


Nl 

N2 

N3 

N. 
1 

ull 

U12 

U13 

h. 

U21 

U22 

U23 

u2J 

U31 

U32 

U33 

u3j 

Uil 

Ui2 

u.3 

u. . 

200 


Given  a  payoff  matrix,  there  are  several  well  known 
operations  research  techniques  Cor  evaluating  the  alternatives 
and  selecting  the  hest  (Miller  and  Starr,  1960).   If  the 
probabilities  of  occurrance  are  known,  the  best  strategy 
;s  the  one  that  maximizes  the  expected  value,  EV ,  where: 


RV.  =    <~^,     U.  .P.  for  n  states  of  nature,  each  with 

J  =  1 
a  probability  of  occurrance,  P.. 

If  the  probabilities  of  occurrance  of  the  states  of 
nature  are  unknown,  there  is  no  one  best  criterion  for 
selecting  an  alternative.   There  are  instead  several  such 
criteria,  the  selection  of  which  depends  to  a  large  degree 
upon  the  policies  and  attitudes  of  the  decision  makers. 

The  Wald  maximin  criterion  suggests  that  the  decision 
maker  should  always  be  pessimistic  and  select  the  alterna- 
tive with  the  largest  minimum  utility,  the  maximum  minimum 
or  maxim in. 

The  Hurwicz  maximax  criterion  suggests  that  the  decision 
maker  should  always  be  optimistic  and  select  the  alternative 
with  the  largest  maximum  utility,  the  maximum  maximum  or 
maximax . 

The  sensitivity  of  the  decision  to  the  range  of  criteria 
between  the  maximin  and  the  maximax  is  easily  investigated  by 
synthesizing  probabilities  on  the  states  of  nature.   This 
could  result  in  a  coefficient  of  optimism  which  approximates 
the  expected  value  criterion. 

The  Savage  minimax  criterion  suggests  that  the  decision 
maker  should  select  that  alternative  which  will  minimize 
the  regret  he  may  feel  having  chosen  an  alternative  and  then 
discovering  which  state  of  nature  will  occur.   Regret  is 
measured  by  the  difference  between  the  maximum  utility  and 
all  others  under  each  state  of  nature.   The  decision  maker 
then  selects  the  alternative  with  the  minimum  largest  regret, 
the  minimum  maximum  or  minimax. 


201 


Under  all  these  criteria  the  probabilities  of  the  states 
of  nature  were  unknown,  yet  the  choice  of  criterion  allows 
the  decision  maker  to  favor  the  probability  of  good  or  bad 
outcomes  depending  upon  his  personality,  the  stakes  at 
hand  and  the  environment  of  the  decision. 

Actually  the  Bayes'  hypothesis  would  demand  that  the 
states  of  nature  be  explicitly  considered  equiprohable .   In 
that  case,  for  n  states  of  nature,  the  best  alternative  is 
the  one  with  the  highest  expected  value,  the  probability 
of  each  state  of  nature  being  1 /n . 

Goal  Achievement  Methods 

The  utility  of  a  particular  planning  alternative  only 
gains  meaning  in  relation  to  a  set  of  planning  goals  and 
objectives.   The  nature  of  the  use  of  goals  and  objectives 
developed  at  the  outset  of  the  planning  process  has  been 
amplified  in  every  phase  of  the  process  to  this  point.   It 
is  fitting  that  this  feedforeward  should  continue  through  the 
evaluation  phase. 

Hill  (1968)  has  proposed  the  construction  of  a  goals- 
achievement  matrix  for  each  planning  alternative  under 
consideration,  conceptually  shown  in  Table  VI  I -2  . 

0(*   >,Cj   >U    anc*  &  are  goal  statements  and  2,  3,  5  and  4 
are  their  respective  weights  which  could  be  determined  in  a 
manner  described  in  Chapter  I.   The  incidence  column  lists 
those  groups  of  people,  institutions,  economies  or  establish- 
ments that  are  affected  by  the  alternative.   A  relative 
weight  is  determined  for  each  group  for  each  goal.   Hill 
does  not  specify  the  manner  of  this  determination.   The 
letters  A,  B,  C  ...  are  the  costs  and  benefits  accruing  to 
each  group  measured  by  each  goal.   They  may  be  in  monetary 
units,  utiles,  or  descriptors.   A  dash  (-)  indicates  that  no 
cost  or  benefit  to  a  group  would  occur  if  that  plan  were, 
implemented.   For  some  of  the  goals,  jr         indicates  the 


202 


Table  VII-2  

2 


The  Goals  Achievement  Matrix' 


fit  /3 


Goal  description: 

Relative  weight:       2  '  3 


Relative  Relative 

incidence   weight  Costs  Benefits  weight   Costs   Benefits 

Group  a      1       A        D        5       E 

Group  b      3       H  ~\  4       -       R 

Group  c      1       L      >  J        3  S 

Group  d      2       -      )  2 


Group  e      1  K        1 


, 


Relative  weight:      5  4 


Goal  description 


Relative  Relative 

Incidence  weight    Costs   Benefits  weight    Costs   Benefits 

Group  a  1     \          N 

Group  b  2 

Group  c  3 

Group  d  4 

Group  e  4 


1 

Q 

K 

2 

s 

T 

1 

V 

W 

2 

_ 

_ 

£     £ 


203 


summation  of  their  effects  may  be  valid.   Hill  also  notes 
that  ranges  of  costs  or  benefits  could  be  specified  to 
bracket  those  which  are  uncertain.   Braces  indicate  that 
some  costs  or  benefits  are  indivisible  among  the  braced 
groups.   Among  the  alternatives,  the  preferred  is  the  one 
whose  matrix  demonstrates  the  highest  goals  achievement 
index . 

This  index  may  be  intuitively  arrived  at,  with  the 
greatest  benefit  of  the  goals  achievement  matrix  being 
merely  the  surfacing  of  the  complexity  of  the  intuitive 
interpretation.   On  an  ordinal  basis,  a  simple  measurement 
of  -1,  0,  +1  could  be  used  to  describe  a  decrease  in  goal 
achievement,  no  effect  on  goal  achievement,  or  an  increase 
in  goal  achievement,  respectively.   On  a  ratio  basis,  more 
complete  information  could  be  imputed  to  the  model,  with  the 
attendant  risk  of  the  choice  of  units  and  the  masking  of 
considerations  of  magnitude. 

Hill  recognizes  that  the  goals  achievement  index, 
however  arrived  at,  is  difficult  for  the  decision  maker  to 
digest.   There  may  be  no  single  index  at  all  in  contrast 
to  that  of,  say,  the  economic  efficiency  of  earlier  described 
methods . 

Schimpeler  (1967)  has  proposed  two  evaluative  decision 

models  based  upon  the  measurement  of  goals  achievement. 

Referring  back  to  Chapter  I ,  assume  that  a  set  of  community 

goals  and  objectives  has  been  developed,  G. ,  j  -  1 ,  2 ,  3 

...  n;  and  for  each  G.  a  numerical  utility  value  has  been 

J 
assigned,  U.,  j  =  1,  2,  3  ...  n, 

n 

=  1. 
J 

j  =  1 
Schimpeler  proposes  that  a  group  of  professionals 
associated  with  urban  planning  be  assembled  to  consider  the 
alternative  plans.   Without  knowledge  of  the  values  of  the 


204 


client  constituency,  U.  for  each  G.  ,  they  are  instructed  to 
render  dispassionate  professional  judgments  as  to  the  prob- 
ability that  a  given  alternative  plan  will  affect  each  goal 
or  objective,  G..   A  modification  of  the  Schimpeler 
techniques  would  require  that,  if  there  are  i  alternative 
plans,  this  effectiveness  measure,  e..,  would  be  1  if  objec- 
tive i  is  assured  under  alternative  i.   An  e..  of  0  implies 
that  alternative  i  has  no  effect  on  objective  j.   An  e..  of 
-1  means  it  is  practically  impossible  to  achieve  objective 

j  with  alternative  i.   Values  of  e..  between  1  and  -1 

ij 
reflect  this  professional  judgment  of  the  probability  of 

effectivness  and  the  degree  of  that  effectiveness  of  each 

alternative-goal  combination. 

The  result  is  an  effectiveness  matrix  which,  when 

multiplied  by  the  value  matrix  for  the  goals  and  objectives, 

yields  the  cumulative  utility,  U.,  of  each  alternative 

plan.   Thus; 


U .  =  ^>  e. .  •  u. ,  where  there  are  i  plans  and  j 

j  -  1 
goals  and  objectives. 

The  alternative  with  the  highest  cumulative  utility 
is  preferred. 

Schimpeler  has  also  developed  an  extension  of  his 
model  to  weight  the  values  cf  various  socio-economic  groups 
of  the  total  population  according  to  their  numerical  partici- 
pation in  that  total. 

U.  -  U*  +  U?  +  . . .  U^  +  . . .  U?;  and 

ill        i        l ' 


u  .   e .  . ,  where 
J    ij  ' 

j  =  1 
U.  =  the  total  utility  of  alternative  i; 


205 


U.  =  the  utility  of  alternative  i  as  determined  by  the 

kth  socio-economic  group,  k  =  1,  2,  ...  p; 
u.  =  the  criterion  weight  for  objective  j  as  determined  by 

the  kth  socio-economic  group; 
e.  .=  the  effectiveness  of  plan  i  relative  to  objective  j; 

and, 
a,  =  the  fraction  of  the  total  population  represented  by 

the  kth  socio-economic  group. 


Psychological  Valuation  Methods 

This  work  has  repeatedly  recognized  that  the  ultimate 
charter  of  the  urban  planner  is  to  design  physically  and 
programmatically  to  evoke  a  desired  set  of  human  responses. 
Human  response  to  stimulus  is  the  business  of  the  psycholo- 
gist and  Craik  (1968)  has  proposed  that  psychological 
measures  of  evaluation  may  be  most  appropriate  to  differenti- 
ate among  plan  alternatives. 

If  some  sort  of  display  of  the  alternatives  could  be 
presented  to  the  client  constituency,  psychological  measures 
of  the  constituency  interpretation,  interest  and  response 
to  the  display  could  be  made.   The  display  may  be  an  actual 
real  life  situation,  or  simulations  of  such  through  audio- 
visual methods  or  three  dimensional  models. 

Craik  has  classified  thirteen  methods  to  measure  the 
constituency  response  to  such  displays.   Free  descriptions, 
adjective  checklists,  and  activity  and  mood  checklists  may 
be  used  to  measure  constituency  reaction.   A  Q-sort  method 
may  be  used  to  measure  reactions  along  a  continuum  from 
"most  characteristic"  to  "least  characteristic".   A  Semantic 
Differential  Rating  or  Thematic  Potential  Analysis  are 
sensitive  to  subtle  differences  in  observations.   In  the 
latter,  observers  would  be  asked  to  compose  a  brief  story 
about  "something  which  might  fittingly  happen  here". 

The  use  of  symbolic  equivalents,  such  as  appropriate 
metaphors,  or  multisensory  equivalents,  such  as  color 


206 


sequences  or  music  themes,  betray  human  response  perhaps 
otherwise  hidden. 

People  make  inferences  as  to  the  kinds  of  people  that 
might  live,  work  or  play  in  selected  environments.   These 
social  stereotypic  cues  offer  insights  as  to  their  own 
relation  to  the  environment,  as  does  empathic  role  playing. 

If  the  client  constituency  could  describe  the  effect 
upon  them  if  they  lived  in  the  environment  displayed,  this 
could  be  compared  to  their  current  self  evaluation  to 
investigate  the  change  in  response. 

Salesmen  are  very  aware  of  the  effects  of  viewing  time 
and  viewing  sequence  on  their  customers  and  the  most  popular 
or  the  most  returned  to  or  the  longest  viewed  display  mighL 
evoke  the  best  responses  when  considering  urban  alternatives. 

A  full  discussion  of  psychological  measurement  pro- 
cedures is  far  afield  of  the  scope  of  this  work,  but  the 
use  of  professional  psychologists  in  evaluation  of  urban 
alternatives  is  an  intriguing  possibility. 

Summary 

The  previous  section  has  considered  some  operational  or 
near  operational  methods  of  evaluating  alternative  urban 
plans.   If  it  is  clear  that  there  is  no  global  operational 
solution  to  the  problem  of  plan  evaluation,  it  is  also 
clear  that  progress  toward  that  solution  is  being  made. 

It  remains  for  the  urban  planner,  working  in  context, 
to  design  evaluative  procedures  somewhat  ad  hoc .   In  addition 
to  the  conceptual  and  operational  constraints  outlined  here, 
he  will  find,  of  course,  institutional,  legal,  and  resource 
constraints  affecting  his  chosen  methodology. 

Manheim  (1962)  has  conceptually  described  evaluative 
methodologies  as  necessarily  being  communicable,  repeatable, 
comparable  and  revisable.   To  be  communicable,  the  process 
of  evaluation  should  be  explicitly  enough  defined  so  that  a 
second  party  may  follow  it.   If  the  process  yields  the  same 


207 


result  from  the  same  inputs,  it  is  repeatable.   When  different 
results  can  be  traced  to  different  inputs,  the  process  is 
comparable.   Revisability  allows  for  new  information  or 
feedback. 

Perhaps  the  greatest  lesson  of  the  discussion  is  this: 
because  of  the  nature  of  urban  planning,  evaluation  may 
always  incorporate  large  elements  of  intuitive  thinking. 
Thus,  each  of  the  methods  outlined  here  as  well  as  any 
combinations,  permutations,  and  extensions  that  the  planner 
may  devise,  can  only  serve  as  an  aid  to  intuition  and  must 
never  be  taken  dogmatically.   A  corollary  to  this  would 
state  that  the  evaluation  method  should  affect  the  evalua- 
tion as  little  as  possible,  and  every  parameter  should  be 
examined  for  its  sensitivity. 

Boyce,  Day  and  McDonald  (1970)  have  proposed  a  set  of 
conceptual  guidelines  for  this  ad  hoc  effort  which  summar- 
izes the  material  covered  above.   Any  evaluation  of  an  urban 
planning  alternative  should  include  the  following  character- 
istics:  technological  and  fiscal  feasibility;  distributional 
effects  and  equity;  conservation  of  economic,  social  and 
natural  resources;  flexibility  to  respond  to  changing  condi- 
tions; levels  of  service  and  systems  performance;  economic 
efficiency;  organization  of  facilities  and  services;  social 
interaction  and  diversity  of  opportunities;  the  nature  of 
cooperative  action  and  joint  decision  by  conflicting  groups; 
and  the  distribution  of  control  among  the  various  types 
and  levels  of  the  public  and  private  sectors. 

A  Note  on  Practice 
Boyce,  Day  and  McDonald  have  researched  the  evaluation 
strategies  and  techniques  of  several  major  transportation 
and  land  use  planning  processes.   Their  research  is  beyond 
the  scope  of,  but  an  excellent  adjunct  to  the  material 
covered  in  this  chapter.   Some  of  their  conclusions  are 
herewith  included  to  demonstrate  how  various  emphases  of 


208 


technique  have  occurred  within  the  constraints  of  working 
in  context. 

In  researching  evaluative  methodology,  the  authors 
readily  admit  to  the  difficulty  of  reconstructing  evaluations 
based  upon  a  wide  variety  of  source  material  ranging  from 
precise  technical  memoranda  to  furtive  verbal  allusions. 
Many  facets  were  apparently  not  documented  at  all. 

Five  of  the  major  transportation  and  land  use  planning 
evaluative  processes  that  were  summarized  by  them  are  those 
of  Baltimore,  Boston,  Chicago,  Milwaukee  and  the  Twin  Cities. 

The  Regional  Planning  Council  of  Baltimore  had  a 
legislative  mandate  to  develop  and  adopt  a  comprehensive 
plan  for  the  region.   Boyce  eit  al_.  termed  their  evaluative 
processes  and  methods  to  be  generally  "ad  hoc  and  eclectic". 

The  Boston  Regional  Planning  Project,  and  later,  the 
Eastern  Massachusetts  Regional  Planning  Project  was  a  joint 
program,  rather  than  a  specific  agency,  instituted  to 
provide  a  comprehensive  development  plan  for  its  region. 
The  authors  termed  its  evaluative  methods  and  processes  to 
be  "distinctive",  articulated,  and  "to  have  achieved  a  more 
realistic  compromise  with  diplomacy  and  planning  resources, 
than  any  other(s)  currently  in  operation." 

The  Chicago  Area  Cooperative  Land  Use  Transportation 
Project  was  a  joint  venture  of  the  Northeastern  Illinois 
Planning  Commission  and  the  Chicago  Area  Transportation 
Study.   Its  charter  was  to  prepare  a  comprehensive  land  use, 
public  facility  and  natural  resource  plan  for  the  six 
counties  of  northeastern  Illinois.   Their  evaluative  methods 
and  processes  were  characterized  to  be  "hasty  and  austere", 
partially  due  to  an  unfavorable  political  climate  and  budget 
limitations,  but  it  was  pointed  out  that  "a  classical 
'narrowing  down'  process  was  fully  worked  through,  and  concrete 
moves  were  taken  to  foster  public  participation  and  implementa- 
tion."4 


209 


The  Milwaukee  work  was  guided  by  the  Southeastern 
Wisconsin  Regional  Planning  Commission,  composed  of  members 
appointed  from  area  counties.   The  commission  was  authorized 
to  prepare  and  adopt  regional  plans  for  the  physical  develop- 
ment of  the  area.   Boyce  e_t  a_l.  term  the  Milwaukee  effort 
"The  epitome  of  a  solid  and  exhaustive  study,  by  all  prevail- 
ing standards.   It  was  outstanding  for  the  amount,  rigor  and 
relevance  of  its  technical  contribution,  and  for  its  highly 
structured  and  coherent  program..." 

The  work  in  the  Minneapolis-Saint  Paul  area  was  directed 
by  the  Joint  Program  whose  organization  structure  is  described 
in  Chapter  II.   It  is  a  form  of  quasi-metropolitan  govern- 
ment authorized  to  deal  with  problems  at  that  level,  and  to 
coordinate  the  activities  of  all  public  agencies  serving  the 
region.   Boyce  ejt  al_.  characterized  the  operation  as 
"innovative",  "involved",  and  successful.   "Whatever  may 
have  been  lost  through  the  accompanying  de-emphasis  of 
technical  assessment  in  favor  of  intuition,  was  more  than 
made  up  by  a  demonstration  of  informed,  sensitive  and  shrewd 
diplomacy,  and  by  the  crystallization  and  enunciation  of  a 
refreshing  philosophical  approach." 

Table  VII-3  has  been  prepared  to  demonstrate  the 
strategic  emphases  employed  during  the  five  planning  processes. 
A  distinction  is  made  between  the  examination  of  a  single 
alternative  and  the  comparison  of  two  or  more  alternatives. 
Network  performance  measures  refer  generally  to  the  techni- 
ques of  traffic  assignment  as  previously  presented  in  Chapter 
V.   The  "cost  of  systems"  heading  refers  to  the  general 
criterion  of  economic  efficiency.   Public  activity  systems 
are  typically  utilities,  services,  public  policies  regarding 
land  use  and  natural  resources.   Private  activity  systems 
were  largely  commercial  in  character,  but  could  include 
industrial  and  residential  incentives.   Efficiency  analysis 
refers  to  the  conceptual  balancing  of  costs  and  benefits. 


210 


M 

G 

•H 

^    W 

CO 

co 

C  <u 

o 

CU 

O 

cu 

o 

CO  13 

C 

>% 

•e 

>> 

C 

OS   ^ 

o 

CO 

■H 

CO 

en 

CO 

>> 

a> 

l-l 

C 

CO 

0) 

5 

>    CO 

•r4    -H 

J-l    CO 

CU 

CU 

o   >. 

4-1 

u 

u 

1-1 

w 

> 

a)  h 

•M 

o 

o 

0 

o 

•r-l 

M-l    CO 

s 

1-1 

■r-) 

•<~i 

■l-l 

4J 

•4  Q 

w  -5 

•H 

crj 

CO 

CO 

CO 

cO 

r-l 

E 

E 

E 

E 

U 

r^ 

CO 

CO 

a 

>, 

0) 

E 

o 

CO 

o 

C  co 

CO 

c_> 

0)  .H 

JS 

•r-l     CO 

CO 

CO 

a, 

cj  >• 

o 

O 

CU 

CU 

o 

S 

•rJ   r-H 

c 

C 

>, 

>, 

C 

w 

IW     CO 

CM    C 

0) 

w  <; 

3 

O" 

•,-1 

>, 

CU 

CU 

CU 

ja 

CU  4-> 

CO 

4-J 

4-1 

4J 

en 

4-1   th 

e 

CO 

(0 

CO 

1 

CJ 

cO  i-i 

<D 

w 

u 

U 

M 

S-l 

H 

<u 

>  -H 

4J 

0 

CU 

CU 

CU 

o 

H 

H 

•r-l     CJ 

CO 

"-) 

"3 

•3 

■3 

"—1 

> 

CO 

U    CO 

>> 

eg 

o 

0 

0 

eg 

c 

•r-l 

Oh  fa  CO 

B 

E 

E 

E 

E 

0) 

o 

CO 

r-l 

•r-l 

Sr, 

J3 

4J 

l-l 

>> 

cu 

CU 

CO 

cO 

rt 

4J 

CO 

T3 

-3 

4-1 

4-1 

H 

3 

5 

O  -r< 

e 

CU 

cu 

CO 

CO 

r-l 

••-I  r-l 

cu 

4-) 

4-1 

u 

)-i 

U 

CO 

i-l  -r-1 

4J 

•l-l 

•r-l 

CU 

O 

CU 

> 

cu 

rO    CJ 

CO 

e 

G 

-3 

■|— i 

TJ 

w 

> 

3    CO 

>! 

•r-l 

•r-l 

o 

cO 

O 

•--i 

Oh  fa  CO 

l-l 

1— 1 

E 

E 

E 

r-l 

4J 

cC 

CO 

CU 

cj 

C 

CM    CO 

"3 

•d 

4J 

-,-i 

u 

O    E 

CU 

CU 

CO 

W 

CU 

<u 

4J 

4-1 

M 

Li 

rJ 

O 

4-1 

■U   4J 

•H 

•H 

O 

O 

CU 

4J 

r-1 

CO    CO 

B 

E 

•i—) 

•"-I 

-3 

CO 

< 

O    >-> 

•r-l 

•H 

eg 

eg 

O 

•r-l 

C_>  CO 

r-l 

r-l 

E 

E 

E    ' 

X 

cu 

r-i 

c 

•r-l 
CO 

a) 

CJ 

j-i  eg 

CU 

o  B 

4-» 

u 

U 

U 

£  n 

CU 

•r-l 

o 

o 

o 

4J    O 

G 

e 

f~l 

•l-l 

•r-) 

CU  4-1 

o 

•r-l 

CO 

eg 

CO 

55    M 

c 

r-l 

E 

E 

E 

CU 

Oh 

CU 

u 

o 

O 

CU 
CU 

rid 

6 

c 

00 

3 

CO 

•r-l 

o 

«0 

CO 

CU 

4-1 

4J 

o 

3 

C  -H 

i— 1 

co 

•r-l 

r~ 1 

•rH    4-1 

CO 

O 

jc 

•r-l 

£3 

03 

PQ 

a 

X 

211 


Effectiveness  analysis  includes  the  concept  of  goal  achieve- 
ment as  an  evaluative  technique. 

Conclusions 

The  problem  of  urban  planning  evaluation  is  multi- 
dimensional and  any  group  of  procedures  employed  by  the 
planner  must  give  due  account  to  each  of  these  dimensions. 

The  states  of  nature  and  the  alternative  plans  them- 
selves are  the  two  dimensions  that  provide  the  framework 
for  the  others.   With  these,  the  planner  must  consider  the 
groups  of  people  (or  economic  sectors  or  industrial  sectors, 
etc.)  and  their  degree  of  participation,  their  values,  and 
the  distributional  effects  of  the  alternatives  over  these 
groups.   He  must  consider  the  likely  effectiveness  of  the 
alternatives,  judged  in  some  way  that  is  relevant. 

To  these  dimensions,  the  planner  must  add  the  social 
and  cultural  effects  of  evaluation  with  attendant  considera- 
tions of  roles,  strategies  and  procedures. 

All  these  effects  must  usually  be  reduced  to  measures 
of  resources  to  compare  costs  and  benefits  and  to  guide 
programming.   The  best  alternatives  are  those  that  are  the 
most  profitable,  in  the  grandest  sense  of  the  word. 

All  of  this  occurs  over  time,  is  projected  into  time, 
will  operate  in  future  time,  and  will  have  effects  which 
are  time  dependent. 

Considering  all  these  dimensions,  the  only  absolute 
of  urban  plan  evaluation  is  that  it  is  relative. 


Notes 

1.  Wilbur  A.  Steger  and  T.  R.  Lakshmanan ,  "Plan  Evaluation 
Methodologies:   Some  Aspects  of  Decision  Requirements 
and  Analytical  Response,"  p .  69 . 

2.  Morris  Hill,  "A  Goals-Achievements  Matrix  for  Kvaluatinj 
Alternative  Plans,"  p.  23. 


212 


3.   D.  E.  Boyce,  N.  D.  Day  and  C.  McDonald,  Metropolitan 
Plan  Making:  An  Analysis  of  Experience  with  the 
Preparation  and  Evaluation  of  Alternative  Land  Use  and 
Transportation  Plans,  p.  140. 


4.  Ibid. 

5.  Ibid. 

6.  Ibid. 

7.  Ibid. ,  p.  6, 


213 


CHAPTER  VIII 
IMPLEMENTATION 


It  would  be  manifestly  inappropriate  to  conclude  this 
work  without  a  consideration  of  the  natural  and  logical 
conclusion  of  the  substance  of  the  planning  process  -  the 
implementation  of  the  plan,  its  policies  and  programs.   That 
this  is  difficult  however,  mirrors  the  difficulty  of  plan 
implementation  itself  and  the  attitude  certainly  exists  to 
simply  state  that  such  matters  are  best  left  to  politicians, 
to  present  the  fee  statement,  and  to  steal  quietly  into  the 
night. 

Such  behavior  assumes  that  a  recognizable  end  of  the 

planning  process  has  been  reached,   Even  this  may  not  be 

the  case.   Without  belaboring  the  point,  it  is  recognized 

that  much  of  planning  is  continuous  and  changing.   Such 

characteristics  are  among  the  poorest  reasons  and  even  less 

of  an  excuse  for  the  failure  of  planning  to  reach  sound 

conclusions,  even  though  they  may  be  conditional  on  future 

assumed  scenarios. 

Perin  (1967)  has  noted  that  an  obsessional  disorder 

is  one: 

where  an  individual  is  incapable  of  bringing  a  task 
to  a  conclusion  and  substitutes  continuously  repetitive 
behavior  that  assures  no  ending  -  stresses  that  what 
is  being  avoided  is  acknowledgement  of  incompetance 
for  the  task  at  hand,  whether  real  or  imagined...   The 
way  in  which  comprehensive  planning  work  is  (sometimes) 
organized  and  undertaken,  being  pointed  as  it  is 
toward  the  production  of  one  plan,  has  patently 
obsessive  characteristics.   The  'incompetance'  being 
masked  by  endless  and  diffuse  studies  may  relate 
closely  to  the  fact  that  analytic  work  in  city  planning 
has  yet  to  make  its  peace  with  the  tolerable  range  of 
error  appropriate  to  each  topic  it  deals  wilh:   fear 


214 


of  being  found  'wrong'  in  a  recommendation  or 
'incomplete'  in  the  range  of  variables  studied  has 
led  to  an  abuse  of  'open-endedness '  and  'flexibility' 
as  important  to  the  planning  'process'.   The  leap  to 
action  must  be  made . 1 

Throughout  this  work,  the  concept  of  operational ity 
has  been  given  a  high  precedence.   In  fact,  the  identifi- 
cation of  planning  as  a  process  presupposes  a  beginning  and 
an  end.   The  material  presented  in  earlier  chapters  has 
been  oriented  not  only  to  operationality  alone,  hut  also 
operat ionali ty  with  direction,  purpose  and  conclusion.   II 
is  hypothesized  that  such  procedural  considerat ions  as  are 
outlined  here  are  both  an  incentive  to  impLementa  t.  inn  and 
a  necessary  beginning  of  implementation. 

The  professional  position  of  the  planner  relative  to 
implementation  is  analogous  to  that  of  the  planner  relative 
to  evaluation  and  decision  making.   As  in  the  case  of  the 
latter,  implementation  actions  are  an  executive  function  and 
it  is  the  prerogative  of  the  executive  to  retain  such 
functions  unto  himself.   If  he  so  chooses,  so  be  it. 

Again  as  in  evaluation  and  decision  making  however, 
the  planner  should  stand  ready  to  aid  the  executive  in  these 
functions  and  should  make  his  capabilities  and  recommenda- 
tions known  to  him.   Because  programs  and  plans  are  some- 
times redirected,  even  unconsciously,  in  their  implementa- 
tion; because  the  specific  application  of  general  programs 
may  sometimes  cause  injustice;  and  because  simply  not  every 
consequence  can  be  foreseen;  Davidoff  and  Reiner  (1962) 

pose  for  the  planner  the  role  of  an  overseer,  one 
who  aids  policy  makers  by  observing  the  direction 
programs  are  given  and  by  suggesting  means  for  re- 
directing these  toward  their  intended  goals.^ 

Such  a  role  clearly  brings  the  planner  out  of  an 

advisory  staff  position  closer  to  one  of  execution.   A 

secondary  benefit  of  such  a  role  occurs  because,  faced  with 

the  possibility  of  thus  being  hoisted  by  his  own  petard, 

planners  are  then  likely  to  give  due  consideration  to  the 

conditions  of  operationality. 


215 


Care  must  be  taken  lest  such  a  prospect  dampen  the 

necessary  innovation  required  of  the  urban  planner.   Wurster 

(1964)  has  made  note  of  the  inherent  tempermental  conflict 

between  the  skepticism  necessary  to  scientific  endeavor  and 

the  emotion  necessary  to  effective  reform. 

By  and  large,  science  can  only  help  to  explain  why 
things  are  the  way  they  are.   Since  there  are  always 
good  reasons,  there  is  a  tendency  for  good  studies 
to  make  current  conditions  seem  inevitable.   And 
this  can  lead  to  a  kind  of  paralysis  with  respect  to 
issues  which  require  bold  innovation. . .   In  a  field 
where  there  can  never  be  full  factual  proof  of  what 
ought  to  be  done  in  the  future,  moreover,  too  much 
respect  for  scientific  methods  means  timidity  in 
making  positive  inferences  and  bold  judgements. 3 

As  exampled  by  these  comments,  planners  have  come  to 
recognize  that  their  professional  responsibilities  extend 
beyond  the  preparation  of  technical  planning  documents. 
Planning  is  a  political  process  as  well  as  a  technical 
process.   The  political  aspects  of  the  process,  although 
occurring  throughout,  are  most  apparent  in  the  implementa- 
tion phase.   In  the  discussion  which  follows,  these  aspects 
are  examined  with  reference  to  the  conceptual  model  of 
planning  activity. 

The  Conceptual  Model  of  the  Implementation  Phase 
Figure  VIII-1  shows  the  conceptual  model  of  planning 
activity,  emphasizing  the  implementation  phase. 

Substantive  Scope 
The  substantive  scope  axis  of  the  conceptual  model 
measures  the  continuum  of  implementation  actions  dealing 
with  the  substance  of  the  plan.   Of  course,  such  actions  are 
themselves  a  function  of  many  variables,  but  measured  along 
this  axis  they  can  be  said  to  approximate  two  largely 
inseparable  conditions:   first,  the  degree  to  which  the 
goals  and  objectives  of  the  client  constituency  identified 
in  the  planning  process  are  congruent  with  those  actually 


216 


K * 

i  \ 


K 


-i^zz^™^" 


V—T-1—- -' L~    -l— 


\  \      \       \ 

\  \      \        \ 

\  \      v       \ 

\  \__A — a 

*  !  \         "J 

Vi 

\;         \i 
\"  \i 

i * 


GO 


> 

4-1 
U 
< 

00 

c 
1 


0) 

-a 

o 


to 

D 

4-1 

a 
a> 
o 
C 
o 
u 

a) 


0) 

en 
TO 

c 

o 


-PROCEDURAL      SCOPE- 


1 

LjJ 

ui 


i 


i 


£ 

E 

Qi 
.-I 
a 
E 


0) 


217 


held  by  the  client  constituency;  and  second,  the  degree  to 
which  the  identified  goals  and  objectives  are  fulfilled  by 
the  proposals,  balanced  against  the  costs  incurred. 

This  axis  is  the  ultimate  measure  of  the  adequacy  of 
the  planning  process  in  identifying  and  satisfying  the  value 
set  of  the  client  constituency,  from  the  most  general  to  the 
most  specific.   At  the  general  end  of  the  continuum,  this 
axis  measures  such  things  as  the  appropriateness  of  the 
planning  approach,  the  reasonableness  and  economy  of  the 
process,  the  morality  of  the  philosophy  and,  in  apologia, 
answers  the  question  "Why  plan?".   As  each  of  these  measures 
is  seen  as  "good"  and  "fitting"  by  the  client  constituency, 
there  is  an  increased  tendency  to  implementation. 

Proceeding  along  the  continuum  in  the  direction  of 
increasing  specificity,  the  value  set  of  the  client  con- 
stituency becomes  more  refined  in  definition  and  narrowed 
in  application  until  at  the  end  of  the  continuum,  a  specific 
design  facet  is  valued.   As  long  as  that  facet,  perhaps  the 
placement  of  a  chair  in  a  room  or  a  tree  in  a  park,  does 
not  violate  any  of  the  higher  order  goals  and  objectives 
(previously  enunciated  or  perhaps  just  "felt")  it  remains  a 
candidate  for  acceptance.   It  is  then  judged  by  the  narrow 
and  refined  value  set.   In  this  case,  "I  am  tired.   Does  the 
chair  look  comfortable?"  or,  "I  am  warm.   Can  I  rest  in  the 
shade  of  that  tree?"  As  before,  as  each  of  these  measures 
is  seen  as  "good"  and  "fitting"  by  the  client  constituency, 
there  is  an  increased  tendency  to  implementation. 

Of  course  the  majority  of  the  planner's  concern  involves 
implementation  issues  of  substance  between  these  two  extremes. 
In  response  to  the  need  to  identify  and  refine  the  goals  and 
objectives  of  the  client  constituency  along  the  continuum, 
to  the  need  to  carry  and  use  these  value  sets  throughout 
the  planning  process,  and,  in  fact,  in  response  to  the  public 
demand  to  participate  in  planning,  it  is  appropriate  to 
formally  develop  statements  of  policy  against  which  implemen- 
tation actions  can  be  measured.   These  statements  of  policy 


218 


are  at  once  an  input,  a  throughput  and  an  output  of  the 
planning  process.   The  input  manifestations  have  been  dis- 
cussed in  Chapter  I;  the  throughput  manifestations  have  been 
developed  and  used  in  each  succeeding  chapter;  this  chapLer 
is  concerned  with  output.  - 

Statements  of  policy  are  a  series  of  documents  of 
differing  refinement  as  necessary  but  of  consistent  value 
when  considered  as  a  whole.   In  terms  of  horizontal  inte- 
gration, there  may  be  one  for  implementation  of  transporta- 
tion policy,  one  for  implementation  of  recreation  policy, 
one  for  implementation  of  land  use  policy,  and  so  forth. 
In  terms  of  vertical  integration,  there  may  be  one  for 
industrial  land  use,  industrial  land  use  by  type,  a  specific 
industry  unique  in  some  characteristic,  and  that  office 
responsible  for  industrial  zoning  changes. 

These  statements  of  policy  serve  as  guides  to  imple- 
mentation.  These  guides  can  be  used  by  executives,  admin- 
istrators, commissioners,  department  heads,  foremen  or  anyone 
in  position  of  planning  and  programming  implementation  as  a 
reference  against  which  to  measure  his  behavior  and  guide 
his  decisions. 

Goodman  and  Freund  (1968)  have  called  this  "policies 
planning"  and  have  cited  the  general  benefits  which  accrue 
to  it. 

1.  The  essential  and  uncluttered  character  of  the 
policy  statements  facilitates  public  under- 
standing and  public  participation  in  the 
planning  program. 

2.  The  policy  statements  permit  and  encourage 
imtimate  involvement  in  the  planning  process  by 
elected  officials. 

3.  The  policies  plan  serves  as  a  coordinative  device, 
bringing  together  under  a  single  framework  the 
diverse  agencies  that  may  have  an  impact  on 
development.   In  this  respect  it  is  particularly 
useful  in  multijurisdictional  areas. 


219 


4.  The  policies  plan  provides  an  element  of  stability 
and  consistancy  in  the  planning  program  in  that 

it  will  not  be  made  obsolete  by  changing  conditions 

5.  The  policies  plan  can  be  useful  as  a  guide  to 
legislative  bodies  responsible  for  adopting  land 
use  controls,  to  boards  and  commissions  authorized 
to  administer  the  controls,  and  to  the  courts 
which  must  judge  the  reasonableness  of  the 
legislation  and  the  fairness  of  its  administra- 
tion. 4 

Chapin  (1963)  has  termed  this  an  "urban  development 
policies  instrument"  which  serves  as  a  "framework  for 
steering  public  policy."   He  defines  these  instruments  as 
"a  recognized  basis  of  co-ordinated  action  by  all  levels 
of  government  in  policy  decisions  relating  to  urban 
development . " 

The  development  of  policies  statements  serves  as  an 
aid  to  implementation  by  assuring  proper  implementation 
of  the  plan  at  the  appropriate  level  of  executive  and 
administrative  action  and  by  establishing  a  clear  lias  is  for 
such  implementation  decisions. 

Areal  Scope 

Along  the  areal  scope  axis  of  the  implementation 
phase,  the  planner  is  most  concerned  with  problems  arising 
from  the  multiplicity  of  governmental  units  in  the  area 
affected  by  the  plan.   It  is  not  uncommon  for  a  metro- 
politan area  in  the  United  States  to  have  tens  of  such  units 
and,  in  larger  metropolises,  hundreds. 

Of  these,  a  major  fraction  may  be  affected  by  the  plan 
and,  of  more  consequence  in  this  discussion,  a  somewhat 
lesser  fraction  partake  in  its  implementation.   Hopefully 
one  of  these  units  will  be  designated  and  clearly  recognized 
as  the  lead  activity,  with  the  others  playing  a  subordinate 
role.   Whether  or  not  such  a  hierarchal  organization  of 
units  may  exist,  if  the  planner  is  to  participate  in  the 
implementation  phase,  it  will  probably  require  him  to 


220 


coalesce  the  various  units  to  insure  the  proper  direction 
of  implementation. 

Friend  and  Jessop  (1969)  have  addressed  this  question 
and  have  formally  defines  six  classes  of  problems  basic  to 
multi -agency  planning. 

The  problem  of  mechanisms  for  strategic  control  deals 
with  connecting  and  disconnecting  those  agencies  which  have 
decision  fields  related  to  the  plan.  It  includes  the  means 
of  regulating  and  orchestrating  these  agencies  into  behavior 
consistant  with  and  in  the  preferred  direction  of  the  plan. 
Such  strategic  control  mechanisms  bear  the  stresses  arising 
from  different  interpretations,  methods  and  procedures  from 
agency  to  agency. 

Closely  allied  with  this  problem  of  mechanisms  is  that 
of  strategic  control  authority  which  addresses  the  question 
of  where  responsibility  for  control  is  to  be  centered,  and  how 
to  establish  such  a  nucleus  effective  and  acceptable  to  the 
various  agencies.   Obviously  if  a  hierarchal  arrangement 
already  exists,  these  problems  are  somewhat  relieved.   An 
alternative  arrangement  is  a  division  of  mechanisms  of 
strategic  control  to  groups  of  agencies,  all  functioning 
under  the  same  superior  authority.   In  the  case  of  clearly 
separate  authorities,  if  mutual  adjustment,  indirect 
pressures,  and  the  threat  of  public  indignation  are  not 
sufficient  to  coordinate  implementation,  the  need  arises 
for  the  formation  of  yet  a  superior  level  of  authority. 

As  implementation  proceeds,  the  patterns  of  inter- 
dependency  among  agencies  are  likely  to  change.   The  strategic 
control  authority  must  have  sufficient  information  at  its 
disposal  to  monitor  these  changes  and  regulate  them  with 
either  anticipatory  or  remedial  action.   The  problem  of 
sufficient  information  deals  with  the  questions  of  how  much 
and  what  kinds  of  information  are  sufficient  to  monitor  the 
implementation,  and  whether  this  information  can  be  gleaned 
from  already  existent  channels  or  if  new  sources  are  required. 


221 


The  problem  of  democratic  guidance  centers  about  the 
role  of  the  client  constituency  in  the  implementation  phase. 
The  planning  process  so  far  detailed  has  included  such 
participation  and  care  must  be  taken  that  those  agencies 
implementing  the  plan  are  accessible  to  the  ideas  that 
formulated  the  plan. 

Closely  allied  with  this  is  the  continuing  problem  of 
common  language  among  different  professions  and  different 
segments  of  the  client  constituency. 

Of  course  the  ultimate  success  of  a  multi-agency 
endeavor  will  depend  upon  the  various  motivations  of  the 
participant  individuals.   Friend  and  Jessop  recognize  this 
with  their  final  problem,  that  of  sufficient  motivation. 
The  key  to  success  is  to  assure  that  the  implementation 
processes  remain  acceptable  to  the  individuals  and  groups 
who  must  operate  them  and  who  themselves  have  private  and 
career  motives  which  must  be  satisfied. 

The  coordination  of  these  implementation  agencies  by 
the  executive  authority,  or  the  planner  working  on  behalf 
of  that  authority,  demands  astute  managerial  and  political 
ability,  the  cultivation  of  which  is  discussed  in  these 
concluding  sections. 

Procedural  Scope 
Planning  implementation  is  not  apolitical  and  the 
procedural  scope  axis  provides  a  conceptual  measure  of  the 
planner's  necessary  behavior  in  the  political  arena.   While 
not  unprofessional,  such  behavior  has  been  traditionally 
regarded  by  some  as  outside  the  professional  skills  of  urban 
planning.   Rabinovitz  (1967)  has  noted  this  strain  between 
the  role  of  planning  and  the  role  of  effectuation .  Since, 
however,  the  success  of  planning  is  tied  to  the  success  of 
the  political  system,  the  planner  must  be  prepared  to  marshal 
influence  in  those  political  systems  too  weak  to  support  the 
necessary  implementation.   To  require  such  behavior  of  the 


222 


planner  is  to  ask  him  to  broaden  his  concept  of  professional- 
ism to  include  those  skills  which  he  cannot  monopolize, 
which  is  contradictory,  of  course,  hence  the  strain  between 
roles . 

The  only  solution  to  this  dilemma  is  to  allow  such 
political  behavior  to  be  recognized  as  a  necessary  adjunct 
to  professional  planning.   This  behavior  could  then  include 
the  preparation  of  an  instrument  variously  called  a  political 
plan,  implementation  plan,  or  tactical  plan  (Guttenberg, 
1964). 

Throughout  the  planning  process  thus  far,  discussion 
has  centered  about  the  goals  and  objectives  of  the  client 
constituency.   In  its  variants  and  refinements  through  the 
process,  this  goal  orientation  has  been  maintained,  modified 
by  the  constraints  of  operationality .   Guttenberg  has  suggest- 
ed that  explicit  recognition  be  given  to  these  operational 
constraints  in  the  form  of  a  tactical  plan,  describing  the 
means  necessary  to  achieve  the  end  state  enunciated  by  the 
goals  and  objectives.   The  client  constituency  has  already 
persuaded  itself  to  the  desirability  of  this  end  state,  so 
the  purpose  of  the  tactical  plan  is  not  to  win  their  assent, 
but  rather  "to  overcome  the  self  contradiction  involved  when 
the  individual  acts   publicly  and  when  he  acts  privately". 
This  is  done  by  tactically  changing  the  field  in  which 
private  decisions  are  made  so  that  these  decisions  are  more 
likely  to  be  oriented  toward  the  public  objectives. 

A  tactical  plan  is  closely  related  to  conventional 
capital  programming.   In  the  latter  case,  elements  of  the 
plan  are  scheduled  for  implementation  based  upon  anticipated 
needs  and  trends  and  fiscal  constraints.   The  tactical  plan 
expands  this  concept  to  include  those  steps  that  need  be 
taken  not  only  to  anticipate  trends,  but  to  control  them, 
to  shape  the  background  market  conditions  and  locational 
preferences  necessary  for  the  goals  and  objectives  realization. 
This  would  include  the  possibility  of  deferring  the  common 


223 


order  of  implementation  to  allow  the  private  sector  to  take 
advantage  of  programmed  incentives  deemed  desirable. 

Guttenberg  notes  that  such  tactical  planning  requires 
the  planner  to  shift  his  focus  from  ends  to  means.   Admit- 
tedly these  means  can  be  relatively  impotent  and  few  in 
number.   But  for  effective  implementation,  the  planner  must 
step  foreward  from  his  concern  with  long  range  objectives  and 
subject  these  objectives  to  the  difficult  and  sometimes 
contradictory  effects  of  programming  in  time.   The  client 
constituency  may  already  be  impatient  with  the  perceived 
time  span  between  the  present  status  and  the  status  described 
by  the  endorsed  goals  and  objectives.   The  circuitous  route 
plotted  to  achieve  such  may  increase  this  impatience  to 
levels  unacceptable. 

In  submitting  the  tactical  plan  to  the  public,  then, 
the  planner  is  presenting  the  implications  of  a  goal 
plan,  and  in  so  doing  he  is  subjecting  it  to  a  test 
far  more  critical  than  if  he  merely  presents  the  'bill' 
in  terms  of  financial  costs.   In  short,  he  is  testing 
the  seriousness  and  durability  of  the  public  purpose 
itself,  for  this  is  what  the  goal  plan  represents. 
As  a  result  of  this  confrontation,  the  public  may 
decide  to  rethink  its  objectives  a  little  more 
carefully,  perhaps  a  little  more  realistically.   But 
if  it  retains  its  objectives,  than  it  is  better  pre- 
pared to  realize  them  because  it  is  forearmed  with 
knowledge  of  their  implications  in  time.   These  con- 
siderations alone  are  enough  to  justify  tactical 
thought  and  planning. 7 

Operational  Considerations 
The  conceptual  model  of  the  planning  process  has 
served  as  a  means  of  establishing  the  need  for  the  planner 
to  take  an  active  part  in  implementation.   The  plan  as  a 
document  standing  alone  may  indeed  fire  the  imagination  and 
enthusiasm  of  those  who  witness  it,  but  its  implementation 
occurs  in  the  realm  of  politics  with  the  attendani  need  for 
persuasion,  incentives,  penalities,  codification  and 
legislation,  procedures,  publicity,  power  and  much  supportive 
act  ivity. 


224 


This  supportive  activity  is  varied  and  takes  its  many 
forms  essentially  because  the  plan  imposes  some  restrictions 
on  individual  behavior  for  the  good  of  the  public-at-large , 
and  these  individuals  need  to  be  convinced  of  the  propriety 
of  those  constraints.   Even  if  this  were  not  the  case,  man 
does  not  behave  with  perfect  rationality  and  needs  the 
fear  of  penality  and  the  desire  for  profit  to  help  him 
interact  with  his  fellows  in  ways  which  are  socially  accep- 
table. 

So  (1970)  has  assembled  some  of  the  supportive  imple- 
mentation activity  into  an  illustrative  and  suggestive 
framework  of  seven  catagories :   "the  classic  method," 
gaining  and  strengthening  allies,  information,  cooperation, 
coordination,  ad  hoc  problem  solving,  and  education  and 
indoctrination.   Recognizing  that  they  are  not  often  used 
singly,  but  in  combinations,  the  salient  characteristics  of 
each  are  as  follows. 

The  classic  method  of  implementation  activity  regards 
the  planning  authority  as  the  advocate  of  good  planning, 
largely  independent  of  the  executive  authority.   This  planning 
authority  is  typically  a  commission  composed  of  the  laymen 
and  public  officials.   It  passes  judgment  on  the  propriety 
of  planning  actions  and,  for  those  that  are  deemed  desireable, 
attempts  to  convince  various  executive  authorities  to  imple- 
ment them.   There  is  much  emphasis  on  the  plan,  little 
emphasis  on  implementation,  and  the  power  marshalled  in  this 
classic  method  is  advisory  in  nature. 

By  gaining  and  strengthening  allies,  the  planning 
authority  seeks  the  active  support  of  its  constituent  local 
executive  authorities  and  increases  the  capabilities  of 
these  executive  authorities  to  plan  for  themselves.   This 
give  due  recognition  to  the  fact  that  these  executive 
authorities  have  the  power  to  implement,  so  they  might  as 
well  have  access  to  planning  expertise  commensurate  with  that 
power.   For  example,  the  planning  authority  can  sponsor 


225 


legislation,  if  necessary,  to  allow  su.ch  local  executives 
to  plan;  it  can  provide  technical  assistance  in  the  planning 
effort,  either  in  the  form  of  personnel  ona  library  of 
appropriate  information.   This  implementation  activity 
dilutes  somewhat  the  power  of  the  planning  authority  in 
exchange  for  the  opportunity  to  inject  its  own  point  of 
view  and  provide  a  visible  administrative  service.,. 

Another  supportive  activity  recognizes  that  the  pro- 
vision of  planning  information  may  influence  development 
decisions  in  both  the  public  and  private  sectors.   This  is 
an  expensive  activity,  as  noted  in  Chapter  [II,  and  tends 
to  be  regarded  as  non-operational  in  that  it  does  not 
provide  answers,  only  elaborations  of  problems. 

Planning  authorities  recognize  that  other  similar 
authorities  make  decisions  at  equal  and  greater  levels  of 
government  which  directly  affect  their  area  of  concern.   By 
actively  seeking  to  cooperate  in  these  decisions,  the 
planning  authority  can  assure  once  again  that  its  point  of 
view  is  considered.   Joint  projects  also  expose  the  planning 
authority  to  the  methods  and  procedures  of  its  sister 
activities . 

It  is  unlikely  that  the  planning  authority  will  have 
the  power  to  resolve  conflicts  of  implementation  among 
several  governmental  agencies.   Through  the  use  of  methods  of 
coordination,  thus  necessarily  circumscribed,  the  planning 
authority  can,  however,  provide  the  forum  in  which  such 
conflicts  can  be  aired,  and  provide  a  quasi-arbiter  role  by 
surfacing  potential  conflicts,  inconsistancies  and  duplica- 
tive programs. 

By  ad  hoc  problem  solving,  the  planning  authority  can 
increase  its  implementary  role  by  actively  seeking  to 
discover  and  then  solve  the  problems  of  most  immediate  concern 
to  its  constituent  executive  authorities.   Some  staff  time 
is  diverted  from  long  range  planning  to  investigate  recent 
and  high  impact  local  developments  and  thereby  be  in  the 
vanguard  of  knowledge  about  their  effects. 


226 


The  method  of  implementing  plans  by  indoctrination  and 
education  was  the  one  most  frequently  cited  by  planning 
authorities  in  the  So  study.   This  includes  such  activities 
as  the  publication  of  newsletters,  brochures  for  the  layman, 
news  releases,  special  conventions  and  conferences  and  the 
like.   The  goal  of  such  activity  is  twofold:   to  convince 
the  public  and  its  executive  authorities  that  planning  is 
necessary;  and  to  convince  this  same  audience  that  the  plans 
and  policies  endorsed  by  the  planning  authority  are  appro- 
priate to  the  problems  at  hand  and  should  be  implemented. 
The  outstanding  feature  of  all  these  implementation 
actions  is  that  they  are  based  upon  persuasion.   As  such 
they  depend  very  strongly  upon  the  personality  of  the  planner 
and  his  acumen  as  a  salesman.   It  seems  not  quite  fair  that 
such  serious  substantive  issues  as  these  may  very  well  hinge 
upon  the  personal  abilities  of  the  participants  rather  than 
the  issues  themselves.   Such,  however,  is  the  nature  of 
the  political  system. 

Implementation  powers  beyond  persuasion  are  of  two 
kinds;  those  allotted  to  the  planning  authority,  and  those 
retained  by  the  executive  authority  even  though  possibly 
designed  by  the  planning  authority. 

Of  the  latter,  at  once  the  most  familiar  and  complex 
are  the  implementation  activities  of  zoning,  subdivision 
regulation  and  urban  renewal.   Goodman  and  Freund  (1968) 
provide  a  detailed  treatment  of  each  of  these,  the  elabora- 
tion of  which  is  outside  the  scope  of  this  work. 

For  the  purpose  of  definition,  however,  zoning  may 
be  considered  the  legal  means  of  classifying  urban  land 
into  districts,  each  district  being  then  regulated  as  to 
the  height  and  bulk  of  structures  that  may  be  permitted,  the 
area  of  land  which  may  be  occupied  by  these  structures,  the 
density  of  the  resident  population,  and  the  use  permitted 
of  non-residential  structures.   It  is  the  legal  means  of 
regulating  land  use. 


227 


Subdivision  regulation  is  the  legal  means  of  insuring 
that  urban  development  occurs  in  a  manner  consistent  with 
the  community's  goals  and  objectives.   It  serves  many  purposes, 
insuring  that  the  subdivision  public  systems  such  as  streets, 
schools,  utilities,  land  ownership  and  tax  records,  and  other 
such  systems  are  both  adequate  for  the  subdivision  and  con- 
sistent with  those  of  the  city. 

Urban  renewal  is  the  legal  means  whereby  a  city  may 
use  its  power  of  eminent  domain  to  purchase  parcels  of  land 
for  new  development,  both  public  and  private.   It  is 
designed  to  remove  areas  with  urban  problems  so  excessive  and 
complex  that  their  piecemeal  solution  is  beyond  the  cap- 
ability of  less  sweeping  measures. 

Another  great  power  of  the  executive  authority  rests 
with  its  own  development  of  municipal  real  estate.   As  a 
land  owner  and  the  developer  of  public  facilities,  the 
executive  authority  exerts  a  great  influence  on  the  type  and 
amount  of  private  development  occurring  about  these  fac- 
ilities. 

Returning  to  the  implementation  powers  available  to 
the  planning  authority,  there  exist  some  such  powers  which, 
while  not  as  strong  as  those  available  to  the  executive 
function  of  government,  do  go  beyond  those  characterized 
by  persuasion  alone. 

So,  Goodman  and  Freund,  and  other  authors  have  made 
reference  to  these  powers,  generally  catagorized  as  man- 
datory referral.   With  this  power,  the  planning  authority 
has  the  legal  right  to  review  the  development  plans  of  any 
agency  or  private  interest  having  an  impact  on  the  area 
under  its  purview.   The  right  of  review  by  the  planning 
authority  is  mandatory;  its  recommendations  are  not  usually 
binding  however. 

Although  in  this  discussion  the  convention  uf  So  was 
used  in  classifying  implementation  actions,  all  such  actions 
may  be  considered  ad  hoc  in  context.   That  is  to  say  that, 


228 


since  the  implementation  powers  of  urban  planning  have  trad- 
itionally been  very  weak  or,  when  strong,  narrowly  defined, 
any  and  all  such  actions  are  generally  marshalled  as  avail- 
able, out  of  a  due  respect  for  the  seriousness  of  the  issue. 

Meshenberg  (1970a)  has  constructed  an  outline  of  the 
suitability  of  environmental  features  to  urban  development 
and  a  conceptual  measure  of  their  tolerance  to  use  by  man. 
Of  interest  to  his  discussion,  he  included  in  this  outline 
the  methods  and  techniques  by  which  appropriate  design 
development  policies  could  be  implemented.   By  his  own 
admission,  the  outline  is  neither  exhaustive  nor  specific. 
Rather  it  is  intended  to  portray  the  range  of  available 
techniques  in  a  manner  suggestive  to  local  application. 
With  this  in  mind,  Table  VIII-1  has  been  adopted  from 
Meshenberg's  work  as  an  example  of  the  ad  hoc  use  of  many 
implementation  techniques,  in  this  case,  organized  by  land 
form. 

Many,  if  not  all,  of  the  methods  of  planning  imple- 
mentation require  the  expenditure  of  public  monies.   If 
there  is  an  ultimate  test  of  urban  planning,  it  must 
center  about  the  willingness  of  the  executive  and  the  con- 
stituency for  which  he  speaks  to  divert  money  from  the 
manifold  demands  for  urban  services  into  that  service  pro- 
vided by  planning,  including  implementation. 

In  another  survey,  Meshenberg  (1970b)  cataloged  the 
revenues  and  expenses  of  governmental  planning  agencies  of 
various  sized  jurisdictions.   He  established  that  such 
agencies  spend  about  one  dollar  per  year  per  constituent. 
There  was  a  range,  of  course,  from  about  a  half  dollar  to 
more  than  two  dollars.   The  figures  are  somewhat  troubled 
by  the  lack  of  consistency  from  authority  to  authority  as 
to  what  constitutes  planning,  and  by  the  expected  differing 
accounting  systems. 

This  money  is  raised  through  local  taxation  procedures 
and  in  many  cases,  supplanted  by  federal  aid.   This  chapter 
concludes  with  a  short  discussion  of  the  latter. 


229 


Table  VIII-1 
Methods  of  Implementing  Environmental  Policies,  by  Land  Form 


8 


Land  Form 
Land  Soil  and  Topography 


Implementation  Methods 


Wet  and 

Impervious 

Soil 

Poor  Load 
Bearing  Soil 

Flat  Land 


Subdivision  and  sanitary  regulations 
requiring  public  water  supply  and 
sewage  disposal. 

Building  code  and  grading  ordinance 
prescribing  development  standards. 


Pollution  control  ordinances 
use  controls. 


land 


Low  Slope 


Moderate 
Slope 


Steep  Slope 


Major  Ridge 
Lines 

Valley 


Gorge  and 
Canyon,  Glacial 
Moraine 

Promontory 


Grading  ordinances  limiting  terracing, 
topsoil  and  vegetation  removal;  sub- 
division controls  setting  appropriate 
street  and  utility  design  standards; 
zoning  to  limit  density  of  development. 

Density  zoning,  grading  ordinance 
requiring  sedimentation  control;  sub- 
division ordinance  requiring  maintenance 
of  vegetation  and  design  standards  for 
streets,  possible  hillside  development 
controls. 

Public  purchase  in  fee;  open  space 
zoning;  scenic  or  other  easements; 
reforestation. 

Height  and  density  restrictions  in 
z on  ing  o  rdinanc  e s . 

Scenic  qualities  preserved  by  open  space 
or  agricultural  zoning;  public  purchase; 
purchase  of  easements  or  development 
rights;  conservation  zoning. 

Public  purchase;  zoning  controls  to 
limit  peripheral  development 


Zoning  for  high-rise  buildings;  view 
protection  regulations. 


Abrupt  Relief 
Changes 

Land  Rock 

Weak  Sub- 
structure 


Minerals 


230 


Table  VIII-1,  cont 


Public  purchase  in  fee;  purchase  of 
easements . 


Zoning  for  low  density  and  low-rise 
development  and  to  exclude  areas  of 
assembly  and  uses  which  would  create 
serious  hazards  during  earthquakes; 
building  codes  prescribing  special 
construction  methods  and  materials. 

Natural  resource  zoning  including  per- 
formance standards  to  prevent  encroach- 
ment; performance  bond  to  ensure  site 
rehabilitation;  preferential  assessment 


Water 


Surface  water 
and  Riparian 
Land 


Floodland 


Wetland,  Marsh, 
Bog ,  Swamp 


Estuary 


Planned  unit  development  controls; 
sanitary  ordinance  prohibiting  use  of 
septic  tanks;  water  quality  standards 
to  restrict  discharge  of  pollutants; 
water  zoning  to  separate  incompatable 
water  uses;  zoning  to  restrict  shoreline 
development  to  water  compatable  uses; 
public  works  planning. 

Same  as  for  surface  and  riparian  lands; 
zoning  controls  to  exclude  structures 
from  the  channel  and  floodway;  building 
code  requiring  f loodproof ing  of  structures; 
limitations  on  grading,  filling,  dredging 
and  diking. 

Public  purchase  or  purchase  of  easements; 
grading  and  filling  ordinances;  agricul- 
tural zoning;  limitations  on  surrounding 
areas  to  preserve  ecological  processes, 
conservation  zoning. 

Increased  state  control  over  estuary 
and  coastal  zone  use;  more  stringent 
control  over  dredging,  filling,  draining; 
zoning  to  restrict  development  to  uses 
requiring  coastal  zone  locations; 
pollution  controls. 


231 


Table  V11I-1,  cont 


Aquifer  Limitations  on  groundwater  withdrawal. 

Aquifer  Subdivision  and  sanitary  controls 

Recharge         requiring  public  sewerage;  pollution 
Area  discharge  controls;  prevention  of 

intrusion  of  salt  water  or  other 
groundwater  contaminents ;  special  sewer 
construction  techniques;  limitations  on 
dredging,  stream  widening,  filling 
etc  . 

Air 

Corridor         Land  use  controls  restricting  locations 
of  polluters  upwind  of  receptors; 
source  controls;  performance  standards 
in  zoning  ordinances. 

Vegetation  and  Wildlife 

Woodland         Forest  conservation  controLs;  zoning 
and  subdivision  controls  limiting 
intensity  of  development,  destruction 
of  vegetation,  and  setting  standards 
for  improvements;  authorization  for 
limited  lumbering. 

Wildlife         Public  purchase;  purchase  of  scenic, 
Habitat  hunting,  fishing  easements;  zoning 

limitations  on  surrounding  areas;  very 
low  density  zoning  for  seasonal  cottages 
and  restrictions  on  access  roads. 

Prime  Agri-      Exclusive  agricultural  zoning;  prefer- 

cultural         ential  farmland  assessment. 

Land 

Pasture  Open  space  zoning  where  appropriate. 

Land 

Prairie  Public  purchase;  zoning  and  other 

limitations  on  surrounding  areas. 

Cultural  and  Landscape 

Unique  Remanent   Public  purchase;  zoning  and  other 
limitations  on  surrounding  areas. 


232 


Table  VIII-1,  cont 


Scenic  Vistas    Purchase  of  easements  or  development 
rights;  very  low  density  zoning;  open 
space  or  agricultural  zoning. 

Historical  and   Public  purchase  or  purchase  by  civic 
Archeological    groups;  architectural  control;  historic 
Sites  area  zoning;  landmarks  commission. 


233 


A  Note  on  Federal  Assistance 

In  1967,  the  Office  of  the  Vice  President  published 
a  guide  to  federal  assistance  programs.   While  some  of 
the  programmatic  information  is  dated,  the  philosophy  behind 
federal  J  assistance  is  not. 

Federal  assistance  is  designed  to  aid  local  governments 
in  stimulating  and  cultivating  the  local  private  sector 
to  perform  the  required  services.   The  government  provides 
the  climate  and  opportunity  to  enable  the  private  sector  to 
act  through  the  provision  of  both  technical  and  financial 
assistance . 

The  initiative  for  such  assistance  rests  with  the 
local  government.   It  should  identify  the  goals  and  objectives 
of  its  client  constituency,  plan  to  achieve  these  goals  in 
an  organized  and  coordinated  manner,  program  the  implementa- 
tion in  a  way  which  is  both  appropriate  and  flexible, 
manage  the  implementation  effectively  and  in  coordination 
with  the  private  sector,  and,  in  short,  carry  out  a  planning 
and  implementation  program  that  is  altogether  feasible, 
appropriate  and  necessary. 

Federal  assistance  is  limited  on  the  whole  and  well 
documented  demands  can  be  expected  to  exceed  available 
appropriations.   Accordingly,  even  among  justified  requests, 
assistance  is  parceled  out  according  to  various  formulas. 
A  state's  share  of  available  funds  is  generally  determined 
through  the  use  of  both  apportionment  and  matching  provisions. 
Apportionment  formulas  specify  the  proportion  of  the  total 
federal  grant  funds  for  which  each  state  is  eligible.   Such 
formulas  are  usually  based  upon  some  combined  measure  of 
population,  financial  ability  and  need.   Matching  formulas 
specify  to  what  extent  participating  states  must  share  the 
program  costs,  and  can  be  a  ratio  fixed  from  state  to  state, 
or  varying,  depending  upon  the  ability  of  each  state  to 
participate . 


234 


The  use  of  federal  assistance  adds  at  least  one  and  in 

some  cases  several  levels  of  program  administration.   These 

levels  insure  that  local  program  objectives  are  consistent 

with  those  of  the  national  program  and  those  of  the  state. 

Plans,  programs,  specifications,  contracts,  procedures  and 

administration  are  all  subject  to  administrative  action. 

During  implementation,  regular  reports  are  required  on 

program  status,  federal  laws  and  regulations  regarding 

personnel  matters  such  as  the  hiring  of  minorities  and  the 

* 
use  of  a  merit  system  must  be  observed.   Purchasing, 

accounting,  and  contract  administration  procedures  must 

be  followed.   Final  review  and  close  out  mechanisms  may  be 

made  mandatory  and,  at  least  at  project  completion,  a 

federal  audit  may  be  held. 

Federal  assistance  is  available  in  an  ever  increasing 
variety  of  substantive  areas  impacting  on  urban  life.   In 
addition  to  assistance  in  the  general  area  of  community, 
metropolitan  and  regional  planning  and  development,  assistance 
is  available  in  the  areas  of  local  economic  and  business 
development,  transportation,  welfare  and  social  services, 
health,  education  and  culture,  manpower  development  and 
employment  assistance,  public  safety,  disaster  assistance, 
civil  defense,  land,  water  and  air  resources,  planning  and 
development  of  physical  facilities,  housing  and  community 
development,  public  utilities,  recreation,  service  centers 
and  community  buildings. 

Information  abounds  in  a  great  many  places  regarding 
these  programs  and  a  search  could  well  begin  at  the  state 
agencies  dealing  in  these  matters  and  the  regional  offices 
of  the  appropriate  federal  departments. 

Summary 
This  chapter  has  attempted  to  trace  the  difficult  and 
tortuous  path  of  implementation,  first  conceptually  and  then 
opera  tional 1 y . 


235 


The  planner  is  seen  in  a  dual  role;  first  the  provider 
of  technical  expertise,  and  second,  the  political  advocate 
of  proper  implementation.   In  the  latter  case  he  must 
marshal  1  those  tools  perceived  as  available  to  him,  ranging 
from  discrete  policy  statements  to  his  own  power  of 
persuasion.   He  is  faced  with  the  difficulties  of  both  the 
substance  of  the  plan  and  the  milieus  in  which  it  must  be 
implemented.   There  are  constraints  of  resources,  time, 
money,  social  and  bureaucratic  systems,  procedures,  law  and 
jurisdiction,  all  of  which  temper  both  the  plan  implementation 
cjnd  his  behavior. 

Each  of  these  constraints  serves  to  define  and  bound 
the  general  concept  of  operational ity .   To  plan  outside  of 
this  concept  is  not  only  useless,  but  criminally  wasteful 
of  public  resources.   In  assuming  the  mantle  of  urban 
planning,  the  planner  must  also  assume  this  responsibility. 


Notes 

1.  Constance  Perin,  "A  Noiseless  Secession  from  the 
Comprehensive  Plan,"  pp.  337-8. 

2.  Paul  Davidoff,  and  Thomas  A.  Reiner,  "A  Choice  Theory 
of  Planning,"  p.  113. 

3.  C.  B.  Wurster,  "Introduction",  Explorations  into  Urban 
Structure ,  Melvin  M.  Webber  e_t  al .  ,  p~.    IT"! 

4.  William  I.  Goodman,  and  Eric  C.  Freund ,  eds.,  Principles 
and  Practice  of  Urban  Planning,  p.  332. 

5.  F.  Stuart  Chapin  Jr.,  "Taking  Stock  of  Techniques  for 
Shaping  Urban  Growth,"  p.  81. 

6.  Albert  Z.  Guttenberg,  "The  Tactical  Plan",  Explorations 
into  Urban  Structure,  Melvin  M.  Webber  et  a 1 . ,  p .  199 . 

7.  Ibid,  p.  217. 

8.  After  Michael  J.  Meshenberg,  "Environmental  Planning: 
1,  Environmental  Information  for  Policy  Formulation," 
pp.  30-34. 


236 


CONCLUDING  REMARKS 


The  overriding  demonstration  of  the  preceeding  discus- 
sion is  that  methodological  considerations  can  be  used  to 
tie  together  the  diverse  and  numerous  aspects  of  urban 
planning.   The  conceptual  model  of  planning  activity  is  a 
suitable  framework  for  tying  these  methodological  considera- 
tions together,  in  both  an  operational  sense  and  a  pedagogic- 
sense.   In  neither  sense,  however,  is  the  application  of 
the  model  exhausted.   Urban  planning  is  probably  too  complex 
and  ( oo  creative  to  allow  for  the  existence  of  a  universal 
methodology.   Rather,  the  use  of  methodological  considerations 
as  suggested  by  the  model  provides  for  the  planner  and  his 
client  constituency  a  sense  of  direction,  an  ordered  conceptual 
procedure  and  an  operational  beginning,  middle,  and  end  of 
the  planning  process.   Such  information  is  presented  as 
showing  the  way  without  being  dogmatic. 

The  theme  of  operationality  is  thus  stressed  because, 
creativity  notwithstanding,  urban  planning  is  so  expensive 
an  undertaking  and  so  clearly  in  the  public  trust  that  every 
effort  must  be  made  to  carry  it  foreward  in  an  environment 
of  astute  business  practice.   Considerations  of  methodology 
are  thereby  focused,  and  such  an  approach  encourages  and 
promotes  a  task  oriented  operationality  which  might  other- 
wise suffer  in  the  face  of  the  many  philosophical  considera- 
tions that  are  necessary. 

Lastly,  it  is  thought  that  any  phase  of  the  planning 
process  as  outlined  can  never  be  obviated  without  making 
the  process  non-operational.   To  be  sure,  a  phase  may  be 
done  by  someone  else,  it  may  be  already  done  in  terms  of 
some  prior  effort,  it  may  be  deferred,  abbreviated  or  even 


237 


intuitively  arrived  at,  but  it  must  be  addressed  somehow  and 
someway.   Any  such  adjustments  are  not  necessarily  fatal 
and,  when  proper] y  aligned  with  conceptual  considerations, 
are  in  fact  efficient  refinements  to  the  theme  of  operation- 
al L  t  y  . 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


238 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


Alonso,  William,  "Predicting  Best  with  Imperfect  Data," 

Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  July, 

W61T 

Anton,  Thomas  J.,  "Politics  and  Planning  in  a  Swedish  Suburb, 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  July 

TWr 

Bacon,  Edmund  N.,  "Urban  Process,"  The  Conscience  of  the 
City ,  Daedalus ,  The  Journal  of  the  American  Academy 
of  Arts  and  Sciences,  Fall,  1968 . 

Beer,  Stafford,  Cybernetics  and  Management,  New  York,  J. 
Wiley  and  Sons,  1959. 

Birch,  D.  L.,  "Toward  a  Stage  Theory  of  Urban  Growth," 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners , 
March,  1971. 

Blumenfeld,  Hans,  The  Modern  Metropolis:   Its  Origins, 
Growth,  Characteristics,  and  Planning,  Cambr i  cTge  , 
The  MIT  Press,  1967. 

Bolan,  Richard  S.,  "Community  Decision  Behavior:   The  Culture 
of  Planning,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners ,  September ,  1969 . 

Bolan,  Richard  S.,  "Emerging  Views  of  Planning,"  Journal 
of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  July  1 967 . 

Bolan,  Richard  S.,  "New  Rules  for  Judging  Analytical 

Techniques  in  Urban  Planning",  Analytical  Techniques, 
Chicago,  American  Society  of  Planning  Officials,  1970. 

Boulding,  D.  E. ,  "General  Systems  Theory  -  The  Skeleton  of 
Science,"   Management  Science,  April  1956. 

Bourne,  Larry  S.,  editor,  Internal  Structure  of  the  City, 
Readings  on  Space  and  Environment^  New  York,  Oxford 
University  Press,  1 971 . 


239 


Boyce,  D.  E.,  N.  D.  Day  and  C.  McDonald,  Metropolitan  Plan 

Making:   An  Analysis  of  Experience  with  the  PreparaFion 
and  Evaluation  of  Alternative  Land  Use  and  Transporta- 
tion Plans,  Monograph  Series  Number  Four,  Phi ladelphia , 
Regional  Science  Research  Institute,  1970. 

Branch,  Melville  C,  and  Ira  M.  Robinson,  "Goals  and  Objec- 
tives in  Civil  Comprehensive  Planning,"  The  Two  Planning 
Review,  January,  1968. 

Braybrooke,  David  and  Charles  Lindblom,  The  Strategy  of 
Dec  i  sion ,  Glencoe,  Illinois,  The  Free  Press,  1963. 

Burgess,  E.  W.,  "Urban  Areas",  Chicago:   An  Experiment  in 

Social  Science  Research ,  T*!  V .  Smi  th  and  I, .  D~  White , 
ed  i  tors  ,  Chicago ,  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1929. 

Chapin,  F.  Stuart,  Jr.,  "Taking  Stock  of  Techniques  for 
Shaping  Urban  Growth,"  Journal  of  the  American 
Institute  of  Planners,  May,  1 963 . 

Chapin,  F.  Stuart,  Jr.,  Urban  Land  Use  Planning,  Urbana  , 
University  of  1 1 lino  is  Press  ,  1965 . 

Chicago  Area  Transportation  Study,  Final  Report,  Volume  LI, 
1960. 

ChishoJm,  Shirley,  Member  of  Congress,  12th  District,  New 
York,  "Planning  With  and  Not  for  People,"  Plann i ng 
1970.   Selected  Papers  from  the  A . S . P .0.  National 
Planning  Conference,  New  York  City,  April  4-9""  1970, 
Chicago .   American  Society  of  Planning  Officials, 
1970. 

Churchman,  C.  West  and  Russell  L.  Ackoff,  "An  Approximate 

Measure  of  Value,"  Journal  of  the  Operations  Research 
Society  of  America,  February,  1954 . 

Clark,  Terry  N.,  Community  Structure  and  Decision  Making, 
San  Francisco,  Chandler  Publishing  Company,  1968 . 

Cleveland  Seven  County  Transportation/Land  Use  Study, 

"Operations  Plan,"  Cleveland,  Ohio,  February,  1966. 

Colby,  C.  C,  "Centrifugal  and  Centripetal  Forces  in  Urban 
Geography,"  Annals  of  the  Association  of  American 
Geographers,  March,  1933 . 

"Community  Relations  Fact  Booklet,"  Industrial  Public 
Relations  Group,  Lafayette,  Indiana,  1969. 


240 


Craik ,  K.  H.  "The  Comprehension  of  the  Everyday  Physical 
Environment,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners ,  January ,  1968 . 

Crieghton,  Roger  L.,  "Recommendations",  Transportation  and 

Community  Values ,  Highway  Research  Board  Special  Report 
Number  105,  Washington  D.  C. ,  Highway  Research  Board, 

vm~. 

Dahl ,  Robert,  Who  Governs? ,  New  Haven,  Connec t i cu L  ,  Ya 1 e 
Uni  versi  ty  Press ,  T961  . 

Davidoff,  Paul,  and  Thomas  A.  Reiner,  "A  Choice  Theory  of 
Planning,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners ,  May,  1962 . 

Deming,  W.  E.,  Some  Theory  of  Sampling,  New  York,  Dover 
Publications ,  Inc . ,  1966 . 

Fertal,  Martin  J.,  Edward  Weiner,  Arthur  J.  Balek  and  Ali 

F.  Sevin,  "Modal  Split:   Documentation  of  Nine  Methods 
for  Estimating  Transit  Usage,"   U.S.  Department  of 
Commerce,  Bureau  of  Public  Roads,  December,  1966. 

Fishburn,  P.  C,  "Methods  of  Estimating  Additive  Utilities," 
Management  Science,  March,  1967. 

Fox,  Douglas  M. ,  "The  Identification  of  Community  Leaders 
by  the  Reputational  and  Decisional  Methods.   Three 
Case  Studies  and  an  Emperical  Analysis  of  the  Lit- 
erature," Sociology  and  Social  Research,  October, 
1969. 

Fratar,  Thomas  J.,  "Vehicular  Trip  Distribution  by  Succes- 
sive Approximation,"  Traffic  Quarterly,  January, 
19  54. 

Friend,  John  K.,  and  W.  N.  Jessop,  Local  Government  and 

Strategic  Choice:   An  Operational  Research  Approach 
to  the  Process  of  Public  Planning,  London,  Tavistock 
Publications,  1969. 

Goodman,  William  I.  and  Eric  C.  Freund ,  eds.  ,  Principles  and 
Practice  of  Urban  Planning,  Washington,  D.  C,  Inter- 
national  City  Managers'  Association,  1968. 

Grecco,  William  L.  and  S.  M.  Breuning,  "Application  of 

Systems  Engineering  Methods  to  Traffic  Forecasting," 
Trip  Characteristics  and  Traffic  Assignment,  Bui  It;  tin 
347,  Washington,  D.C.,  Highway  Research  Board"  1 96? . 


241 


Grecco,  William  L. ,  "Class  Notes  and  Discussions,  Planning 

Methodology  and  Techniques,  C.  E.  613,  Purdue  University, 
1964-197] . 

Guttenberg,  Albert  Z.,  "The  Tactical  Plan",  Explorations  into 
Urban  Structure,  Melvin  M.  Webber,  et  al . ,  Philadelphia , 
University  of  Pennsylvania  Press,  1964. 

Maig,  Robert  M.  ,  Regional  Survey  of  New  York  and  Its  Knv irons, 
Volume  I,  New  York,  1927. 

Hamilton,  Calvin,  S.,  "Monitor  Systems  for  Urban  Planning," 

Urban  Information  and  Policy  Decisions,  Clark  D. 

Rogers ,  Editor ,  University  of  Pittsburgh,  September, 

1964. 
Hansen,  Walter  G.,  "How  Accessibility  Shapes  Land  Use", 

Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  May, 

~ww. ' 

Harris,  Britton,  "Quantitative  Models  of  Urban  Development: 
Their  Role  in  Metropolitan  Policy  -  Making,"   A 
paper  prepared  fur  the  Committee  on  Urban  Economics 
of  Resources  for  the  Future  Inc.   Conference  on  Urban 
Economics:   Analytical  and  Policy  Issues,  Washington \ 
D.C.,  January  26-28,  1967,  revised,  May  1,  1967. 

Harris,  Britton,  "The  Uses  of  Theory  in  the  Simulation  of 
Urban  Phenomena",  A  paper  presented  at  the  45th 
Annual  Meeting  Highway  Research  Board,  January  196b. 

Harris,  Chauncy  and  Edward  Ullman,  "The  Nature  of  Cities," 

Annals  of  the  American  Academy  of  Political  and  Social 
Sc  j  ence~  November  ,  1945  . 

Hawley,  A.  H. ,  Human  Ecology:   A  Theory  of  Community  Struc- 
ture ,  New  York,  The  Ronald  Press  Company,  1950 . 


Hearle,  Edward  F.  R.  and  Raymond  J.  Mason,  A  Data  Processing 
System  for  State  and  Local  Governments""^  Englewood 
Cliffs,  N.J.,  Prentice-Hall,  1963. 


Hensen,  R.  J.,  "Development  of  an  Information  Manual  on  the 
Urban  Transportation  Planning  Process  for  Technical 
Committees  in  Smaller  Urban  Areas,"  Ph.D.  Thesis, 
Purdue  University,  August,  1968. 

Herbert,  J.  D.  and  B.  H.  Stevens,  "A  Model  for  the  Distri- 
bution of  Residential  Activity  in  Urban  Areas," 
Journal  of  the  Regional  Science  Association,  FaLJ, 

vmr.  


242 


Hill,  M. ,  "A  Goals-Achievements  Matrix  for  Evaluating 

Alternative  Plans,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  January"  1968 . 

Ilorwood,  Edgar,  M.,  "A  Fundamental  Look  at  Urban  Information 
Systems",  Urban  Information  and  Policy  Decisions, 
Clark  D .  Rogers ,  Ed  i  tor  ,  University  of  P i tt sburgl  1  , 
September,  1964. 

Hoyt ,  Homer,  The  Structure  and  Growth  of  Residential 

Neighborhoods  in  American  Cities,  Washington,  D . C . , 
Federal  Housing  Administration,  1939 . 

Hunter,  Floyd,  Community  Power  Structure,  Chapel  Hill, 

North  Carolina,  University  of  North  Carolina  Press, 
1953. 

I  sard ,  Walter,  Methods  of  Regional  Analysis:   An  Introduction 
to  Regional  Science ]    New  York,  the  MIT  Press  and  .John 
Wi ley  and  Sons,  Inc. ,  1960. 

Jacobs,  Jane,  The  Death  and  Life  of  Great  American  Cities, 
New  York"  Random  House,  1961 . 

The  Joint  Program:   An  Inter-Agency  Land  Use-Transportation 
Planning  Program  for  the  Twin  Cities  Metropolitan 
Area,  "Meeting  the  Challenge  of  Metropolitan  Growth," 
St.  Paul,  Minnesota,  January,  1963. 

Kaplan,  Marshall,  "Advocacy  and  the  Urban  Poor,"   Journal 
of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  March"  1969 . 

Kossiakoff,  Alesander,  "The  Systems  Engineering  Process," 
Operations  Research  and  Systems  Engineering,  CD. 
Flagle,  W.H.  Huggins,  and  R.H.  Roy,  editors,  Baltimore, 
Maryland,  The  John  Hopkins  Press,  1960. 

Leontief,  Wassily,  The  Structure  of  the  American  Economy, 
1919-1939,  Oxford,  Oxford  University  Press,  1951. 

Litchfield,  N.  "Cost  Benefit  Analysis  in  Plan  Evaluation," 
Publication  165,  Civil  Engineering  Systems  Labora- 
tories, M.I.T. ,  May  1962. 

Lowry,  Ira  S.,  "A  Model  of  Metropolis,"  Santa  Monica,  The 
RAND  Corporation,  August,  1964. 

Lowry,  Ira  S.,  "A  Short  Course  in  Model  Design",  Journal 
of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  May,  1965. 

Lynch,  Kevin,  The  Image  of  the  City,  Cambridge,  The  MIT 
Press,  1<T613~ 


243 


Manheim,  M.L.,  "Model  Building  and  Decision  Making,"  Publica- 
tion 165,  Civil  Engineering  Systems  Laboratories, 
M.I .T. ,  May  1962. 

Martin,  Brian  V.,  Frederick  W.  Memmott,  TTI  and  Alexander  I. 
Bone ,  Principles  and  Techniques  of  Predicting  Future 
Demand  for  Urban  Area  Transportation,  Cambridge , 
Massachusetts,  The  M.I.T.  Press,  1961 . 

Martin,  G.  H. ,  "The  Town  as  Palimpsest",  The  Study  of  Urban 
History,  H.  J.  Dyos,  ed.,  New  York,  St.  Martin's 
Press,  1968. 

Matthias,  J.  S.,  "Recreational  Impact  of  Multi-Purpose 

Reservoirs",  Ph.D.  Thesis,  Purdue  University,  August, 
1967. 

Maxman ,  R.  J.,  "Development  of  the  Environmental  Data  Stor- 
age and  Retrieval  System",  MSCE  Thesis,  Purdue 
University,  June,  1968. 

McLaughlin,  W.  A.,  "Traffic  Assignment  by  Systems  Analysis," 
Ph.D.  Thesis,  Purdue  University,  1965. 

Meshenberg,  Michael  J.,  "Environmental  Planning:   1, 

Knvironmental  Information  for  Policy  Formulation", 
Planning  Advisory  Service  Report  263,  American 
Society  of  Planning  Officials,  November,  1970a. 

Meshenberg,  Michael  J.,  "Expenditures,  Staff,  and  Salaries 
of  Planning  Agencies,  1970,"  Planning  Advisory 
Service  Report  256,  American  Society  of  Planning* 
Officials,  April,  1970b . 

Miller,  D.  W.  and  M.  K.  Starr,  Executive  Decisions  and 
Operations  Research,  Englewood  Cliffs,  W.    J . , 
Prentice-Hall,  1960. 

Moore,  F.  T. ,  "Operations  Research  on  Urban  Problems," 
Paper  3414,  Santa  Monica,  The  Rand  Corporation, 
June,  1966. 

Nakkash,  T.  Z.,  "Activity  -  Accessibility  Models  of  Trip 
Generation,"  Ph.D.  Thesis,  Purdue  University,  1969. 

O'Brien,  James  J.,  Scheduling  Handbook,  New  York,  McGrnw 
Hill  Book  Company,  1969. 

Olmstead,  Donald  W.,  "Organizational  Leadership  and  Social 
Structure  in  a  Small  City,"  American  Sociological 
Review ,  June,  1954. 


244 


Perin,  Constance,  "A  Noiseless  Secession  from  the  Compre- 
hensive Plan,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners ,  September,  1967. 

Perucci,  Robert  and  Marc  Pilisuk,  "Leaders  and  Ruling 

Elites:   The  Interorganizational  Bases  of  Community 
Power,"  American  Sociological  Review,  November, 
1970. 

Pittsburgh  Area  Transportation  Study,  Volume  I,  November, 
1961. 


Pollard,  William  S.  Jr.,  and  Daniel  W.  More,  "The  State  of 
the  Art  of  Planning,"  Journal  of  the  Urban  Planning 
J  Development  Division.  Proceedings  of  the  Ameri- 
Society  of  Civil  Engineers,  April,  1969. 


and 
can 


Preston,  James  D.,  "Identification  of  Community  Leaders," 
Sociology  and  Social  Research,  January,  1969. 

Rabinovitz,  Francine,  "Politics,  Personality,  and  Planning," 
Public  Administration  Review,  March,  1967. 

Rhode  Island  Statewide  Comprehensive  Transportation  and 

Land  Use  Planning  Program,  "Program  Design  Report," 
Providence,  Rhode  Island,  February,  1965. 

Safdie,  Moshe,  Beyond  Habitat,  Cambridge,  The  MIT  Press, 
1970. 

Schimpeler,  Charles  C,  "A  Decision-Theoretic  Approach  to 
Weighting  Community  Development  Criteria  and  Evalu- 
ating Alternative  Plans,"  Ph.D.  Thesis,  Purdue 
University,  August,  1967. 

Schulman,  L.  L.,  "Traffic  Generation  and  Distribution  of 
Weekend  Recreational  Trips",  MSCE  Thesis,  Purdue 
University,  June,  1964. 

Siegelman,  Leonore  R. ,  "The  1970  Census:   A  resource  for 

Housing  and  City  Planning  Studies,"  Planning  Advisory 
Service  Report  No.  267,  Chicago ,  American  Society  of 
Planning  Officials,  March,  1971. 

Simonds,  J.  0.,  Landscape  Architecture:   The  Shaping  of 
Man's  Natural  Environment,  New  York,  McGraw-Hill 
Book  Company,  1961. 

So,  Frank  S.,  "Metropolitan  Planning  Policy  Implementation," 
Planning  Advisory  Service  Report  262 ,  American  Society 
of  Planning  Officials,  October,  1970. 


24S 


Spreiregen,  P.  D.,  Urban  Design:   The  Architecture  uf  Towns 
and  Cities,  New  York,  McGraw-Hill  Book  Company,  1965. 

Steger,  Wilbur  A.  and  T.  R.  Lakshmanan,  "Plan  Evaluation 

Methodologies:   Some  Aspects  of  Decision  Requirements 
and  Analytical  Response  ,  Highway  Research  Board 
Special  Report  77,  Washington,  D.C.,  Highway  Research 
Board,  1968. 

Stewart,  W.  Don,  "An  Urban  Area  Use  Model  to  Maximize 

Return,"  Ph.D.  Thesis,  Purdue  University,  January, 
1969. 

Tiebout,  Charles  M. ,  "The  Community  Economic  Base  Study," 
Supplementary  Paper  No.  16,  New  York,  The  Committee 
for  Economic  Development,  December,  1962. 

Tomazinis,  Anthony  R. ,  "A  New  Method  of  Trip  Distribution  in 
an  Urban  Area,"  41st  Annual  Meeting  of  the  Highway 
Research  Board,  January,  1962. 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  the  Census,  "Census  Use  Study:   General 

Description,"  Report  No.  1,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S. 
Government,  Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Computer  Mapping,"  Report 

No.  2,  Washington,  D.  C.,  U.  S.  Government  Printing 
Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Data  Tabulation  Activities," 

Report  No.  3,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government 
Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   The  Dime  Geocoding  System," 

Report  No.  4,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government 
Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Data  Interests  of  Local 

Agencies,"  Report  No.  5,  Washington,  D.  C.,  U .  S. 
Government  Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Family  Health  Survey," 

Report  No.  6,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government 
Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Health  Information  System," 

Report  No.  7,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government 
Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Data  Uses  in  Hea 1 t h  Planning," 


Report  No.  8,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  GovernmenL 
PrLnting  Office,  1970. 


246 


,  "Census  Use  Study:   Data  Uses  in  Urban  Planning," 

Report  No.  9,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government 
Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Data  Uses  in  School  Administra- 
tion," Report  No.  JO,  Washington  D.  C,  U.  S.  Govern- 
ment Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Area  Travel  Survey,"  Report 

No.  11,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government  Printing 
Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Health  Information  System-IL," 

Report  No.  12,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.  S.  Government 
Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Computer  Resource  Allocation 

Model  (CRAM),"  Report  No.  13,  Washington,  D.  C,  U.S. 
Government  Printing  Office,  1970. 

,  "Census  Use  Study:   Geocoding  with  ADMATCH  - 

A  Los  Angeles  Experience,"  Report  No.  14,  Washington, 
D.  C,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  1971.. 

,  1970  Census  User's  Guide,  Washington,  I).  C, 


U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  1970 

Vance,  James  E.  ,  Jr.,  "Focus  on  Downtown,"  Comniun  i  ty 
Planning  Review,  Summer,  1966. 

Walker,  J.  R.,  "Rank  Classification:   A  Procedure  for 

Determining  Future  Trip  Ends,"  Developing  Transporta- 
tion Plans,  Record  240,  Washington  D~.    C,  Highway 
Research  Board,  1968 . 

Webber,  Melvin  M.  e_t  al .  ,  Explorations  into  Urban  Structure, 
Philadelphia,  University  of  Pensylvania  Press,  1 964 . 

Weimer,  Arthur  M.  and  Homer  Hoyt ,  Principles  of  Urban  Real 
Estate,  New  York,  The  Ronald  Press  Company,  1939 . 

Wetmore,  Louis  B.  "Preparing  the  Profession  for  its  Changing 
Role,"  Urban  Planning  in  Transition,  Krnest  Krber, 
Editor,  New  York,  Grossman  Publishers,  1970. 

Winfrey,  Robley,  Economic  Analysis  for  Highways,  Scranton, 
Pa.  ,  International  Textbook  Company,  1969. 

Wurster,  C.  B.,  "Introduction,"  Explorations  into  Urban 
Structure ,  Melvin  M.  Webber  et  al .  ,  Univers  i  ty  of 
Pennsylvania  Press,  1964. 


247 


The  Vice  President's  Handbook  for  Local  Officials:   A 

Guide  to  Federal  Assistance  for  Local  Governments, 
Washington,  D.  C.,  Office  of  the  Vice  President, 
November  I ,  1967 . 


General  References 

Altshuler,  Alnn  A.,  The  City  Planning  Process,  A  Political 
Analysis ,  Lthaca ,  New  York,  Cornell  University  Press, 
1965. 

Altshuler,  Alan  A.,  "The  Goals  of  Comprehensive  Planning," 

Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  August, 
m_ 

Altshuler,  Alan,  "The  Values  of  Urban  Transportation  Policy," 
Transportation  and  Community  Values,  Highway  Research 
Board  Special  Report  105,  Washington ,  D .  C .  highway 
Research  Board,  1969 . 

American  Society  of  Planning  Officials,  "Threshold  of 

Planning  Information  Systems,"  Selected  papers  from 
the  A.S.P.O.,  National  Planning  Conference,  Houston, 
April  1967,  Chicago,  American  Society  of  Planning 
Officials,  1967. 

Arnstein,  Sherri  R. ,  "A  Ladder  of  Citizen  Participation," 

Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  July 
_6~_ 

Atchley,  Robert  C,  "Planner's  Notebook:   A  Short-cut 

Method  for  Estimating  the  Population  of  Metropolitan 
Areas,"   Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners, 
July,  1968T 

Austin,  W.  Burnet,  "Better  Forecasting  for  Better  Planning: 
A  Systems  Approach,"  An  unpublished  paper  delivered 
at  the  1970  AIP  CONFER-IN,  Minneapolis/St .  Paul, 
October,  1970. 

Babcock,  W.  F. ,  "The  Changing  Role  of  the  Planner  and  Engineer 
in  Transportation  and  Systems  Design  Process,"  an 
address  delivered  to  the  50th  annual  meeting,  Highway 
Research  Board,  Washington  D.  C,  January  18,  1971. 

Barton -Aschman  Associates,  Inc.,  "Planning  Organization  and 
Administration,  Memorandum  Report  #10,  Comprehensive 
Planning  Studies,  Beloit  City  Planning  Commission," 
BeJoit,  Wisconsin,  1965. 


248 


Bell,  Wendell,  "The  Utility  of  the  Shevky  Topology  for  the 
Design  of  Urban  Sub-Area  Field  Studies,"  Journal  of 
Social  Psychology,  XLVII,  1958. 

Berton,  A.  H.,  "Bringing  Society  Back  In  -  Survey  Research 

and  Macro-Methodology,"  American  Behavioral  Scientist, 
November-December,  1968. 

Blalock,  H.  M. ,  Jr.,  and  A.  B.  Blalock,  Methodology  in 

Social  Research,  New  York,  McGraw-Hill  Book  Company, 
T9T8T 

Buck,  Roy  C.  and  Robert  A.  Rath,  "Planner's  Notebook: 

Planning  as  an  Institutional  Innovation  in  the  Smaller 
City,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners, 
January"  1970. 

Burke,  Edmond  M. ,  "Citizen  Participation  Strategy,"  Journal 
of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  September, 
T9T8~^ 

Catalog  of  Federal  Assistance  Programs,  Washington,  D.  C, 
Office  of  Economic  Opportunity,  Executive  Office 
of  the  President,  June  1,  1967. 

Chapin,  F.  Stuart  Jr.,  Urban  Land  Use  Planning,  Second 

Edition,  Urbana,  University  of  Illinois  Press,  1965. 

Claire,  William  H. ,  Urban  Planning  Guide  Number  49,  A.S.C.E. 
Series  "Manuals  and  Reports  on  Engineering  Practice," 
New  York,  The  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers, 
1969. 

Clavel,  Pierre,  "Planners  and  Citizen  Boards:   Some 

Applications  of  Social  Theory  to  the  Problems  of  Plan 
Implementation,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners,  May,  195BT 

Cleveland  Seven  County  Transportation/Land  Use  Study, 

"Preliminary  Study  Design,"  Cleveland,  Ohio,  February 
18,  1965. 

Coleman,  Alice,  "A  Geographical  Model  for  Land  Use  Analysis," 
Geography,  January,  1969. 

Cotham,  James  C.  3rd,  and  Frank  L.  Hendrix,  "Mobilizing 

Community  Leadership  in  Urban  Transit  Planning:   Ah 
Overview,"  High  Speed  Ground  Transportation,  Winter- 
Spring  1971. 


249 


Cullen,  Gordon,  Townscape ,  New  York,  Reinhold  Publishing 
Corporation^  1961. 

Dale,  Ernest,  and  Lyndall  F.  Urwick,  Staff  in  Organization, 
New  York,  McGraw  Hill,  1960. 

Davidoff,  Paul,  "Advocacy  and  Pluralism  in  Planning," 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners, 
November ,  1965 . 

Davidoff,  Paul,  Linda  Davidoff,  and  Neil  Newton  Gold, 

"Suburban  Action:   Advocate  Planning  for  an  Open  Society," 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  January, 

vm: 

Davidoff,  Paul  and  T.  F.  Reiner,  "A  Choice  Theory  of  Planning," 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  May, 
ViFT. 

De  Chiara,  Joseph,  and  Lee  Koppelman,  Planning  Design 

Criteria,  New  York,  Van  Nostrand  Reinhold  Company, 
TWF. 

Doggett,  Rosalyn  P.,  "The  Development  Sector  Approach  to 

Retional  Planning,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  May  1969~! 

Dohrenwend,  Barbara,  John  Colombotos  and  Bruce  Dohrenwend , 
"Social  Distance  and  Interviewer  Effects,"  Public 
Opinion  Quarterly,  Fall,  1968. 

Draper,  N.  R.  and  H.  Smith,  Applied  Regression  Analysis, 
New  York,  John  Wiley  &  Sons,  Inc . ,  1966. 

Dror ,  Yehezkel,  "The  Planning  Process:  a  Facet  Design," 
International  Review  of  Administrative  Sciences, 
XXIX,  No.  1,  1963. 

Dyckman,  J.,  "Planning  and  Decision  Theory,"  Journal  of  the 
American  Institute  of  Planners ,  November^  1961 . 

Einsweiler,  Robert  C.  "The  Decision-Making  Forum:   Improving 
the  Decision-Making  Process,"  Highway  Research  Record 
238,  1968. 

Elias,  C.  E. ,  Jr.,  James  Gillies  and  Sveno  Riemer,  Metro- 
polis :   Values  in  Conflict,  Belmont,  California, 
Wadsworth  Publishing  Company,  1964. 

Ellis,  Jack  A.  N.,  "The  Quest  for  Rational  Decision  through 
Public  Participation  in  Transportation  Planning,  Who 
Should  Participate  and  When,"  an  address  delivered  to 
the  50th  annual  meeting,  Highway  Research  Board, 
Washington  D.  C,  January  18,  1971. 


250 


Falk,  Edward  L.,  "Measurement  of  Community  Values:   The 
Spokane  Experiment,"  an  unpublished  paper  by  the 
director,  Spokane  Metropolitan  Area  Transportation 
Study,  January  2,  1968. 

Fellman,  Gordon,  "Research  Report:  Neighborhood  Protest  of 
an  Urban  Highway" ,  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  March,  1969. 

Form,  William,  Joel  Smith,  Gregory  Stone  and  James  Cowhig, 
"The  Compatibility  of  Alternative  Approaches  to  the 
Delimitation  of  Urban  Sub-Areas,"  American  Sociological 
Review ,  August,  1954. 

Forrester,  Jay  W. ,  Urban  Dynamics,  Cambridge,  The  MIT  Press, 
1969. 

France,  Edwin  A.,  "The  Effects  of  Citizen  Participation  in 
Governmental  Decision  Making,"  an  address  by  the 
administrative  assistant  to  the  Mayor  of  Chicago 
delivered  at  the  50th  annual  meeting,  Highway  Research 
Board,  Washington  D.  C,  January  18,  1971. 

Friedmann,  John  R. ,  "A  Response  to  Altshuler :   Comprehensive 
Planning  as  a  Process,"  Journal  of  the  American 
Institute  of  Planners,  August ,  1965 . 

Garnick,  Daniel  H. ,  "Differential  Regional  Multiplier 

Models,"  Journal  of  Regional  Science,  April,  1970. 

Garnick,  Daniel  H.   "Disaggregated  Basic-Service  Models  and 
Regional  Input-Output  Models  in  Multiregional  Pro- 
ductions," Journal  of  Regional  Science,  April,  1969. 

Gibberd,  Frederick,  Town  Design,  New  Yori ,  Frederick  A. 
Praeger,  1959. 

Gibbs,  Jack  P.,  editor,  Urban  Research  Methods,  New  York, 
Van  No st rand  Company,  1961 . 

Gilbert,  Neil,  and  Joseph  W.  Eaton,  "Research  Report:   Who 

Speaks  for  the  Poor,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  November,  1970. 

Gore,  William  J.,  and  J.  W.  Dyson,  eds .  ,  The  Making  of 
Decisions:  A  Reader  in  Administrative  Behavior, 
Glencoe ,  Illinois,  The  Free  Press,  1964  . 

Harland  Bartholomew  and  Associates,  "Procedural  Outlines 

for  Major  Thoroughfare  Planning,  Memphis,  Tennessee," 
1964. 


251 


Harral,  Harry  D. ,  "Developing  a  Working  Concept  of  the 

Physical  Extent  of  a  Metropolitan  Area:   A  Case  Study 
of  the  Philadelphia  Metropolitan  Area,"  Metropolitan 
Analysis ,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  1958 . 

Hemmens,  George  C. ,  "Report:   Planning  Agency  Experience 
with  Urban  Development  Models  and  Data  Processing," 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners, 
September,  1968. 

Highway  Research  Board,  "Data  Requirements  for  Metropolitan 
Transportation  Planning,"  National  Cooperative 
Highway  Research  Program  Report  120,  Washington, 
D.  C. ,  1971. 

Highway  Research  Board,  "Land  Use  Forecasting  Concepts," 
Highway  Research  Record   126,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Highway  Research  Board,  1966 . 

Highway  Research  Board,  Urban  Development  Models ,  Special 
Report  No.  97,  Washington,  D.  C.,  1968. 

Hillegass,  Thomas  J.,  Charles  C.  Schimpeler  and  William  L. 

Grecco,  "Community  Decision  Structure  and  Urban  Planning 
Process,"  Journal  of  the  Urban  Planning  and  Develop- 
ment Division,  the  Proceedings  of  the  American  Society 
of  Civil  Engineers,  March,  1970. 

Hoover,  E'.  M.  and  R.  Vernon,  Anatomy  of  a  Metropolis, 
Cambridge,  Harvard  University  Press ,  1959 . 

Holleb,  Doris  B.,  Social  and  Economic  Information  for  Urban 
Planning ,  Volumes  1  and  2 ,  Chicago,  Center  for  Urban 
Studies ,  University  of  Chicago,  1969. 

Hoyt ,  Homer,  "The  Importance  of  Manufacturing  in  Basic 
Employment,"  Land  Economics,  August,  1969. 

Hyman ,  Herman,  "Planning  with  Citizens:   Two  Styles," 

Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  March, 
1MT. 


Isenson,  Raymond  S. ,  "Technological  Forecasting  in  Pers 
tive,  '  Management  Science,  October,  1966. 


pec' 


Jacobs,  Jane,  The  Economy  of  Cities,  New  York,  Random  House, 
1969. 

Kent,  T.  J.,  Jr.   The  Urban  General  Plan,  San  Francisco, 
Chandler  Publishing  Company,  1964. 


2  52 


Krueckeberg,  Donald  A.,  "A  Multivariate  Analysis  of  Metro- 
politan Planning,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  September  1969. 

LeBreton,  Preston  P.  and  Dale  A.  Henning,  Planning  Theory, 
Englewood  Cliffs,  N.  J.,  Prentice-Hall,  1961. 

Levinson,  R.  S.  and  F.  H.  Wynn ,  "Some  Aspects  of  Future 
Transportation  in  Urban  Areas,"  Highway  Research 
Board  Bulletin  326,  Washington,  D.C. ,  Highway  Research 
Board,  1962. 

Levy,  F.  K. ,  G.  L.  Thompson  and  J.  D.  Wiest.   "The  ABC's 

of  the  Critical  Path  Method,"  Harvard  Business  Review, 
SepLember-October ,  1963. 

I.inclbloom,  Charles  E.  ,  "The  Science  of  'Muddling  Through'," 
Public  Administration  Review,  Spring,  1968. 

Luttveg,  Norman  R.,  "The  Structure  of  Beliefs  Among  Leaders 
and  the  Public,"  Public  Opinion  Quarterly,  October- 
December,  1968. 

Lyden ,  Fremont  J.  and  Ernest  G.  Miller,  editors,  Planning , 
Programming,  Budgeting:   A  Systems  Approach  to 
Management ,  Chicago ,  Markham,  1967 . 

Mantel,  Samuel  J.,  Jr.,  and  Burton  V.  Dean,  "Community  Values 
and  Operations  Research,"  Transportation  and  Community 
Values,  Highway  Research  Board  Special  Report  105, 
Washington,  D.  C,  Highway  Research  Board,  1969 . 

Marshal],  Dale  K.,  "Who  Participates  in  What?,  a  Biblio- 
graphic Essay  on  Individual  Participation  in  Urban 
Areas,"  Urban  Affairs  Quarterly,  December,  1968. 

Maxman,  R.  L.  and  W.  L.  Grecco,  "An  Operational  Planning 
Information  System  for  Small  Communities,"  Highway 
Research  Record  322,  Washington  D.  C,  Highway 
Research  Board,  1970. 

Mayer,  Harold  M. ,  and  Clyde  F.  Kohn,  editors,  Readings  in 
Urban  Geography,  Chicago,  The  University  of  Chicago 
Press,  1959. 

Mayer,  Harold  W. ,  "Making  a  Living  in  Cities:   The  Urban 

Economic  Base,"  Journal  of  Geography,  February,  1969. 

McCue,  Gerald  M. ,  William  R.  Ewald,  Jr.,  and  The  Midwest 
Research  Institute,  Creating  the  Human  Environment, 
Urbana,  University  of  Illinois  Press,  1970. 


253 


McGimsey,  George,  "Planner's  Notebook:   The  1970  Census: 
Changes  and  Innovations,"  Journal  of  the  American 
Institute  of  Planners,  May  1970. 

McGrath,  William  R. ,  "Land  Use  in  Traffic  Generation," 

Highway  Research  Board  Bulletin  224,  Washington,  D.  C, 
Highway  Research  Board,  1959 . 

McLoughlin,  J.  Brian,  Urban  and  Regional  Planning:   A 

Systems  Approach"  New  York,  Frederick  A.  Praeger ,  1969. 

Meshenberg,  Michael  J.,  "Expenditures,  Staff,  and  Saleries 
of  Planning  Agencies,  1970,"  Planning  Advisory 
Service  Report  No.  2  56.  Chicago,  American  Society 
of  Planning  Officials,  April  19  70. 

"Metropolitan  Transportation  Planning  Seminars,"  American 
Institute  of  Planners  and  the  U.S.  Department  of 
Transportation,  December,  1971. 

Mitchel,  W.  H. ,  "Tooling  Computers  to  the  Medium  Sized 
City,"  Public  Management,  March,  1967. 

Mitchel,  W.  H.  "Urban  Planners  and  Information,"  Datamation , 
October,  1966. 

Mogulof,  Melvin,  "Coallition  to  Adversary:   Citizen  Partici- 
pation in  Three  Federal  Programs,"  Journal  of  the 
American  Institute  of  Planners,  July^  1969 . 

Moore,  Eric  G.,  and  Barry  S.  Wellar,  "Technical  Report: 
Urban  Data  Collection  by  Airborne  Sensor,"  Journal 
of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners,  January ,  T9~69. 

Moyer,  Ralph  A.,  "Comprehensive  Urban  Transportation  Study 

Methods,"  Journal  of  the  Highway  Division,  Proceedings 
of  the  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers,  December^ 
1MT. 

Moynihan,  Daniel  P.,  Maximum  Feasible  Misunderstanding: 

Community  Action  in  the  War  on  Poverty,  New  York,  The 
Free  Press,  1969. 

Myers,  Summer,  "How  to  Sell  New  Ideas  to  the  Cities," 
Harvard  Business  Review,  July-August,  1968. 

Nadler,  Gerald,  "An  Investigation  of  Design  Methodology," 
Management  Science,  June,  1967. 

Northeastern  Illinois  Planning  Commission,  "The  Plan  Study: 
Methodology,"  April,  1968. 


254 


Peters,  W.  S.,  "A  Method  of  Deriving  Geographic  Patterns 
of  Associated  Demographic  Characteristics  Within 
Urban  Areas,"  Social  Forces,  October,  1956. 

Pfouts,  R.  W. ,  editor,  The  Techniques  of  Urban  Economic 
Analysis,  West  Trenton,  N.  J.,  Chandler-Davis  Co., 
i960 

"The  Planner  in  Emerging  Urban  Society  -  A  Confrontation," 
Proceedings  of  the  1965  Annual  Conference  in  St . 
Louis,  Missouri,  American  Institute  of  Planners,  1965. 

Post,  Arnold  R.,  "Research  Report:   Mobility  Analysis," 
Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners, 
November,  1969 . 

Preston,  James  D.,  "A  Comprehensive  Methodology  for  Ident- 
ifying Community  Leaders,"  Rural  Sociology,  December, 
1969. 

Proshansky,  Harold  M.  ,  William  H.  ,  Ittelson  and  l.eanne  G. 
Rivlin,  eds.,  Environmental  Psychology:   Ma^  and  His 
Physical  Setting,  New  York,  Holt,  Rinehart  and 
Winston,  1970. 

Rapoport,  A.  and  R.  Hawkes ,  "The  Perception  of  Urban 

Complexity,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners ,  March,  1970. 

Reps,  John  W.,  The  Making  of  Urban  America:   A  History  of 

City  Planning  in  trie  United  States,  Princeton ,  N.    J .  , 
The  Princeton  University  Press,  T9~65 . 

Reps,  John  R. ,  "Requiem  for  Zoning,"  Planning  196A ,  Chicago, 
American  Society  of  Planning  Officials,  1964. 

Rickert,  John  E. ,  editor,  Urban  and  Regional  Information 

Systems:   Federal  Activities  and  Specialized  Systems, 
Kent,  Ohio,  Kent  State  University,  1968. 

Samuelson,  Paul  A. ,  Economics,  An  Introductory  Analysis , 
fifth  edition,  New  York,  McGraw  Hill  Book  Company, 
1961. 

Schellie  Associates,  Inc.,  "Operations  Procedure  Manual,  A 
Detailed  Work  Program  for  the  Greater  Lafayette  Area 
Transportation-Development  Study,"  Area  Plan  Commis- 
sion, Tippecanoe  County,  Indiana,  1968. 


255 


Schimpeler,  Charles  C. ,  "inventory  Procedures  and  General 

Organizational  Aspects  of  the  Louisville  Metropolitan 
Comprehensive  Transportation  and  Development  Program," 
Prepared  for  the  51st  annual  Purdue  Road  School, 
Purdue  University,  Lafayette,  Indiana,  March  29,  - 
April  1,  1965. 

Schnore,  Leo  F.  and  Henry  Fagin,  editors,  Urban  Research 

and  Policy  Planning,  Beverly  Hills,  Cal ifornia ,  Sage 

twt. —  

Shaffer,  Margaret  T.,  "Attitude  Techniques  in  Action,"  an 
unpublished  Paper  delivered  to  the  49th  annual 
meeting,  Highway  Research  Board,  Washington  D.C., 
January  1970. 

Shunk,  Gordon  A.,  "The  Journey  to  Work:   A  Singular  Basis 
for  Travel  Pattern  Surveys,"  Ph.D.  Thesis,  Purdue 
University,  January  1968. 

Smith,  J.,  "A  Method  for  the  Classification  of  Areas  on  the 
Basis  of  Demographically  Homogeneous  Populations," 
American  Sociological  Review,  April  1954. 

Spicer,  Richard  B.,  "Increasing  State  and  Regional  Power 

in  the  Development  Process,"  Planning  Advisory  Service 
Report  255,  American  Society  of  Planning  Officials, 
March,  1970. 

Stamp,  Dudley  L . ,  Applied  Geography .   Baltimore,  A  Pelican 
Original ,  Penguin ,  19607 

Steger,  Wilbur  A.,  "The  Pittsburgh  Urban  Renewal  Simulation 
Model,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Planners, 
May,  1963T 

Steiner,  George  A.,  "The  Critical  Role  of  Top  Management  in 
Long  Range  Planning,"  Arizona  Review,  April,  1966. 

Strand,  Sverre,  "Comment:   Models  and  Ethics",  Journal  of 
The  American  Institute  of  Planners,  January,  1971 . 

Stuart,  Darwin  G. ,  "Information  Systems  in  Urban  Planning: 
A  Review,"  Planning  Advisory  Service  Report  No.  260, 
Chicago ,  American  Society  of  Planning  Officials, 
August,  1970. 

Teitz,  M.  B.,  "Cost  Effectiveness:   A  Systems  Approach  to 
Analysis  of  Urban  Services,"  Journal  of  the  American 
Institute  of  Planners,  September ,  1968. 

Vedder,  J.,  "Planning  Problems  with  Multidemensional 

Consequences,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners,  March"  1970. 


256 


Vogt  -  Ivers  and  Associates,  Economic  and  Population  Factors, 
Manual  R,  Ohio  Procedural  Manuals,  Ohio  Department  of 
Highways,  1966. 

Vogt  -  Ivers  and  Associates,  "An  Intermediate  Report  for 

Project  Number  32  -  Community  Goals  and  Objectives," 
Louisville  Metropolitan  Comperhensive  Transportation 
and  Development  Program,  April,  1967. 

Vogt  -  Ivers  and  Associates,  "Social  and  Community  Factors, 
Manual  9,  Ohio  Procedure  Manuals,"  Ohio  Department  of 
Highways,  1966. 

Voorhees,  Alan  M.,  ed . ,  "Land  Use  and  Traffic  Models," 

Special  Issue,  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of 
Planners,  May  19~5T^ 

Wachs,  Martin,  "Basic  Approaches  to  the  Measurement  of 

Community  Values,  '  an  unpublished  paper  delivered  to 
the  49th  annual  meeting,  Highway  Research  Board, 
Washington  D.C.,  January  1970. 

Walksberg,  Joseph,  "The  Role  of  Sampling  in  Population 

Concensuses  -  Its  Effect  on  Timeliness  and  Accuracy," 
Demography,  1968. 

Warburton,  Ralph,  "New  Concepts  in  Urban  Transportati on 

Systems,  '  Journal  of  the  Franklin  Institute,  Special 
issue,  November ,  1968 . 

Warren,  Ronald  L.,  "Cities  First  Round:   Politics  Planning 
and  Participation,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  July,  l^W. 

Webber,  Melvin  M. ,  "Alternative  Styles  for  Citizen  Partici- 
pation in  Transport  Planning,"  an  Address  delivered 
to  the  50th  annual  meeting,  Highway  Research  Board, 
Washington  D.C.,  January  18,  1971. 

Webber,  M.  M. ,  "The  Roles  of  Intelligence  Systems  in  Urban- 
Systems  Planning,"  Journal  of  the  American  Institute 
of  Planners,  November ,  1965 . 

White,  Morton  and  Lucia,  The  Intellectual  Versus  the  City, 
Cambridge,  Harvard  University  Press,  1962 . 


Witwer 


,  David  B..  "Solving  Land-Use  Determinations  Elect' 
ronically,  '  The  American  City,  February,  1965. 


257 


Ylvisaker,  Paul  N. ,  "O'Harrow  Memorial  Lecture:   Utter  Chaos 
or  Simple  Complexity,"  Planning  1970.   Selected  Papers 
from  the  A.S.P.O.  Planning  Conference,  New  York, 
April  4-9,  j-970,  Chicago,  American  Society  of  Plann ing 
Officials,  1970. 

Ylvisaker,  Paul  N.  ,  "The  Resident  Looks  at  Community  Values,' 
Transportation  and  Community  Values,  Highway  Research 
Board  Special  Report  Number  105,  Washington  D .C . , 
Highway  Research  Board  ,  1969 . 

Young,  Robert  C,  "Goals  and  Goal  Setting,"  Journal  of  the 
American  Institute  of  Planners,  March,  1966. 


VITA 


258 


VITA 


Thomas  Allan  Dames  was  born  in  Oak  Park,  Illinois  on 
June  30,  1943. 

He  graduated  from  Fenwick  High  School  in  1961  and  the 
United  States  Naval  Academy  in  1965.   He  holds  the  commission 
of  Lieutenant,  Civil  Engineer  Corps,  United  States  Navy. 

Lieutenant  Dames  has  served  at  Great  Lakes,  Illinois, 
Phu  Bai  and  Gia  Le  in  the  Republic  of  Vietnam  as  a  Company 
Commander  in  the  133rd  Seabees,  and  Pearl  Harbor,  Hawaii. 
His  duties  have  necessitated  extensive  travel  in  the  Far 
East . 

He  is  also  a  graduate  of  Purdue  University,  B.S.C.E., 
1968  and  M.S.C.E.  in  Urban  Planning  and  Engineering,  1968. 

Lieutenant  Dames  holds  several  American  and  foreign 
military  awards,  including  the  Navy  Commendation  Medal, 
the  Army  Commendation  Medal,  the  Combat  Action  Ribbon,  and 
the  Republic  of  Vietnam  Technical  Service  Medal  and  Civic 
Action  Medal . 

Lieutenant  Dames  is  married  to  the  former  Ursula  Anne 
Roberts  of  Annandale,  Virginia.   They  have  two  children, 
Thomas  Christopher  and  John  Damien. 


ox 


8 


IT 


01 


6 


8 


I 


9